Sophos XG Firewall User Guide

- The page displays the list of all dynamic and default hosts. The page also provides options to add a new

3. Based on the selection made in Restriction based on and Cycle Type, you can create any one of the following four types of policies: a) Policy 1: Total Network Traffic - Cyclic Policy

Cycle Period

Select the cycle period from the drop-down list. Cycle period specifies the duration of cyclic policies, that is, day, week, month and year.

Cycle Network Traffic

Specify the network traffic limit (in MB) per cycle. It specifies the data transfer allowed during each cycle to the user. When data transfer reaches the limit, the user is disconnected.

Maximum Network Traffic

By default, the check box is selected to Unlimited and no restriction is placed on the maximum data transfer for the duration of the policy. Clear the check box to specify the maximum data transfer (in

MB) allowed by the policy. When total data transfer reaches this limit, the user is disconnected.

Example: Cycle Period: Week

Cycle Network Traffic: 5 MB (5 MB data transfer is allocated to the user each week. The user is disconnected when this limit is reached during the week.)

Maximum Network Traffic: 10 MB (10 MB data transfer is allocated to the user for the duration of the policy. The user is disconnected when this limit is reached.)

Sophos XG Firewall | System | 58

Figure 30: Total Network Traffic - Cyclic Policy

b) Policy 2: Total Network Traffic - Non-Cyclic Policy

Maximum Network Traffic

MB) allowed by the policy. When total data transfer reaches this limit, the user is disconnected.

Figure 31: Total Network Traffic - Non-Cyclic Policy

c) Policy 3: Individual Network Traffic - Cyclic Policy

Cycle Period

Select the cycle period from the drop-down list. Cycle period specifies the duration of cyclic policies, that is, day, week, month and year.

Cycle Upload Network Traffic

By default, the check box is selected to Unlimited and no restriction is placed on data upload during the cycle period. Clear the check box to specify the data upload limit (in MB) per cycle. The user cannot upload data once the cycle upload network traffic reaches the limit.

Cycle Download Network Traffic

Sophos XG Firewall | System | 59

By default, the check box is selected to Unlimited and no restriction is placed on data download during the cycle period. Clear the check box to specify the data download limit (in MB) per cycle.

The user cannot download data once the cycle download network traffic limit is reached.

Maximum Upload Network Traffic

By default, the check box is selected to Unlimited and no restriction is placed on data upload for the duration of the policy. Clear the check box to specify the maximum data upload allowed by the policy. The user cannot upload data once the upload network traffic limit is reached.

Example: Cycle Period: Week

Cycle Upload Network Traffic: 5 MB (5 MB data upload is allocated to the user each week. The user cannot upload data when this limit is reached during the week.)

Maximum Upload Network Traffic: 10 MB (10 MB data upload is allocated to the user for the duration of the policy. The user cannot upload data when this limit is reached.)

Maximum Download Network Traffic

By default, the check box is selected to Unlimited and no restriction is placed on data download for the duration of the policy. Clear the check box to specify the maximum data download allowed by the policy. The user cannot download data once the download network traffic limit is reached.

Example: Cycle Period: Week

Cycle Download Network Traffic: 5 MB (5 MB data download is allocated to the user each week.

The user cannot download data when this limit is reached during the week.)

Maximum Download Network Traffic: 10 MB (10 MB data download is allocated to the user for the duration of the policy. The user cannot download data when this limit is reached.)

Figure 32: Individual Network Traffic - Cyclic Policy

d) Policy 4: Individual Network Traffic - Non-Cyclic Policy

Maximum Upload Network Traffic

Maximum Download Network Traffic

Sophos XG Firewall | System | 60

Figure 33: Individual Network Traffic - Non-Cyclic Policy

4. Click Save.

Note: Cycle Network Traffic limit cannot be greater than Maximum Network Traffic limit.

Network Address Translation

Network Address Translation (NAT) enables multiple hosts within your network to access Internet through a single public IP address. In doing so, NAT not only conserves the pool of public IP addresses, it also conceals the addressing scheme of your network.

When a client within the network sends a request to the Internet, the router forwards the request to the device. NAT translates the sender’s address to the device’s public IP address before forwarding the request to the Internet. When a response is received from an external source, NAT translates the public IP address into the client’s private IP address before forwarding the packet to the client.

The device is shipped with a predefined NAT policy named MASQ which cannot be updated or deleted. The MASQ policy automatically masquerades traffic using the IP address that is bound to the device’s WAN port.

For it to take effect, the NAT policy must be applied to a Firewall Rule (Protect > Firewall). For further details, go to

User / Network Rule

Add NAT Policy

To enable internal hosts to access the Internet through a public IP address, create a Network Address Translation

(NAT) policy. The policy specifies the public IP addresses through which NATing can take place. The NAT policy must then be applied to a Firewall Rule (Protect > Firewall).

This page describes how to create a NAT policy.

1. Go to System > Profiles > Network Address Translation and click Add on the upper right side.

2. Enter the policy name.

3. Select to configure the public IP address.

Sophos XG Firewall | System | 61

• IP Address: Replaces the source IP address with the configured public IP address.

• IP Range: Replaces the source IP address with a public IP address from the specified range.

Note: To create a NAT policy for an IP address that is not bound to an interface, you must first create an interface alias. This ensures that the return traffic is routed correctly. If you want to create a NAT policy for IP address 10.10.1.30 for interface A with IP address 198.10.100.1, you must first create an alias for interface A with IP address 10.10.1.30 and then create a NAT policy for the alias.

Figure 34: Add NAT Policy

4. Click Save.

Related tasks

Add Alias

on page 108

Device Access

The device allows you to create role-based administrator privileges which offer granular access control. It allows you to assign some of the super administrator’s capabilities to others through Device Access Profiles. You can create profiles for special-purpose administrators based on their work role. Example: Policy administration, network administration, administration of logs.

The Profiles allow three categories of access control:

• None

• Read-Only

• Read-Write

The device is shipped with the following default profiles:

• Administrator: Super administrator with full privileges. Administrator can create custom administrators and assign restricted or full privileges to them. Custom administrators with restricted privileges can update only their email address and password.

• Audit Admin: Read-write privileges only to Logs & Reports.

• Crypto Admin: Read-write privileges only for configuration of security certificate.

• HAProfile: Read-only privileges. If High Availability (HA) is configured, administrators accessing the Admin

Console of the auxiliary device have the privileges that are defined in the HA Profile.

• Security Admin: Read-write privileges to all features, not including Profiles and Logs & Reports.

Note:

• You cannot modify or delete the default profiles.

• You cannot delete a profile that is currently assigned to an administrator.

Add Profile

The device allows you to create multiple administrator profiles with differing levels of access control.

1. Go to System > Profiles > Device Access and click Add.

2. Enter the profile details.

Profile Name

Enter a unique name to identify the profile.

Configuration

Sophos XG Firewall | System | 62

Click to select the level of access to be given to a profile. You can select from the following levels of access:

Available Options:

None: No access to any page Read-Only: View the pages Read-Write: Modify the details

To set a common access level for all the menus, select the options at the top (None, Read-Only or

Read-Write). To set different access levels, select the option against the menu.

Click on the left side of a menu to view the sub-menu. To set differing access levels for submenus, select the option against the sub-menu.

Example: If you set the access level to Read-Only against Licensing, the profile user can view the

Licensing page but cannot make any modifications. To allow modifications, set the access level to

Read-Write.

Note:

Access Denied page

When an administrator tries to access a page or perform an operation that is not allowed by the assigned profile, the Access Denied page is displayed.

Figure 35: Add Profile

3. Click Save.

Hosts and Services

Sophos XG Firewall | System | 63

Sophos XG Firewall | System | 64

Hosts and Services allows defining and managing system hosts and services.

This section covers the following topics:

•

IP Host

host, update the existing host, or delete a host.

•

IP Host Group

- Host Group is a grouping of hosts. Security Policies can be created for the individual host or host groups. This page displays the list of all the host groups. It also provides options to manage these host groups.

•

MAC Host

- Device allows creating a host based on MAC Address. One can create a MAC Host of either a single

MAC Address or multiple MAC Addresses. This page displays the list of all the available MAC host. The page also provides option to add a new MAC host, update the existing host, or delete a host.

•

FQDN Host

- This page displays the list of all the available FQDN host.

•

FQDN Host Group

- FQDN Host Group is a grouping of FQDN hosts. This page displays the list of all the

available FQDN host groups.

•

Country Group

- Country Group is a grouping of Countries. Multiple countries can be selected to block or allow incoming traffic by using Country Group. This page displays the list of all the available Country groups.

•

Services

- You can use services to determine the types of traffic allowed or denied by the firewall. This page

displays the list of all the default and custom services. It also provides options to manage services.

•

Service Group

- Service Group is a grouping of services. Custom and default services can be grouped in a single group. The page displays the list of all the default and custom groups.

IP Host

The IP Host page displays the list of all the dynamic hosts, default hosts and manually added hosts.

Hosts allow the entities to be defined once, which can be re-used in multiple referential instances throughout the configuration. For example, consider an internal Mail Server with an IP Address 192.168.1.15. Rather than repeated use of the IP Address while configuring Security Policies or NAT Policies, it allows to create a single entity Internal

Mail Server as a Host name with an IP Address 192.168.1.15. This host, Internal Mail Server can then be selected in any configuration that uses Host as a defining criterion.

By using host name instead of numerical address, you only need to make changes in a single location, rather than in each configuration where the IP Address appears.

Using Hosts, reduces the error of entering incorrect IP Addresses, makes it easier to change IP Addresses, and increases readability.

You can group multiple entities performing the same function within a single hostname.

The IP Host page displays the list of all the dynamic hosts which are automatically added on creation of VPN Remote access connections (IPsec and SSL) and the default hosts (IPv6 and IPv4) for remote access connection - ##ALL_RW,

##WWAN1, ##ALL_IPSEC_RW and ##ALL_SSLVPN_RW along the manually added hosts. The page also provides option to add a new host, update the existing host, or delete a host.

Note:

• System hosts cannot be updated or deleted.

• Dynamic hosts which are automatically added on creation of VPN Remote Access connections cannot be deleted.

• Default hosts (IPv6 and IPv4) for remote access connection - ##ALL_RW, ##WWAN1,

##ALL_IPSEC_RW and ##ALL_SSLVPN_RW cannot be updated or deleted.

Add IP Host

Add IP Host allows you to assign a hostname to a network, IP address, range or list.

1. Go to System > Hosts and Services > IP Host and click Add.

2. Enter the hostname.

3. Select the IP Family.

Available Options:

Sophos XG Firewall | System | 65

• IPv4

• IPv6

4. Select the host Type.

Available Options:

• IP

• Network

• IP Range

• IP List (IP addresses which belong to different networks or are not within a range.)

5. If the selected host type is IP, Network or IP Range:

1. Enter the IP address, subnet or range based on the host type.

2. Select an IP Host Group or create a new one.

Note: A single host can be the member of multiple host groups. A host group cannot include both IPv4 and IPv6 hosts.

6. If the selected host type is IP List, enter the List of IP Addresses.

Note: Only Class B IP addresses can be added to an IP list. You can add or remove an IP address from the

IP list.

Figure 36: Add IP Host

7. Click Save.

IP Host Group

The IP Host Grouppage displays the list of all the host groups.

Host Group is a grouping of hosts. Security policies can be created for the individual host or host groups.

Note: Dynamic host groups which are automatically added on creation of VPN Remote Access Connections cannot be deleted.

The page also provides option to add a new host group, update the parameters of the existing host group, add members to the existing host group, or delete a host group.

Add a IP Host Group

The Add IP Host Group page allows you to configure an IP host group.

1. Go to System > Hosts and Services > IP Host Group and click Add.

2. Enter IP host group details.

Name

Sophos XG Firewall | System | 66

Enter a name to identify the IP host group.

Description

Enter a description for the IP host group.

IP Family

Select the type of IP family from the options available:

Available Options:

• IPv4

• IPv6

Select Host

The host list displays all the hosts including default hosts. Click the corresponding checkbox(es) to select the host(s). A single host can be a member of multiple host groups. A group with IPv4 and

IPv6 hosts cannot be created.

Figure 37: Add IP Host Group

3. Click Save.

The IP host group has been created and appears on the IP Host Group page.

MAC Host

The device allows you to assign a hostname to one or more MAC addresses.

Add a MAC Host

The Add MAC Host page allows you to manually create a MAC Host of either a single MAC Address or multiple

MAC Addresses.

1. Go to System > Hosts and Services > MAC Host and click Add.

2. Enter MAC Host details.

Name

Enter a name to identify a MAC Host.

Type

Select the MAC Host Type.

Available Options:MAC Address - Select to add a single MAC Address.MAC List - Select to add multiple MAC Addresses.

Sophos XG Firewall | System | 67

MAC Address (Applicable only if Type is selected as MAC Address)

Specify MAC Address based on the Host Type selected in the form of 00:16:76:49:33:CE or

00-16-76-49-33-CE.

List of MAC Addresses (Applicable only if Type is selected as MAC List)

Specify MAC Address based on the Host Type selected in the form of 00:16:76:49:33:CE or

00-16-76-49-33-CE.

Use comma to configure multiple MAC Addresses.

Figure 38: Add MAC Host

3. Click Save.

The MAC Host has been created and appears on the MAC Host page.

FQDN Host

The FQDN Host page displays the list of all the available FQDN host.

FQDN (Fully Qualified Domain Name) Hosts allow entities to be defined once and be re-used in multiple referential instances throughout the configuration. For example,

www.example.com

has an IP Address as 192.168.1.15.

Rather than remembering the IP Address of the intended website while accessing it, you can simply provide

www.example.com

in the browser. The FQDN

www.example.com

will now be mapped to its respective IP Address, and the intended webpage opens.

The page also provides option to add a new FQDN host, update the existing host, or delete a host.

Add an FQDN Host

Use the Add FQDN Host page to create a new Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN) host.

The Add FQDN Host page allows you to manually configure a new FQDN host.

1. Go to System > Hosts and Services > FQDN Host and click Add.

2. Enter FQDN host details.

Name

Specify a name to identify the FQDN host.

FQDN

Specify an FQDN address. You can also specify a Wildcard FQDN by adding the prefix *.

FQDN Host Group

Select an FQDN host group or add a new one. A single FQDN host can be member of multiple host groups. You can add a new FQDN host group on this page or on the System > Hosts and

Services > FQDN Host Group page.

Sophos XG Firewall | System | 68

Figure 39: Add FQDN Host

3. Click Save.

FQDN Host Group

FQDN Host Group allows you to add individual FQDN hosts to one or more host groups.

Add FQDN Host Group

The Add FQDN Host Group page allows you to configure a new FQDN host group.

1. Go to System > Hosts and Services > FQDN Host Group and select Add.

2. Enter FQDN host group details.

Name

Enter a name to identify the FQDN host group.

Description

Enter a description for the FQDN host group.

Select Host

The host list displays all the hosts including default hosts. Click the corresponding checkbox(es) to select the host(s). A single host can be a member of multiple host groups.

Figure 40: Add FQDN Host Group

3. Click Save.

Country Group

Sophos XG Firewall | System | 69

The device offers predefined country groups based on their continent. It also offers the list of countries which appears when you create a firewall rule. You can create custom country groups.

Note: On factory reset, the device resets to predefined country groups.

Note: You can edit or delete predefined and custom country groups.

Add a Country Group

The Add Country Group page allows you to manually configure parameters to add a new country group.

1. Go to System > Hosts and Services > Country Group and click Add.

2. Enter Country Group details.

Name

Enter a name to identify the Country group.

Description

Country Group description.

Select Country

Click Add New Item to select and add countries in the group.

A country can be a member of multiple country groups.

Figure 41: Add Country Group

3. Click Save.

Services

The Services page displays the list of all the default and custom services.

Services are definitions of certain types of network traffic and combine information about a protocol such as TCP,

ICMP or UDP as well as protocol-related options such as port numbers. You can use services to determine the types of traffic allowed or denied by the firewall.

Certain well-known traffic types have been predefined in services. These predefined services are defaults, and cannot be updated or deleted. If you require service definitions that are different from the predefined services, you can add them as custom services.

The page also provides option to add a new service, update the parameters of the existing service, or delete a service.

Note:

• Service used by Security Policies cannot be deleted.

• Default Services can neither be updated nor deleted.

Sophos XG Firewall | System | 70

Add Service

The Add Service page allows you to manually configure parameters to add a new Service.

1. Go to System > Hosts and Services > Services and click Add.

2. Enter Service parameters.

Name

Enter a name to identify the Service.

Type

Select a protocol for the service.

Available Options:TCP/UDP - Enter Source and Destination port. You can enter multiple ports for the same service.IP - Select Protocol Number for the Service. You can select multiple ports for the same service.ICMP - Select ICMP Type and Code. You can enter multiple types and codes for the same service. Use Add icon and Remove icon to add and delete the parameters respectively.

ICMPv6 - Select ICMPv6 Type and Code. You can enter multiple types and codes for the same service.

Use Add and Remove to add and delete the parameters.

Figure 42: Add Service

3. Click Save.

Service Group

The Service Group page displays the list of all the default and custom service groups.

Service Group is a grouping of services. Custom and default services can be grouped in a single group.

Use to configure Security Policies to:

• block group of services for specific zone

• limit some or all users from accessing group of services

• allow only specific user to communicate using group of service

Create groups of services and then add one firewall to allow or block access for all the services in the group. A service group can contain default services as well as custom services in any combination. A single service can be a member of multiple service groups.

The page also provides option to add a new group, update the parameters of the existing group, add members to the existing group, or delete a group.

Note:

• Default Service Groups can neither be updated nor deleted.

• Service Group used by the Security Policies cannot be deleted.

Add a Service Group

Use the Add Service Group page to add a new customized Service Group.

The Add Service Group page allows you to manually enter details and configure a new service group.

Sophos XG Firewall | System | 71

1. Go to System > Hosts and Services > Service Group and click Add.

2. Enter Service Group details.

Name

Enter a name to identify the Service Group.

Description

Service Group Description.

Select Service

Service List displays all the services including default services.

Click the checkbox to select the service. All the selected services are moved to the Selected Service list.

Single service can be a member of multiple groups.

Use Search to search a service from the list.

You can create a group containing IPv4 and IPv6 services.

Figure 43: Add Service Group

3. Click Save.

Administration

Administration allows you to manage device licenses and time, administrator access, centralized updates, network bandwidth and device monitoring and user notifications.

You can configure the following:

•

Licensing

: Synchronization and renewal of device and module subscriptions

•

Device Access

: Administrator access to device services

•

Admin Settings

: Port and login security settings for administrators

•

Central Management

: Centralized synchronization and signature updates

•

Time

: Time and date of the device

•

Notification Settings

: Mail server and email settings to send and receive alerts

•

SNMP

: Device monitoring

•

Netflow

: Network bandwidth monitoring

•

Messages

: User notifications and administrator disclaimer

Sophos XG Firewall | System | 72

Licensing

All the modules remain unsubscribed when you deploy the device for the first time. Licensing displays the device registration information and the subscription status. You can activate or evaluate subscription modules.

Cyberoam and UTM 9 customers can migrate their licenses to SF-OS.

Basic Information

The device offers two types of modules:

• Basic module: Firewall, VPN, Wireless.

• Subscription modules:

• Base Firewall - Includes Firewall, VPN, Wireless

• Network Protection - Includes Intrusion Prevention System, RED, Advanced Threat Protection

• Web Protection - Includes Web Categorization, Anti Virus, Application Control

• Email Protection - Includes Anti Spam, Anti Virus, Email Encryption, DLP

• Webserver Protection - Includes WAF, Anti Virus, Reverse Proxy

• Sandstorm - Includes the Sandstorm service and all related settings

• Enhanced Support - 8 x 5

• Enhanced Plus Support - 24 x 7

Once registered, the device can be used for an indefinite time period.

You can subscribe to any of the subscription modules:

• without key for free 30-days trial subscription

• with key

Device Registration Details

Model

Device model number which is registered and its device key.

Company Name

Name of the company under which the device is registered.

Contact Person

Name of the contact person in the company.

Registered Email Address

Email address used for device registration.

Activate Subscription

Individual modules can be subscribed using the license key.

Note: Activate Subscription will be enabled for clicking after the original license of the device will be migrated to SF-OS from CyberoamOS or UTM 9 using Migrate

License under License Upgrade section.

Module Subscription Details

Synchronize

Click to synchronize licenses with your account.

Activate Evaluations

Individual modules can be evaluated for the duration of 30 days.

Note: Activate Evaluations will be enabled for clicking after the original license of the device will be migrated to SF-OS from CyberoamOS or UTM 9 using Migrate

License under License Upgrade section.

Sophos XG Firewall | System | 73

Module

Name of the Module.

Status

Indicates the status of the module.

A module can have the following status

• Subscribed - Module is subscribed.

• Evaluating - Module is subscribed under evaluation.

• Unsubscribed - Module is not subscribed.

• Expired - Subscription is expired.

Expiration Date

Module subscription expiry date.

License Upgrade

You can migrate licenses from CyberoamOS or UTM 9 to Sophos Firewall OS (SF-OS).

Migrate UTM 9 License

Transfers your current UTM 9 license to an equivalent SF-OS installation. The migration is irreversible and you can no longer use this license on UTM 9.

Note: Migrate UTM 9 License is available only if you have migrated from UTM 9 to SF-OS.

Migrate Cyberoam license

This option will provide you with Sophos Firewall OS license of equivalent monetary value as your

Cyberoam license. All the licenses existing in Cyberoam will be migrated to SF-OS.

Note: Migrate Cyberoam License is available only if you have migrated from

Cyberoam to SF-OS.

Note: Available only when device registration is complete.

Activate Subscription

1. Go to System > Administration > Licensing and click Activate Subscription within Device Registration

Details.

2. Enter the license key.

3. Click Verify Key. Subscription is activated if the license key is found valid.

Device Access

Device Access allows you to limit administrative access to certain services from custom and default zones (LAN,

WAN, DMZ, VPN, Wi-Fi).

1. Local Service ACL: The device carries a default ACL (Access Control List) when connected and powered on for the first time. Details of the default services and ports are given below. Click to enable or disable access to the services from the specified zones.

Admin Services

LAN and Wi-Fi Zones: HTTPS (TCP port 4444), Telnet (TCP port 23) and SSH (TCP port 22)

WAN Zone: HTTPS (TCP port 443), Telnet (TCP port 23) and SSH (TCP port 22)

Authentication Services

LAN and Wi-Fi Zones: Client Authentication (UDP port 6060), Captive Portal Authentication (TCP port 8090) and RADIUS SSO.

Network Services

Sophos XG Firewall | System | 74

LAN, WAN, and Wi-Fi Zones: Ping/Ping6 and DNS

Other Services

LAN and Wi-Fi Zones: Wireless Protection, Web Proxy and SMTP relay

LAN, WAN, DMZ and Wi-Fi Zones: SSL VPN (TCP port 8443)

LAN and WAN Zones: User portal and dynamic routing

LAN, DMZ, VPN and Wi-Fi Zones: SNMP

Note: User authentication services are required in order to apply user-based Internet surfing, bandwidth, and data transfer restrictions. These are not required for administrative functions.

2. Local Service ACL Exception Rule: You can allow access to the device’s admin services from specified networks/hosts. A list of all the configured rules is displayed.

Note: Once you upgrade SF-OS v15 to v16:

• If HTTP is enabled in SF-OS v15, all HTTP requests are redirected to HTTPS.

• HTTP rules in which the action is set to Drop are deleted.

3. Default Admin Password Settings:

a) Change the default password as soon as you deploy the device.

Note: The device is shipped with a default super admin with the username and password set to admin.

You can access the Admin Console and CLI with these credentials. This administrator is authenticated locally by the device.

b) Click Reset to Default to restore the factory default password.

Figure 44: Default Admin Password Settings

4. Public Key Authentication

a) Turn on Public key authentication for admin to allow access to the Command Line Interface (CLI) using the

SSH Key.

Note: Only Admin and Support users can add an SSH login key without authentication. All other users are required to provide a password for authentication before adding an SSH key.

b) Add the list of Authorized keys for admin. Generate these SSH keys using SSH client tools (example:

PuTTY).

Sophos XG Firewall | System | 75

Figure 45: Public Key Authentication

Related information

Disable Telnet and HTTP behavior

Add Local Service ACL Exception Rule

Use Local Service ACL Exception Rule to allow access to the device’s admin services from a specified network/ host.

1. Go to System > Administration > Device Access and click Add under Local Service ACL Exception Rule.

2. Enter a name.

3. Select the Rule Position.

4. Enter a description.

5. Select the IP Family from the following options:

Available Options:

• IPv4

• IPv6

6. Select the Source Zone to which the rule applies.

7. Click Add New Item to select a host or network address to which the rule applies. Click Create New to create a new network/host.

8. Click Add New Item to select the admin Services to which the rule applies.

Available Options:

• HTTPS

• Telnet

• SSH

• Web Proxy

• DNS

• Ping/Ping6

• SSL VPN

• User Portal

• Dynamic Routing

9. Select an Action:

Available Options:

• Accept

• Drop

Sophos XG Firewall | System | 76

Figure 46: Add Local Service ACL Exception Rule

10. Click Save.

Admin Settings

Admin Settings allows you to modify the admin port settings and login parameters. Customize the login parameters to restrict local and remote user access based on time duration.

1. Enter host details a) Enter a name in the form of a Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN).

Acceptable Range: 0 to 256 characters

Example: security.sophos.com

Note: When the device is deployed for the first time, the serial ID of the device is saved as the hostname.

b) Enter the description.

Sophos XG Firewall | System | 77

Figure 47: Hostname

2. Configure Admin Port settings a) Displays the HTTP port configured in SF-OS v15 if you have upgraded from SF-OS v15 and enabled HTTP service.

Default: 80

Note: From v16 onwards, the device does not support access of Admin console on this port. Traffic on

HTTP port is automatically redirected to HTTPS port.

b) Enter the port number to configure the HTTPS port for secure Admin Console access.

Default: 4444 c) Enter the port number to configure the HTTPS port for secure User Portal access.

Default: 443 d) Select the Certificate to be used by User Portal, Captive Portal, SPX Registration Portal and SPX Reply

Portal.

Figure 48: Admin Port Settings

3. Set login security for Administrators a) Select the checkbox and configure the duration (in minutes) of inactivity for the administrative session after which the device is locked automatically. This configuration is applicable to Admin and CLI Console, IPsec

Connection Wizard, Network Wizard, Group Import Wizard.

Default: 3 minutes b) Select the checkbox and configure the period (in minutes) of inactivity after which the administrator is logged out automatically.

Default: 10 minutes

Note: The Logout Admin Session After value must be greater than the Lock Admin Session After value.

c) Select the checkbox to block login to the Admin Console and CLI. Enter the maximum number of failed login attempts and the duration (in seconds) within which the attempts can be made from a single IP address. When the failed attempts exceed the number, the administrator is locked. Specify the number of minutes for which the administrator will not be allowed to login. The administrator account will be locked for the configured minutes if the allowed failed login attempts exceeds.

Sophos XG Firewall | System | 78

Figure 49: Login Security Settings

4. Select the checkbox to enable password complexity settings for Administrators and enforce the required constraints.

Figure 50: Administrator Password Complexity Settings

5. Select Enable Login Disclaimer to set messages for authentication, SMTP, administration and SMS customization, which administrators must agree to before they can log in to the Admin Console and CLI. You can customize and preview messages too.

Figure 51: Login Disclaimer Settings

6. Select Sophos Adaptive Learning to send the following application usage and threat data to Sophos: Unclassified applications (to improve network visibility and enlarge the application control library), Data for IPS alerts, detected virus (including URLs), spam, ATP threats such as threat name, threat URL/IP, source IP, and applications used.

The device sends periodic information to Sophos over HTTPS to improve stability, prioritize feature refinements, and to improve protection effectiveness. No user-specific information or personalized information is collected.

The device sends configuration and usage data by default. This includes device information (example: model, hardware version, vendor), firmware version and license information (does not include owner information), features that are in use (status, on/off, count, HA status, central management status), configured objects (example: count of hosts, policies), product errors, and CPU, memory and disk usage (in percentage).

Sophos XG Firewall | System | 79

Figure 52: Sophos Adaptive Learning

Central Management

Sophos Firewall Manager (Firewall Manager) centrally manages your Sophos Firewall (device). Central Management allows you to configure keep-alive requests and to enable configuration and signature updates of the device through the Firewall Manager.

1. Go to System > Administration > Central Management.

2. Turn on Manage your firewall using.

3. Choose Sophos Firewall Manager (SFM) or Sophos Central Firewall Manager (CFM) to manage your firewall.

Sophos Firewall Manager

1. Select Device Management to send keep-alive requests and check for configuration updates.

2. Under Advanced Settings:

1. Select the communication settings from the following options:

Available Options:

• Firewall Manager will push configuration changes to the Firewall Device

• Firewall Device will fetch configuration changes from the Firewall Manager

2. Enter the HTTPS Port on Firewall Manager over which configuration updates are to be sent.

Default: 443

3. Select Communication Heartbeat Protocol to define how keep-alive information is sent to the Firewall

Manager.

Note: We recommend that you set the Heartbeat protocol to Syslog.

3. Enable Update Management to receive signature updates from the Firewall Manager.

4. Under Advanced Settings:

1. Enter the Firewall Manager Port over which the Firewall Manager pushes signature updates.

Default: 8443

Note: Enter the same port number that is configured in Administration Settings of the Firewall

Manager.

Sophos XG Firewall | System | 80

Sophos Central Firewall Manager

1. In Device Management

2. Under Advanced Settings:

1. Select the communication settings from the following options:

Available Options:

• Firewall Manager will push configuration changes to the Firewall Device

• Firewall Device will fetch configuration changes from the Firewall Manager

2. Enter the HTTPS Port on Firewall Manager over which configuration updates are to be sent.

Default: 443

3. Select Communication Heartbeat Protocol to define how keep-alive information is sent to the Firewall

Manager.

Note: We recommend that you set the Heartbeat protocol to Syslog.

Sophos XG Firewall | System | 81

Restrictions apply if you are managing SFOS V16 devices from SFM V15. For details refer to

Appendix F -

Compatibility with SFMOS 15.01.0

Time

You can set the time and date to the device’s clock or synchronize the device with a Network Time Protocol (NTP) server.

1. Go to System > Administration > Time.

2. Current Time displays the device time and date.

3. Select the Time Zone based on the location in which the device is deployed.

4. Select from the following options to choose how you set the time and date:

• Use pre-defined NTP server (pool.ntp.org). The device uses NTP version 3 (RFC 1305). Click to Sync Now.

• Use Custom NTP server. Enter the IPv4 address or IPv6 address or domain name. You can configure up to 10

NTP servers. At the time of synchronization, the device queries the configured NTP servers sequentially until it receives a valid reply from a server. Click to Sync Now.

• Select Do not use NTP Server to configure the date and time based on the device’s clock. Set the date and time.

Sophos XG Firewall | System | 82

Figure 53: Setting Device’s Date and Time

Notification Settings

Notification Settings allows you to configure the mail server IP address, port, and email address to send and receive alert emails.

The device allows you to configure email notifications for system-generated events and reports to inform the administrator about:

• Change in gateway status

• Change in HA (high availability) link status (if HA cluster is configured)

• Change in the state of IPsec tunnels

1. Mail Server Settings

Click to Send Notifications Via:

Built-in Email Server

Select if you want to use the built-in Email Server in the Device to send system-generated emails.

External Email Server

Select to configure an External Email Server to send system-generated emails.

1. Specify the Mail Server IPv4 Address or FQDN Address and Port Number. Default Port: 25

2. Select Authentication Required to authenticate the user before sending an email. Specify Username and

Password.

3. Select Connection Security mode to be used for establishing a secured connection between an SMTP client and the SMTP server for SMTP mail notification. Available Options:

• None

• STARTTLS

• SSL/TLS

Default: None

4. Select a Certificate to be used for authentication by the SMTP client and the SMTP server.

Sophos XG Firewall | System | 83

Default: ApplicanceCertificate

Figure 54: Mail Server Settings

2. Email Settings

Enter the sender and recipient email addresses.

Figure 55: Email Settings

3. Email Notification

Select IPsec Tunnel UP/Down to enable receipt of email notifications if IPsec VPN tunnel connectivity is lost.

Email alerts are sent to the configured email address.

An email is sent only when Host-to-Host and Site-to-Site tunnel connections are disconnected for one of the following reasons:

• A peer is found dead (DPD)

• Failed to re-establish connection after Dead Peer Detection (DPD)

• IPsec Security Association (SA) is expired and is required to be re-established.

• IPsec tunnel comes up without administrator intervention after losing the connectivity.

Note:

• An email is sent for each subnet pair in case of Site-to-Site connections with multiple local/remote networks.

• Description of IPsec tunnel connection is included in the email only if the administrator has provided the information.

Figure 56: The email contains the following Notification

4. Test Mail

Click to preview and edit the email address details.

Click Send.

Note: Mail server configuration changes automatically when the changes are made from the Network

Configuration Wizard and vice versa.

Sophos XG Firewall | System | 84

SNMP

SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) allows you to configure the Sophos Firewall device as an SNMP agent. The device responds to multiple SNMP managers within the predefined communities. You can monitor multiple firewall devices on IP networks for device availability, CPU, memory and disk utilization, availability of critical services and more. The device stores information in a Management Information Base (MIB) and replies to

SNMP Get commands for MIB. Click

here

to download the Sophos MIB file. It also sends SNMP traps (alerts) to the

SNMP manager.

SNMP collects information in two ways:

• SNMP manager polls the agents.

• Agents send traps to the SNMP manager.

SNMP Community consists of a manager and a group of agents. Agents can belong to more than one SNMP community. The community defines where information is sent. An agent does not respond to requests from managers that do not belong to its communities. You must specify a trap version for each community. Each community can support SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c. Sophos Firewall device supports IPv4 and IPv6 addresses.

Agent Configuration allows you to configure the agent details.

Community displays a list of all the communities. You can sort, add, update, or delete communities.

SNMP Agent Configuration

SNMP Agent Configuration allows you to configure the device as an SNMP agent.

1. Go to System > Administration > SNMP.

2. Select to enable the SNMP Agent.

3. Enter a name.

4. Enter the description.

5. Enter the physical location of the device.

6. Enter the contact information of the person responsible for maintaining the device.

7. The Agent Port uses UDP port 161. This port receives GET requests from the SNMP managers.

8. Specify the Manager Port over which the SNMP manager receives alerts/traps from the SNMP agent.

Default: 162

Sophos XG Firewall | System | 85

Figure 57: Agent Configuration

Add Community

1. Go to System > Administration > SNMP and click Add.

2. Enter a name.

3. Enter the description.

4. Enter the IP address (IPv4/IPv6) of the SNMP manager.

5. Select the SNMP protocol version. SNMP v1 and v2c-compliant SNMP managers have read-only access to device system information and can receive device traps.

6. Select the version for trap support. Traps are sent only to SNMP managers that support the specified versions.

7. Click Save.

Figure 58: Add SNMP Community

Sophos XG Firewall | System | 86

Netflow

Netflow allows you to add, update, or delete Netflow servers. The device offers Netflow, a network protocol, to monitor network bandwidth usage and traffic flow. Netflow records of source, destination and volume of traffic are exported to the Netflow server. The records help you identify the protocols, policies, interfaces and users consuming high bandwidth. Data analyzing tools like Open Source Data Analyzer and PRTG software can generate reports from the Netflow records.

Netflow Configuration

1. Enter the Netflow Server Name.

2. Enter the Netflow Server IP/Domain. You can enter IPv4 or IPv6 addresses.

3. Enter the Netflow Server Port number (UDP port). Records are sent to the Netflow server over the specified port.

Default: 2055

Figure 59: Netflow

Note: Traffic of only those firewall rules that have Log Firewall Traffic enabled is sent to the Netflow server.

Note: You can configure up to five Netflow servers.

Note: Sophos supports Netflow v5. You can export all the parameters of v5.

Messages

Use Messages to notify users and issue administrative alerts.

You can send messages of up to 256 characters to a single user or multiple users simultaneously.

You can send notifications related to the following events:

• Authentication: Login and logout confirmation, login failure and disconnection

• SMTP: Blocked and received emails

• Administration: Disclaimer for admin login

• SMS Customization: Login information to guest users

Certificates

Certificates allows you to add certificates, certificate authorities and certificate revocation lists.

•

Certificates

•

Certificate Authorities

•

Certificate Revocation Lists

Certificates

Digital certificates provide verification of ownership of a user or computer (example: VPN) or an organization

(example: websites) over the Internet, and are issued by a Certificate Authority (CA). Certificate Signing Requests

(CSR) enable you to provide the information required for the CA to issue a certificate. CAs issue certificates

Sophos XG Firewall | System | 87 which can include the owner’s public key, the certificate’s validity period, owner information and the private key.

Verification is completed through the private key which is held by the owner.

Certificates are revoked when the private key is lost, stolen or updated. CAs maintain a list of valid and revoked certificates. Self-signed certificates that are revoked are automatically added to the Certification Revocation List

(CRL).

The device allows you to:

• generate a self-signed certificate, upload a third-party certificate, or to generate a CSR.

• use the device as the CA or add an external CA.

• revoke a self-signed certificate or upload an external CRL.

Add Certificate

Add Certificate allows you to upload a certificate, generate a self-signed certificate, or to generate a Certificate

Signing Request (CSR).

1. Go to System > Certificates > Certificates and click Add.

2. Select from the following options.

Upload Certificate

Generate self-signed Certificate

Generate Certificate Signing Request

Upload Certificate

1. Enter the Certificate Name.

2. Select the format of certificate file.

PEM (.pem): Base64 encoded form of DER certificate. Certificate and private key are stored in different files.

DER (.der): Binary form of PEM certificate used on Java platform. Certificate and private key are stored in different files.

PEM (.pem): Base64 encoded form of DER certificate. Certificate and private key are stored in different files.

DER (.der): Binary form of PEM certificate used on Java platform. Certificate and private key are stored in different files.

CER (.cer): Binary form. Contains certificate owner information and public and private keys.

PKCS7 (.p7b): ASCII code. Contains the certificate but not the private key.

PKCS12 (.pfx or .p12): Binary form used on Windows platforms. Stores the private key with the public key.

3. Upload certificate and private key.

4. Enter the CA passphrase and re-enter to confirm.

5. Click Save.

Generate Self-Signed Certificate

1. Go to System > Certificates > Certificates and click Add.

2. Set Action to Generate self-signed certificate.

3. Ceritificate Details

a) Enter the Certificate Name.

b) Specify the certificate’s validity period.

Default: 1 day c) Select the number of bits used to construct the key from the list.

Note: Larger keys offer greater security, but take longer to encrypt and decrypt data.

Sophos XG Firewall | System | 88

Default: 2048 d) Select to encrypt the key. Enter a passphrase or the pre-shared key and re-confirm e) Specify the certificate ID for one of the following options:

• DNS

• IP Address (IPv4/IPv6 Address)

• Email

• DER ASN1 DN (X.509)

4. Identification Attributes

a) Select the country in which the device is deployed.

b) Enter the state within the country.

c) Enter the locality in which the certificate is to be used.

d) Enter the name of the certificate owner (example: Sophos Group).

e) Enter the name of the department to which the certificate is to be assigned (example: marketing).

f) Enter the common name or FQDN (example: marketing.sophos.com).

g) Enter the contact person’s email address.

Generate Certificate Signing Request

The device allows you to generate a Certificate Signing Request (CSR) which can be sent to a CA.

1. Go to System > Certificates and click Add.

2. Set Action to Generate Certificate Signing Request (CSR).

3. Ceritificate Details

a) Enter the Certificate Name.

b) Specify the certificate’s validity period.

Default: 1 day c) Select the number of bits used to construct the key from the list.

Note: Larger keys offer greater security, but take longer to encrypt and decrypt data.

Default: 2048 d) Select to encrypt the key. Enter a passphrase or the pre-shared key and re-confirm e) Specify the certificate ID for one of the following options:

• DNS

• IP Address (IPv4/IPv6 Address)

• Email

• DER ASN1 DN (X.509)

4. Identification Attributes

a) Select the country in which the device is deployed.

b) Enter the state within the country.

c) Enter the locality in which the certificate is to be used.

d) Enter the name of the certificate owner (example: Sophos Group).

e) Enter the name of the department to which the certificate is to be assigned (example: marketing).

f) Enter the common name or FQDN (example: marketing.sophos.com).

g) Enter the contact person’s email address.

5. Click Save.

Once the certificate is created, you need to download and send this certificate to the remote peer with whom the connection is to be established.

Sophos XG Firewall | System | 89

Download Certificate

The device allows you to download self-signed certificates and certificate signing requests.

1. Go to System > Certificates > Certificates.

Go to the Manage column and click against the certificate. The certificate is downloaded as a .tar.gz file.

Revoke Certificate

1. Go to System > Certificates > Certificates.

Go to the Manage column and click signed certificates.

against the certificate. You can revoke lost, stolen or updated self-

Revoked certificates are automatically added to the Certificate Revocation List (CRL).

Certificate Authorities

Certificate Authorities (CA) are trusted entities which issue digital certificates that verify the ownership of a user, host or organization. Ownership is verified through a public key, owner information and a private key.

The device allows you to generate a local CA or to import external CAs. Among external CAs, it provides Verisign,

Entrust and Microsoft.

The default CA is regenerated automatically when it is updated.

Add Certificate Authority

1. Go to System > Certificates > Certificate Authorities and click Add.

2. Enter the name of the CA.

3. Select the format of the root certificate. The certificate and private key are stored in different files.

4. Upload the certificate and private key.

5. Enter the CA passphrase and re-enter to confirm.

Figure 60: Add Certificate Authority

6. Click Save.

Download CA

You can download local CAs in order to forward these to the remote peer for the verification process.

1. Go to System > Certificates > Certificate Authorities.

Click to download the zip file.

Sophos XG Firewall | System | 90

Update Default CA

Edit Default CA Parameters allows you to edit the default certificate authority details.

1. Go to System > Certificates > Certificate Authorities.

Go to the Manage column and click against the default certificate.

3. The name of the CA cannot be changed for default CA.

4. Select the country in which the device is deployed.

5. Enter the state within the country.

6. Enter the locality in which the certificate is to be used.

7. Enter the name of the certificate owner (example: Sophos Group).

8. Enter the name of the department to which the certificate is to be assigned (example: marketing).

9. Enter the common name or FQDN (example: marketing.sophos.com).

10. Enter the contact person’s email address.

11. Enter the CA passphrase and re-enter to confirm.

12. Click Save.

Regenerate Certificate Authority

1. Go to System > Certificates > Certificate Authorities.

To regenerate the default certificate, go to the Manage column and click .

Note: When you update the default CA, it is automatically regenerated.

Certificate Revocation Lists

Certificates can be revoked when the key or CA has been compromised, or the certificate is no longer valid for the original purpose. CAs maintain a list of revoked certificates.

You can upload Certificate Revocation List (CRL) of an external CA. Self-signed certificates that are revoked are automatically added to the CRL.

Add CRL

Add CRL allows you to upload the Certificate Revocation List (CRL) of an external certificate authority.

1. Go to System > Certificates > Certificate Revocation Lists and click Add.

2. Enter the CRL Name and upload the CRL file.

3. Click Save.

Download CRL

When you add a CA, a default CRL file default.tar.gz, is generated.

1. Go to System > Certificates > Certificate Revocation Lists.

2. Click Download against the CRL to download the .zip file.

Backup & Firmware

Backup & Firmware provides following options:

•

Backup & Restore

: Backup and restore system data.

•

API

: Application Programming Interface (API) allows third party applications to communicate with the device.

•

Import Export

: Import/export device configuration from/to a text file.

•

Firmware

: Allows you to upload/view firmware versions downloaded.

Sophos XG Firewall | System | 91

•

Pattern Updates

: Update patterns for various modules like Sophos AV, IPS, WAF or set auto-update interval.

Backup & Firmware

Backup is the essential part of data protection. No matter how well your system is treated, no matter how much it is taken care of, you cannot guarantee that your data is safe, if it exists only at one place.

Backups are necessary in order to recover data from loss due to disk failure, accidental deletion or file corruption.

There are many ways of taking backup and just as many types of media to use as well.

Backup consists of all the policies and all other user related information.

Device facilitates to take back-up only of the system data, either through scheduled automatic backup or using a manual backup.

Once the backup is taken, the file for restoring the backup must be uploaded for restoring the configuration.

Below are the screen elements with their description:

Backup

Backup Mode

Select how and to whom backup files should be sent.

Available Options:

Local - Backup is taken and stored on the Device itself.FTP - Configure FTP server IP Address

(IPv4/IPv6), login credentials and FTP path. Email - Configure Email Address on which backup is to be mailed. You can configure multiple Email Addresses.

Backup Prefix

Frequency

Specify backup file name (prefix). The backup file name format is as follows:

• With Prefix: <Prefix>_Backup_<Device Key>_<timestamp>

For example:

Dallas_Backup_ABCDEY190_26Nov2014_12.09.24

NY_Backup_ABCDEY190_26Nov2014_12.09.24

• Without Prefix(Default): Backup_<Device Key>_<timestamp>

For example:

Backup_ABCDEY190_26Nov2014_12.09.24

If prefix is not provided, the default format is used for backup file.

Backup Prefix will be useful in case you need to take backup from multiple devices.

Select the system data backup frequency.

In general, it is best to schedule backup on regular basis. Schedule can be determined depending on how much information is added or modified.

Available Options:

Never - Backup will not be taken at all Daily - Backup will be taken every day Weekly - Backup will be taken every week Monthly - Backup will be taken every month

Schedule

Specify the day/date and time for Daily, Weekly and Monthly backup.

Backup Now

Click to take the backup of system data till date.

Download (Only for Local Backup Mode)

Click to download the latest backup that is available for uploading.

Sophos XG Firewall | System | 92

Figure 61: Backup

Backup Restore

Restore Configuration

To select the complete path of the backup file to be restored, click the file selection button against

Restore Configuration.

Upload and Restore

Click to upload and restore the configuration.

Figure 62: Backup Restore

Note: Restoring data older than the current data results in the loss of current data.

API

Application Programming Interface (API) is an interface which allows third party applications to communicate with the device. This page allows the Administrator to log on and log off users.

API Configuration

Enable to allow only authorized third-party solution providers like ISP, and system integrators to use

API for log-on and log-off process.

Default - Disabled

Allowed IP Address

Add the IP addresses allowed to place the XML log-on and log-off requests.

You will be able to add IP Address only if API Configuration is enabled.

Sophos XG Firewall | System | 93

Figure 63: API Configuration

API Explorer

Request XML String

Specify the XML content containing the configurations to enable user log on or log off.

Parse and apply

Click to parse the XML content and apply the configurations.

Figure 64: API Explore

Sample XML Request Code

For all the requests, XML response will be displayed in a pop-up window.

<Request><LiveUserLogin><UserName>sophos</UserName><Password>sophos</

Password><IPAddress>10.21.18.15</IPAddress><MacAddress>00:0C:29:2D:D3:AC</

MacAddress> </LiveUserLogin></Request>

<Request><LiveUserLogout><Admin><UserName>admin</UserName><Password>admin</

Password></Admin><UserName>sophos</UserName><IPAddress>10.21.18.15</

IPAddress></LiveUserLogout></Request>

For versions prior to 10.6.1 MR-1

<Request><LiveUserLogout><UserName>sophos</UserName><IPAddress>10.21.18.15</

IPAddress></LiveUserLogout></Request>

Please use the below link to use API: https://<Sophos IP>:<port>/webconsole/APIController?reqxml=<Add the XML

request here>

Note: Port you mention in above URL should be same as the port you have configured as Admin Console

HTTPS Port from System > Administration > Admin Settings.

Sophos XG Firewall | System | 94

For example: https://<Sophos IP>:4444/webconsole/APIController?

reqxml=<Request><LiveUserLogin><UserName>sophos</UserName><Password>sophos</

Password><IPAddress>10.21.18.15</IPAddress><MacAddress>00:0C:29:2D:D3:AC</

MacAddress></LiveUserLogin></Request>

Note: When the user logs on using API, the client type of the users will display API Client on the Live

Users page.

Import Export

You can export and import full or partial device configuration across compatible devices of the same or different models. Device configuration is exported to a text file in human readable XML format. Update it offline, if required.

Import

Import File

To select the complete path of the tar file to be imported, click the file selection button against

Import File.

Import

Click to import the configuration on the device.

Device existing configuration will be preserved. Entities with same name in existing configuration will be updated with the imported entity configuration and new Entities will be added.

For example:

If you have a Network Traffic Quota Policy with name “Daily 10 MB” in both the existing and imported configuration then the existing policy configuration will be updated with the imported configuration. Any new policies in the imported configuration will also get added.

Figure 65: Import Configuration

Export

Export full configuration

Select to export all the entities configuration to a text file.

Export selective configuration

Select to export only selected entities configuration. Click Add New Item to select entities and apply to add the selected entities.

Dependent entities for the selected entity will also be exported if Include dependent entity is selected.

Export

Click to export the configuration from the device.

Sophos XG Firewall | System | 95

Figure 66: Export Configuration

Firmware

This feature is not available in Sophos Firewall Manager (SFM).

The Firmware page allows you to manage the firmware versions on your device. It also enables you to install hotfixes and to choose the default configuration language of your device.

The Firmware section displays the list of firmware versions that have been downloaded. A maximum of two firmware versions are available simultaneously and one of the versions is active.

Upload firmware

Click to upload new firmware. Click Browse in the pop-up window. Click Upload firmware to upload the firmware image file. The uploaded firmware becomes active after the next reboot.

Click Upload & Boot to upload the firmware image file and boot the device. The action upgrades the device to the new version, closes all sessions, restarts the device, and displays the login page.

The process may take a few minutes since it involves migrating the entire configuration.

At the time of uploading new firmware, the error “New Firmware could not be uploaded” might occur due to one of the following reasons:

1. Wrong upgrade file - You are trying to upload wrong upgrade file i.e. a previous version firmware.

2. Incorrect firmware image - You are trying to upload incorrect firmware image for your appliance model. All the firmware’s are model specific and are not inter-changeable. Hence, firmware of one model is not applicable on another model. For example, an error is displayed, if appliance model XG125 is upgraded with firmware for model XG750.

3. Incompatible firmware - You are trying to upload incompatible firmware.

4. Changes in Appliances Hardware - Your appliance hardware configuration is not the standard hardware configuration. Contact support for assistance.

5. Corrupt firmware - There are chances that the firmware you have downloaded is corrupt.

Boot firmware image

Click to upgrade the device to the uploaded firmware image. The action upgrades the device to the new version, closes all sessions, restarts the device and displays the login page.

Boot with factory default configuration

Click to reboot the device and to activate the default configuration.

Note: If you boot with factory default configuration, the current configuration will be lost. Take a backup before you click this option.

Active

The Active icon against a firmware version indicates that the device currently uses this firmware.

Sophos XG Firewall | System | 96

Latest Available Firmware (not available in SFM)

Check For new Firmware

Click to view the new firmware, if available.

Firmware Version

Displays the list of firmware versions available for download.

Type

Displays the type of each firmware.

Available Options:BetaGA

Actions

Click Download to download the firmware. Once the download is complete, click Install to install the firmware.

Figure 67: Available Latest Firmware

SF-OS Hot-fix

Allow auto-install of important Hot-fixes

Hot-fixes are installed automatically when they are available. Clear the check box if you do not want to apply them automatically.

Click Apply to save your selection.

Default: Enabled

Figure 68: SF-OS Hot-Fix

Factory Reset with Default Configuration Language

Default Configuration Language

Select a default language for configuration. When you choose a different language, the device reboots and goes back to the factory default settings. It removes all customizations.

The Admin Console Language can differ from the Default Configuration Language. Choosing a different Admin Console Language displays menus and labels in the selected language while choosing a different Default Configuration Language displays menus, labels as well as default policies and their description in the selected language.

Default: English

Available Options:

• English

• Hindi

• Chinese - Traditional

Sophos XG Firewall | System | 97

• Chinese - Simplified

• French

• Japanese

Note: Take a backup before you choose a different language since the entire configuration will be lost. The device restores the backup in the language that was operational at the time of taking the backup.

Figure 69: Factory Reset with Default Configuration Language

Pattern Updates

This page displays the status of patterns used by various modules of your device like Sophos AV, IPS and Application

Signature, WAF. The page also provides options to update patterns or set an auto-update time interval. By default pattern are updated automatically.

Updates Status

Pattern

Name of the pattern.

Current Version

Version of the pattern in use.

Available Version

Upgrade version, if available.

Last Successful Update

Displays time and date of the last successful update.

Status

Displays status of the pattern.

• Ready to Install

• Success

• Downloading

• Failed

Update Pattern Now

Click to update the pattern definitions.

Sophos XG Firewall | System | 98

Figure 70: Update Status

Pattern Download/Installation

Auto Update

To update pattern definitions automatically, click Auto Update.

Firmware updates for RED and Access Points are automatically downloaded and a notification is displayed. You have to manually install those updates. Usually, after installation the RED or

AP reboots. Connections to REDs or APs will be interrupted during that time and re-established afterwards.

Interval (Available only if Auto Update is turned ON)

Set the time limit in which you want to receive updates.

Available Options:

• Every hour

• Every 2 hours

• Every 4 hours

• Every 12 hours

• Daily

• Every 2 days

Figure 71: Pattern download/installations

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 99

Configure

Network

Network section allows you to configure various components for optimal network operation.

In particular, this section covers the following topics:

•

Interfaces

: Configure and manage the ports/interfaces of the device.

•

Zones

: Configure custom zone and view the list of default and custom zones.

•

WAN Link Manager

: Manage device’s WAN links.

•

DNS

: Manage DNS servers to be used by the device, DNS host entries and routing of specific requests.

•

DHCP

: Manage DHCP servers, relay agent configuration and the list of the IP addresses leased by the device.

•

IPv6 Router Advertisement

: View the list of configured router advertisements (RA), configure RAs.

•

Cellular WAN

: Configure parameters of the cellular WAN connection of the device.

•

IP Tunnels

: Create and manage 6in4, 6to4, 6rd and 4in6 IP tunnels for inter-communication between IPv6 and

IPv4 networks.

•

Neighbors (ARP-NDP)

: View and manage device’s ARP-NDP neighbors.

•

Dynamic DNS

: Integrate device with a dynamic DNS. Manage existing configuration.

Interfaces

Interfaces lists all the interfaces of the device along with their configurations.

The device is shipped with a number of physical interfaces, that is, ports and a number of virtual interfaces, depending on the model of the device. The Interface page displays a list of physical interfaces, aliases, virtual interfaces, bridge interfaces, interfaces configured as LAG or as TAP as well as interfaces configured for wireless LAN or for cellular

WAN.

Interfaces allows you to configure a range of physical and virtual interfaces. If a virtual interface is configured for a physical interface, it is displayed below the physical interface. Virtual interface configuration can be updated or deleted.

Note: Updating the interface details may affect dependent configurations. Refer

Configurations dependent on

Interfaces

for more details.

The possible configurations are provided below:

•

Alias

– Alias allows you to bind multiple IP addresses to a single physical interface.

•

Bridge

– A bridge enables you to configure transparent subnet gatewaying.

•

LAG

– Link Aggregation Group (LAG) allows multiple network connections to be combined into a single connection. It is also known as trunking, NIC teaming, NIC bonding, or Ether Channel. LAG is mostly used to handle LAN traffic.

•

VLAN

– A virtual LAN is a broadcast domain with each VLAN being configured on a switch to individual ports.

•

Wireless Networks

– A wireless network links devices through a wireless distribution method, connecting them to the Internet through an access point.

If a wireless network is configured with a “Separate Zone” for

Client Traffic

mode under Protect > Wireless >

Wireless Networks, a wlnet interface of the type “Wireless Protection” is automatically created on this page with the configured IP address and zone of the wireless network. In order to use the interface, you need to configure a DHCP server for the interface so that the wireless clients can connect to the device. The interface will automatically be deleted once the wireless network is deleted.

•

Cellular WAN

– A cellular WAN is a wide area network (WAN) for data that is typically provided by cellular carriers to transmit a wireless signal over a range of several miles to a mobile device.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 100

•

TAP

– A TAP interface enables you to deploy the device in Discover Mode. In this mode, the device can monitor all the network traffic without making any changes in the existing network schema. Discover Mode can be configured through the command line interface (CLI).

•

RED

- The Remote Ethernet Device (RED) is used to connect remote branch offices to your head office as if the

branch office is part of your local network. The RED device connects to the main device using a RED interface and can be configured using this interface. On factory default, all the configured RED interfaces are deleted.

Interface status messages can have the following values:

• Disabled - The interface is currently not bound to any zone.

• Connected - The interface is connected, configured and is running.

• Connecting (Displayed only for PPPoE and cellular WAN (WWAN1) interfaces) - Displayed when a new IP address is being leased.

• Disconnected (Displayed only for PPPoE and cellular WAN (WWAN1) interfaces) - Displayed after the IP address has been released.

• Disconnecting (Displayed only for PPPoE and cellular WAN (WWAN1) interfaces) - Displayed during the process of IP release.

• Unplugged - No physical connection.

• Not Available (Applicable for Flexi Ports devices) - If the Flexi Ports module has previously been inserted and

Flexi Ports have been configured, then after removing the Flexi Ports module from the device, the Flexi Ports will carry the status “Not Available”.

The following list shows the different icons, representing the different interface types:

Icons Meaning

Ethernet

Wireless

Bridge

VLAN

RED10

RED15

RED50

LAG

WWAN

Note: Configurations dependent on Interfaces

• Updating the interface details may affect dependent configurations, including Interface zone binding,

DNS, gateway, interface-based hosts, VLAN interfaces, and dynamic DNS.

• Deleting the virtual interface will delete the firewall rule defined for the virtual interface.

• Deleting the interface will also remove all its dependent configurations, including interface zone binding,

DHCP server or relay, interface-based firewall rule, ARP (static and proxy), protected servers, protected server-based firewall rules, interface-based hosts and references from host groups as well as unicast and multicast routes.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 101

• Your network connections might get affected for some time after updating/deleting Interfaces. If you face any network issues during this time then please wait for some time and check again.

Physical Interface Configuration

Use this page to edit physical interface configurations.

1. Go to Configure > Network > Interfaces. Identify the physical interface whose settings need to be updated and click the icon on the right side. Click Edit Interface within the box.

2. Enter the details for General Settings.

Physical Interface

Physical interfaces are ports which may be marked in numeric (Port1, Port2, and so on), alphabetic

(PortA, PortB, and so on), alphanumeric (PortA2, PortA3, and so on), or in special alphanumeric form (eth0, eth1, and so on), depending on your device.

Network Zone

Select the zone to which the interface belongs.

Available Options:

• None: Select to unbind the interface.

• LAN

• WAN

• DMZ

• WiFi

Figure 72: General Settings

3. Enter the IPv4 configuration details.

IP Assignment

Select the IP assignment type.

Available Options:

• Static - Click to specify the IP address manually.

• PPPoE - Click to enable the interface to receive the IP address from a PPPoE server.

• DHCP - Click to enable the interface to receive the IP address dynamically from a DHCP server.

IPv4/Netmask

Enter the IPv4 address of the interface. Select the network subnet mask.

Preferred IP (available only if selected IP Assignment is PPPoE)

Many Internet service providers assign a static IP address to PPPoE connections. The device allows you to bind the static IP address to the PPPoE connection.

Note: An IP Address other than the preferred IP Address may be assigned to the

PPPoE connection, depending on the PPPoE Server configuration.

4. Enter the IPv4 gateway details.

Gateway Detail (available only for WAN zone)

• Static IP Assignment - Enter the Gateway Name and the IPv4 address through which traffic is to be routed.

• PPPoE IP Assignment - Enter the Gateway Name through which traffic is to be routed.

• DHCP IP Assignment - Enter the Gateway Name through which traffic is to be routed.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 102

Figure 73: IPv4 Configuration

5. Enter the details for PPPoE IP Assignment.

Username

Enter the PPPoE account username.

Password

Enter the PPPoE account password.

Access Concentrator/Service Name

Enter the access concentrator and service name.

The device initiates only those sessions with the access concentrator that can provide the specified service.

LCP Echo Interval

Enter the time interval at the end of which the system sends an echo request to check whether the link is alive. Once an attempt is made, the device waits for the defined time interval before the next attempt is made.

Default: 20 seconds

LCP Failure

Enter the number of attempts (echo requests) to be made. Once the specified number of attempts are made without receiving a response from the client, the device disconnects the PPPoE connection.

Default: 3

Schedule Time For Reconnect

The IP address assigned to a PPPoE connection, whether dynamic or static (preferred), can have a predefined validity period. Once the validity expires, the PPPoE connection is terminated and is reconnected.

To prevent reconnection during working hours, enable the PPPoE reconnect schedule. You may choose to schedule the PPPoE reconnection on daily or weekly basis at the configured time

(HH:MM).

Default: Disabled

Default schedule when enabled: All days of the week

Note: Even when a Preferred IP address has been configured, if Schedule Time For

Reconnect is enabled and configured, on reconnection, an IP address other than the preferred IP address may be assigned to the PPPoE connection.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 103

Figure 74: PPPoE Configuration

6. Enter the IPv6 configuration details.

IP Assignment

Select the IP assignment type.

Available Options:

• Static

• DHCP

Mode (only for DHCP mode)

Select the DHCP mode.

Select the relevant option to configure the IPv6 addresses through stateful (DHCPv6) or Stateless address assignment methods depending on the Managed (M) Address Configuration and Other (O) configuration flags advertised in the Router Advertisement (RA) message.

Available Options:

Auto - If selected, the IPv6 address will be configured based on the router advertisement packet through Stateless Address Auto-Configuration (SLAAC) or through DHCPv6 depending on the

Managed (M) Address Configuration and Other (O) Configuration flags advertised in the Router

Advertisement (RA) message. Manual - Select the relevant option to configure the IPv6 address either through SLAAC or through DHCPv6.

• DHCP Only - In this manual mode, the client will configure IPv6 Address and other configuration parameters using DHCPv6 Server. Gateway details should be manually specified.

• Stateless - In this manual mode, client will configure IPv6 Address based on advertised RA message through SLAAC.

• Accept Other Configuration from DHCP: Select to configure other parameters using

DHCPv6 Server. By default, it is enabled.

DHCP Rapid Commit

If enabled, the interface will be configured using a 2-message exchange (Solicit and Reply) rather than the 4-message exchange (Solicit, Advertise, Request, and Reply). It allows for quicker client configuration.

Note: Rapid commit should also be enabled on the DHCPv6 server.

IPv6 / Prefix (Only for static IP assignment)

Enter the IPv6 address and the prefix.

Gateway Detail (Only for “WAN” zone)

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 104

For Static IP assignment:Enter the gateway name and IPv6 address through which the traffic is to be routed. For DHCP IP assignment:Enter the gateway name, if Stateless manual mode is selected. For DHCP only manual mode, specify the gateway name and IPv6 address.

Figure 75: IPv6 Configuration - DHCP

7. Enter details for the Advanced Settings.

Interface Speed

Select interface speed for synchronization. Interface speed can also be configured through CLI using set network interface-speed command.

Speed mismatch between the device and third-party routers and switches can result in errors or collisions on the interface, disconnection, traffic latency, or slow performance.

Depending on the model deployed, the following options are available:

Auto Negotiation 10 Mbps - Half Duplex 10 Mbps - Full Duplex 100 Mbps - Half Duplex 100

Mbps - Full Duplex 1000 Mbps - Full Duplex

Default - Auto Negotiation

MTU

Enter the MTU (Maximum Transmission Unit) value.

MTU is the largest physical packet size, in bytes, that a network can transmit. This parameter becomes an issue when networks are interconnected and the networks have different MTU sizes.

Any packets larger than the MTU value are divided (fragmented) into smaller packets before being sent.

Default - 1500

Acceptable Range (For IPv4 Configuration):576 to 1500

Acceptable Range (For IPv6 Configuration):1280 to 1500

Override MSS

Select to override the default MSS.

MSS defines the amount of data that can be transmitted in a single TCP packet.

Default: 1460

Acceptable Range:536 to 1460

Use Default MAC Address

Click to use the default MAC address for the interface.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 105

By default, the first port that is included as member port becomes the default MAC address.

Override Default MAC Address

Click to override the default MAC address for the interface and enter the new MAC address.

On factory reset, it is set to the default MAC Address.

Figure 76: Advanced settings

8. Click Save.

Advanced Settings for Bridge Interface

1. Go to Configure > Network > Interfaces. Identify the bridge interface whose advanced settings need to be updated and click the icon on the right-hand side. Click Edit Interface within the box.

2. Enter the details for Advanced Settings.

Physical Interface

Displays the physical bridge member interface.

Network Zone

Displays the zone to which the physical interface belongs.

Interface Speed

Select the interface speed for synchronization. Interface speed can also be configured through CLI using the set network interface-speed command.

Speed mismatch between the device and third-party routers and switches can result in errors or collisions on the interface, disconnection, traffic latency, or slow performance.

Depending on the device, the following options are available:

• Auto Negotiation

• 10 Mbps - Half Duplex

• 10 Mbps - Full Duplex

• 100 Mbps - Half Duplex

• 100 Mbps - Full Duplex

• 1000 Mbps - Full Duplex

Default: Auto Negotiation.

MTU

Enter the MTU (Maximum Transmission Unit) value. MTU is the largest physical packet size (in bytes) that a network can transmit.

Default: 1500

Override MSS

Select the checkbox to override the default MSS (Maximum Segment Size). MSS defines the amount of data that can be transmitted in a single TCP packet.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 106

Default: 1460

Use Default MAC Address

Click to use the default MAC address of the interface. The MAC address of the first port to be added as member port becomes the default MAC address.

Override Default MAC Address

Click to override the default MAC address of the interface and enter the new MAC address. On factory reset, it will be set to the default MAC address.

Figure 77: Advanced Settings - Bridge Interface

3. Click Save.

Add Bridge

This feature is not supported when the device is deployed on Microsoft Hyper-V hypervisors.

1. Go to Configure > Network > Interfaces, click Add Interface on the right side and click Add Bridge from the drop-down list.

2. Enter the details for General Settings.

Name

Enter a name to identify the bridge.

Description

Enter a description for the bridge.

Enable routing on this bridge pair

Select the checkbox to enable routing on this bridge.

Figure 78: General Settings

3. Enter the details of Member Interfaces.

Interface

Select the interfaces of the bridge. For example, Port A, Port B.

Zone

For each interface, select the zone to which the interface belongs.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 107

Figure 79: Bridge Member Interfaces

4. Enter IPv4 configuration and gateway details.

IPv4 / Netmask

Enter the IPv4 address and select the network subnet mask.

Gateway Name

Enter a name to identify the gateway.

Gateway IP

Enter the IPv4 address for the gateway.

Figure 80: IPv4 Configuration and Gateway Details

5. Enter the IPv6 configuration details.

IPv6 / Prefix

Enter the IPv6 address and the prefix.

Gateway Name

Enter a name to identify the gateway.

IP Address

Enter the IPv6 address for the gateway.

Figure 81: IPv6 Configuration

6. Enter the details for Advanced Settings.

MTU

Enter the MTU (Maximum Transmission Unit) value.

MTU is the largest physical packet size (in bytes) that a network can transmit. Problem arises when networks with differing MTU sizes are interconnected. In such a scenario, packets larger than the specified MTU value are divided (fragmented) into smaller packets before they are sent.

Default: 1500

Acceptable Range (For IPv4 Configuration):576 to 1500

Acceptable Range (For IPv6 Configuration):1280 to 1500

Override MSS

Select the checkbox to override the default MSS (Maximum Segment Size).

MSS defines the amount of data that can be transmitted in a single TCP packet.

Default: 1460

Acceptable Range: 536 to 1460

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 108

Figure 82: Advanced Settings

Note:

• A single WAN interface is supported in a bridge.

• A single interface cannot be part of multiple bridges.

7. Click Save.

Add Alias

Use this page to bind multiple IP addresses to a single interface.

1. Go to Configure > Network > Interfaces, click Add Interface on the right side and click Add Alias from the drop-down list.

2. Enter the interface details.

Physical Interface

Select the interface to which an Alias must be bound.

IP Family

Select the IP family for the Alias.

Available Options:

IPv4 (Only for physical interfaces with IPv4 configuration)

IPv6 (Only for physical interfaces with IPv6 configuration)

IPv4/Netmask (Available only if IP Family selected is IPv4)

Enter the IPv4 address and select the network subnet mask.

IPv6/Prefix (Available only if IP Family selected is IPv6)

Enter the IPv6 address and the prefix.

Default: 64

Figure 83: Add Alias

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 109

3. Click Save.

Related tasks

Add NAT Policy

on page 60

To enable internal hosts to access the Internet through a public IP address, create a Network Address Translation

(NAT) policy. The policy specifies the public IP addresses through which NATing can take place. The NAT policy must then be applied to a Firewall Rule (Protect > Firewall).

Configure Cellular WAN Settings

Enable Cellular WAN from Configure > Network > Cellular WAN.

1. Go to Configure > Network > Interfaces. Identify the cellular WAN (WWAN1) interface whose settings need to be updated and click the icon on the right side. Click Edit Interface within the box.

2. Enter the details for General Settings.

Interface Name

Enter a name for the interface.

IP Assignment

Select the IP assignment method from the available options:

Available Options:Dial-up (PPP)Network Adapter (DHCP)

Show Recommended Configuration

Click to view the modem details and the recommended configuration. The recommended configuration is displayed in two sections:

Information Section:

• Modem Name

• Vendor ID

• Product ID

• SIM PIN Enabled – Yes/No

Configuration Section:

Available IP Assignment Methods:

Possible Values

• Dial-up (PPP)

• Network Adapter (DHCP)

• Dial-up (PPP) & Network Adapter (DHCP)

Modem Port:

Possible Values

• Not Available

• Serial n (n= 0, 1, …9)

Secondary Modem Ports:

Possible Values

• Not Available

• Serial n (n = 0, 1, …9)

Note: This parameter displays the next available modem port. This port must be used as the Modem Port, if the recommended modem port fails.

APN (Access Point Name):

Possible Values

• Not Available

• <name>

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 110

DHCP Connect Command:

Possible Values

• Not Required

• Required but not available

• <AT command>

DHCP Disconnect Command:

Possible Values

• Not Required

• Required but not available

• <AT command >

Click Load Recommended Configuration to load the recommended configuration onto the page.

This action removes previous configurations, if any, and replaces them with the recommended configuration.

Note: When you click Load Recommended Configuration, values of the secondary modem ports are not loaded.

Connect

Select the mode to establish a cellular WAN connection.

Available Options:AutoManual

Reconnect Tries

Select the number of attempts to be made when reconnecting to an access point.

Available Options:Always123Default: Always

Modem Port (Available only if IP Assignment selected is Dial-up (PPP))

Enter the serial interface on which the modem will establish a connection.

Available Options:Serial 0 to 9

Phone Number (Available only if IP Assignment selected is Dial-up (PPP))

Enter the phone number to be used in order to establish the connection or select one from the dropdown list.

Username

Enter a username for the connection.

Password

Enter a password.

SIM Card PIN Code

Enter the PIN code in order to unlock the PIN-enabled SIM card.

Many operators lock their SIM card to prevent the use of another operator’s SIM card. Such modems can be unlocked using the PIN code in order to establish a connection.

APN

Enter the Access Point Name (APN).

The APN is a configurable network identifier based on which the device identifies the Packet Data

Network (PDN) or the GSM carrier with which the user wants to communicate.

DHCP Connect Command (Available only if IP Assignment selected is Network Adapter (DHCP))

Enter a DHCP command to connect to the cellular WAN.

DHCP Disconnect Command (Available only if IP Assignment selected is Network Adapter (DHCP))

Enter a DHCP command to disconnect from the cellular WAN.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 111

Initialization String

Enter an initialization string for the specific wireless modem. In case of multiple strings, the strings must be entered in the order of their priority.

Figure 84: General Settings - Dial-up

3. Enter the details for Gateway Settings.

Gateway Name

Enter a name to identify the gateway.

Gateway IP

Enter the IP address of the gateway.

Figure 85: Gateway Settings

4. Enter the details for Advanced Settings.

MTU

Enter the MTU (Maximum Transmission Unit) value.

Default: 1500

Acceptable Range: 576 to 1500

MSS

Enter the MSS (Maximum Segment Size).

MSS is the amount of data that can be transmitted in a single TCP packet.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 112

Default: 1460

Acceptable Range: 536 to 146

MAC Address (Available only if IP Assignment selected is Network Adapter (DHCP))

Select the method of providing a MAC address to the modem:

Available Options:Use Default MAC AddressOverride Default MAC Address (If you select this option, provide the MAC address.)

Figure 86: Other Settings

5. Click Save.

Virtual LAN (VLAN)

VLANs are virtual LANs in which work devices on one or more LANs are logically segregated into independent broadcast domains. The logical segregation allows devices from multiple LANs across different floors or geographical regions to communicate as if they are physically connected. At the same time, a single LAN can be separated into multiple VLANs based on roles, work groups, services, or any other logical parameter.

Although routers are generally used to create broadcast domains in LANs, switches create the VLAN broadcast domains. You can assign each VLAN to one or more ports on a single switch. In case of distributed VLANs, you can assign them across multiple switches. Communication within a VLAN happens through the switch, while communication across different VLANs requires a layer 3 device – a router, a layer 3 switch, or a firewall.

You can implement VLAN technology between a Sophos Firewall (SF) device and 802.1Q-compliant switches and routers. Tag-based LAN multiplexing technology simulates multiple LANs within a single physical LAN and traffic from each broadcast domain is given a different VLAN tag. VLAN IDs/tags are 4-byte frame extensions that contain a VLAN identifier and information specific to your configuration.

SF recognizes VLAN IDs, allowing you to apply firewall rules specific to each VLAN, including authentication and other relevant policies of your network. You can also apply firewall rules to secure the network between broadcast domains.

Advantages

• Increase in the number of ports

• Logical segmentation of network regardless of physical location

• Granular firewall rules specific to workgroups

• Improved network throughput due to the creation of smaller broadcast domains

Add VLAN Interface

1. Go to Configure > Network > Interfaces, click Add Interface on the right side and select Add VLAN from the drop-down list.

2. Enter the VLAN details.

Physical Interface

Select a parent interface for the virtual sub-interface. The virtual sub-interface becomes a member of the selected physical interface.

Zone

Select a zone to assign to the virtual sub-interface. The virtual sub-interface becomes a member of the selected zone which can be LAN, DMZ, WAN, WiFi or a custom zone.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 113

VLAN ID

Enter the VLAN ID. The interface VLAN ID can be any number between 2 and 4094. The VLAN

ID of each virtual sub-interface must match the VLAN ID of the packet. If the IDs do not match, the virtual sub-interface will not receive the VLAN-tagged traffic.

Note: When added to the same physical interface, more than one virtual sub-interface cannot carry the same VLAN ID. However, virtual sub-interfaces carrying the same

VLAN ID can be added to different physical interfaces.

Figure 87: VLAN Details

3. Enter the IPv4 configuration details (Only for physical interfaces with IPv4 configuration).

IP Assignment

Select the IP assignment type.

Available Options:

• Static

• PPPoE

• DHCP

IPv4/Netmask

Enter the IPv4 address for the interface and select the network subnet mask.

Preferred IP (available only if IP Assignment selected is PPPoE )

Many Internet service providers assign a static IP address to PPPoE connections. The device allows you to bind the static IP address to the PPPoE connection.

Enter the preferred IP address for the PPPoE connection.

Gateway Detail (For “WAN” zone)

• Static IP Assignment: Specify the Gateway Name and the IPv4 address through which the traffic is to be routed.

• PPPoE IP Assignment: Specify the Gateway Name through which the traffic is to be routed.

• DHCP IP Assignment: Specify the Gateway Name through which the traffic is to be routed.

Figure 88: IPv4 Configuration

4. Enter the details for PPPoE IP Assignment.

Username

Enter the PPPoE account username.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 114

Password

Enter the PPPoE account password.

Access Concentrator/Service Name

Enter the access concentrator and service name.

The device initiates only those sessions with the access concentrator that can provide the specified service.

LCP Echo Interval

Enter the length of time that the system must wait before it sends an echo request to check whether the link is alive. Once an attempt is made, the device waits for the defined time interval before the next attempt is made.

Default: 20 seconds

LCP Failure

Enter the number of attempts (echo requests) to be made. Once the specified number of attempts are made without receiving a response from the client, the device disconnects the PPPoE connection.

Default: 3

Schedule Time For Reconnect

To prevent reconnection during working hours, enable the PPPoE reconnect schedule. You may choose to schedule the PPPoE reconnection on daily or weekly basis at the configured time

(HH:MM).

Default: Disabled

Default schedule when enabled: All days of week

Note: Even when a Preferred IP address has been configured, if Schedule Time For

Reconnect is enabled and configured, on reconnection, an IP address other than the preferred IP address may be assigned to the PPPoE connection.

Figure 89: PPPoE Configuration

5. Enter the IPv6 configuration details (Only for physical interfaces with IPv6 configuration)

IP Assignment

Select the IP assignment type.

Available Options:

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 115

• Static

• DHCP

Mode (available only if IP Assignment selected is DHCP)

Select DHCP mode.

Administrator can select to configure IPv6 address through Stateful (DHCPv6) or StateLess address assignment methods depending on the Managed (M) Address Configuration and Other (O)

Configuration flags advertised in the Router Advertisement (RA) message .

Available Options:

Auto:If selected, IPv6 address will be configured based on the Router Advertisement packet through Stateless Address Auto-Configuration (SLAAC) or DHCPv6 depending on the

Managed (M) Address Configuration and Other (O) Configuration flags advertised in the Router

Advertisement (RA) message. Manual:Administrator can select to configure IPv6 address either through SLAAC or DHCPv6.

• DHCP Only:In this manual mode, client will configure IPv6 Address and other configuration parameters using DHCPv6 Server. Gateway details should be manually specified.

• Stateless:In this manual mode, client will configure IPv6 Address based on advertised RA message through SLAAC.

• Accept Other Configuration from DHCP: Select to configure other parameters using

DHCPv6 Server. By default, it is enabled.

DHCP Rapid Commit

If enabled, the interface will be configured using a 2-message exchange (Solicit and Reply) rather than the 4-message exchange (Solicit, Advertise, Request, and Reply). It enables quicker client configuration.

Note: Rapid commit should also be enabled on the DHCPv6 server.

IPv6 / Prefix (Only for static IP assignment)

Enter the IPv6 address and the prefix.

Gateway Detail (Only for “WAN” zone)

• For “Static” IP assignment:Specify the gateway name and IPv6 address through which the traffic is to be routed.

• For “DHCP” IP assignment:Specify the gateway name, if Stateless manual mode is selected.

For DHCP only manual mode, specify the gateway name and the IPv6 address.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 116

Figure 90: IPv6 Configuration

6. Click Save.

Link Aggregation Group

LAG is not supported in Sophos virtual security devices.

Link Aggregation Group (LAG) combines multiple physical links into a single logical link, connecting the SF device to another network device (switch). Also known as trunking, NIC teaming, NIC bonding or Ether Channel, LAG provides redundancy – when one interface fails, the remaining interfaces continue to carry the LAN traffic, ensuring continuity within the network.

LACP

Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) is part of the IEEE specification 802.3ad and provides additional LAG functionality. You can assign load sharing across links based on the algorithm applied in the xmit hash policy. Link aggregation increases the bandwidth available without the need to deploy additional hardware.

The SF device supports the following LAG modes:

• Active Backup: This mode provides automatic link failover. One link (member of the LAG) remains active while the other remains in standby mode. When the active link fails, the standby link becomes active.

• LACP (802.3ad): This mode provides load balancing and automatic failover. In this mode, all the links are used to forward traffic.

Prerequisites for LACP (802.3ad) mode

• For LACP to be functional, it must be enabled at both ends of the link.

• All the member interfaces (ports) in the LAG must be of the same type and have the same interface speed.

• All the links must be full-duplex.

Limitations

• Only unbound static physical interfaces can be members of the LAG.

• PPPoE, 3G, 4G, Cellular WAN, WLAN and Transport mode are not supported in LAG.

• A maximum of 4 ports can be configured on a single LAG interface.

Add Link Aggregation Group (LAG)

1. Go to Configure > Network > Interfaces, click Add Interfaceon the right-hand side and click Add LAG from the drop-down list.

LAG interface properties can be configured or edited from the command line, but a LAG interface cannot be added from CLI.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 117

2. Enter the details for Global Settings.

Interface Name

Enter a name for the LAG interface.

Member Interface

Click Add New Item. The drop-down list displays all unbound ports.

Select the checkbox to select the port(s).

Note:

• At least 2 member ports are required to create a LAG interface.

• A maximum of 4 ports can be configured on a single LAG interface.

• Interfaces that have been configured for PPPoE, Cellular WAN or WLAN cannot participate in LAG.

Mode

Select the mode of LAG.

Available Options:

Active-Backup:Select the Active-Backup mode to provide failover. 802.3ad (LACP):Select the

802.3ad (LACP) mode to load balance the traffic in addition to providing failover.

Network Zone

Select the network zone for the interface.

Available Options:

LAN WAN DMZ WiFi

Figure 91: Global Settings

3. Enter the IPv4 configuration details.

IP Assignment

Select the type of IP assignment.

Available Options:StaticDHCP

IPv4/Netmask

Enter the IPv4 address for the interface and select the network subnet mask.

4. Enter the IPv4 gateway details (Available only if Network Zone selected is WAN)

Gateway Name

Enter the gateway name.

IPv4 Address

Enter the gateway IPv4 address.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 118

Figure 92: IPv4 Configuration - Static

5. Enter the IPv6 configuration details.

IPv6/Prefix

Enter the IPv6 address and the prefix.

6. Enter the IPv6 gateway details (Available only if Network Zone selected is WAN).

Gateway Name

Enter the gateway name.

IPv6 Address

Enter the gateway IPv6 address.

Figure 93: IPv6 Configuration

7. Enter the details for Advanced Settings.

Interface Speed

Select the interface speed for synchronization. Interface speed can also be configured through CLI using the set network interface-speed command.

Speed mismatch between the device and third-party routers and switches can result in errors or collisions on the interface, disconnection, traffic latency, or slow performance.

Default: Auto Negotiation

MTU

Enter the MTU (Maximum Transmission Unit) value.

Default: 1500

Acceptable Range (For IPv4 Configuration): 576 to 1500

Acceptable Range (For IPv6 Configuration): 1280 to 1500

Override MSS

Select the checkbox to override the default MSS (Maximum Segment Size).

MSS defines the amount of data that can be transmitted in a single TCP packet.

Default: 1460

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 119

Acceptable Range: 536 to 1460

Xmit Hash Policy (Available only if Mode selected is LACP (802.3ad))

Select the Xmit hash policy to be applied to the member interfaces from the available options in the drop-down list:

Available Options:

Layer2:Select to generate the hash value using MAC Addresses. Layer2+3:Select to generate the hash value using a combination of Layer 2 (MAC Address) and Layer 3 (IP Address) protocol information. Layer3+4:Select to generate the hash value using Transport layer protocol information.

Primary Interface (Available only if Mode selected is Active-Backup )

Select an interface to be the primary interface. This interface remains active as long as it is available.

Default: Auto

The interfaces included in the member interface list are listed here. If you set the Primary Interface to Auto, the device selects any interface from the member interface list as the primary interface.

Use Default MAC Address

Click to use the default MAC address of the interface.

Override Default MAC Address

Click to override the default MAC address of the interface and enter the new MAC address.

On factory reset, it will be set to the default MAC address.

Figure 94: Advanced Settings

8. Click Save.

Add RED

This page allows you to configure a Remote Ethernet Device (RED) at a remote office.

1. Ensure that RED is activated. This can be done from Configure > System Services > RED.

2. Go to Configure > Network, click Add Interface on the upper right and select Add RED from the drop-down list.

3. Enter the RED Settings details.

Branch Name

Enter the name for the remote location in which the RED is to be set up.

Type

Select the RED device to be connected from the drop-down list.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 120

• RED 10

• RED 15

• RED 15w

• RED 50

• Firewall RED Server

• Firewall RED Client

• Firewall RED Server Legacy

• Firewall RED Client Legacy

Note: RED device Firewall RED Server Legacy and Firewall RED Client Legacy are able to connect Sophos XG Firewall with Sophos UTM via RED Site2Site. For more information, see

RED Site-to-Site between Sophos XG Firewall and Sophos

UTM

on page 126.

RED ID (not available for Type Firewall RED Server, Firewall RED Server Legacy, Firewall RED Client

and Firewall RED Client Legacy)

Enter the RED ID.

The RED ID is a 15-character string printed on the sticker which is stuck to the bottom of the RED device as well as on the front of the carton.

Tunnel ID (not available if Type is Firewall RED Client and Firewall RED Client Legacy)

Select the Tunnel ID from the drop-down list.

By default, Automatic is selected. Tunnels are numbered consecutively. Select a unique tunnel ID and make sure that it is the same for both the devices - RED and Sophos XG Firewall.

Note: If the type is Firewall RED Server Legacy or Firewall RED Server Legacy make sure that the tunnel ID is available on the appliance that should be connected.

Unlock Code

Enter the unlock code. (Do not fill this field if this RED is being deployed for the first time.)

The unlock code is an 8-character string that is generated when a RED is added to a Sophos XG

Firewall. If this RED has been deployed before, you must enter the unlock code here. The unlock code is generated during the deployment of a RED device, and is emailed instantly to the address you provided by activating RED. This is a security feature, which ensures that a RED device cannot simply be removed and installed elsewhere.

For manual deployment through USB stick and for automatic deployment through Provisioning

Service (see

Device Deployment

below), two separate unlock codes are generated. If you switch a

RED device from one deployment method to the other, make sure that you use the corresponding unlock code: For manual deployment, provide the unlock code of the previous manual deployment; for automatic deployment, provide the unlock code of the previous automatic deployment.

Firewall IP/Hostname (not available for Type Firewall RED Server and Firewall RED Server Legacy)

Enter the hostname of the Sophos XG Firewall.

The hostname must be a publicly resolvable DNS name or IP address for the Sophos XG Firewall.

The RED will use this name or the IP address to connect back to the Sophos XG Firewall.

2nd Firewall IP/Hostname (not available if client Type is RED 10)

Specify the hostname of the second Sophos XG Firewall.

Use 2nd IP/Hostname for (not available if client Type is RED 10)

Select from the following options:

• Failover: Ensures that the secondary Sophos XG Firewall takes over when the primary Sophos

XG Firewall fails. The secondary host takes over automatically without loss of connection.

• Load Balancing: Distributes traffic equally between, the primary and the secondary Sophos XG

Firewall.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 121

Provisioning File (available only if Type is Firewall RED Client or Firewall RED Client Legacy)

To provide the configuration data to the remote client device. Upload the provisioning file using the

Browse button and transfer the file to the remote device.

Description

Enter a description for the RED interface.

Device deployment

Select the deployment method:

• Automatically via Provisioning Service

• Manually via USB Stick

Note: If you select manual deployment, it is extremely important to retain the unlock code, which is sent by email. If you lose the unlock code, you can never connect the RED device again to another Sophos XG Firewall and you have to contact the Sophos Support.

By default, Sophos XG Firewall provides the RED’s configuration data automatically via Sophos’

RED Provisioning Service. In this case, the RED device receives its configuration via Internet.

If the RED does not have an Internet connection, you can provide the configuration manually, via USB stick. If you deploy a RED device manually, you have to ensure that the Sophos XG

Firewall is acting as NTP server. Activate the NTP on the Sophos XG Firewall under System >

Administration > Time and allow the correct network or the IP address of the RED.

Figure 95: Add RED Interface

4. Enter the details for Uplink Settings.

Uplink Connection

Select the connection type for the uplink:

• DHCP: The RED pulls an IP address from a DHCP server.

• Static: Enter an IP address, the corresponding netmask, a gateway and a DNS server IP address.

2nd Uplink Connection (available only if client Type is RED 50 is selected)

Select the connection type for the uplink:

• DHCP: The RED pulls an IP address from a DHCP server.

• Static: Enter an IP address, a corresponding netmask, gateway and DNS server IP address.

2nd Uplink Mode (available only if client Type is RED 50)

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 122

Select an uplink mode for the 2nd host.

• Failover

• Load Balancing

3G/UMTS Failover (not available if Operation Mode is Transparent/Split)

Select to enable the 3G/UMTS failover function. Clear the check box to disable the function.

Note: Plug in a 3G/UMTS USB stick into the RED’s USB port. The stick can provide

Internet uplink failover in case of WAN interface failure. For the necessary settings refer to your Internet provider’s data sheet.

• Mobile Network: Select the mobile network type from the drop-down list.

• GSM

• CDMA

• Username/Password (available only if CDMA is selected): If required, specify a username and password for the mobile network.

• PIN (available only if GSM is selected): Specify the PIN of the SIM card if a PIN is configured.

Note: If you specify a wrong PIN, the connection cannot be established through

3G/UMTS in case of WAN interface failure. Instead, the 3G/UMTS Failover checkbox of the RED device is automatically cleared. Thus, the wrong PIN is used only once. When the WAN interface comes up again, the RED device displays a warning: A wrong PIN was entered for 3G/UMTS failover uplink. Please change

the login data.. When you open the Edit RED dialog box, a message is displayed which tells you that the 3G/UMTS failover was automatically unselected. Enter the correct PIN and select the checkbox. After making three connection attempts with a wrong PIN, the SIM card is locked. It cannot be unlocking through the RED device or Sophos XG Firewall and you have to contact the Sophos support.

• APN (available only if GSM is selected): Enter your provider’s access point name information.

• Dial String : If your provider uses a different dial string, enter it here.

Default for GSM: *99#

Default for CDMA: #777

Figure 96: RED Uplink Settings

5. Specify the RED Network Settings details.

RED Operation Mode

Select to define how the remote network is to be integrated into your local network:

• Standard/Unified: All the remote network traffic is routed through the Sophos XG Firewall which serves as the DHCP server and as the default gateway too. Sophos XG Firewall has complete control over the network traffic of the remote network. It can apply firewall rules to traffic between the local and remote LANs as well as filter web traffic and applications of the remote network.

Note: Handle VLAN traffic through this mode if VLAN is deployed behind the

RED.

• Standard/Split: Only traffic to select local networks is routed through the Sophos XG Firewall.

Select the local networks from the drop-down list in the Split Network box or create new networks which can be accessed by the RED. Sophos XG Firewall controls the traffic to these

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 123 networks from the remote network. It also serves as the DHCP server and as the default gateway.

All other remote network traffic is sent directly out through the local Internet connection.

Note: VLAN tagged frames cannot be handled in this operation mode. To use a

VLAN behind your RED device, select the Standard/Unified operation mode.

• Transparent/Split (not available if 3G/UMTS Failover is selected): Sophos XG Firewall does not control network traffic of the remote network, nor does it serve as the DHCP server nor as the default gateway. On the contrary, it pulls an IP address of the remote network from the DHCP server to become part of that network. However, you can enable access to the local network for remote clients. Define split networks that can be accessed by the remote network.

Additionally, you can define one or more split domains to be accessible. If your local domains are not publicly resolvable, define a Split DNS Server, which can be queried by the remote clients.

Note: VLAN tagged frames cannot be handled in this operation mode. To use a VLAN behind your RED device, select the Standard/Unified operation mode instead.

RED IP (not available if Transparent/Split is selected)

Enter the IP address of the RED device.

RED Netmask (not available if Transparent/Split is selected)

Select the netmask from the drop-down list.

Zone

Select the zone from the drop-down list:

• LAN

• DMZ

• VPN

• WiFi

Configure DHCP

Enable to configure a DHCP range for RED.

RED DHCP Range (available only if Configure DHCP is selected)

Enter the DHCP range which the RED is allowed to use.

Split DNS Server (available only if Transparent/Split is selected)

If your local domains are not publicly resolvable, you need to define a Split DNS Server, which can be queried by remote clients.

Split Network (not available if Standard/Unified is selected)

Select the split networks from the drop-down list or add more networks.

Note: Traffic to the networks listed in the Split Network box is redirected to your

Sophos XG Firewall. The remaining traffic is directly routed to the Internet.

To check traffic from the branch office to the main office intranet for viruses, route it through the Sophos XG Firewall. Or use the Sophos XG Firewall as an HTTP proxy.

Split Domains (not available if Transparent/Split is selected)

Add one or more split domains.

Note: Since Sophos XG Firewall is only a client of the remote network, it is not possible to route traffic to the split networks the way it is done with the other modes.

Therefore, the RED device intercepts all traffic: Traffic targeting to a network listed in the Split Network box or going to a domain listed in the Split Domain box is redirected to the Sophos XG Firewall interface. This is accomplished by replacing the default gateway’s MAC address in the respective data packets with the MAC address of Sophos XG Firewall.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 124

Example: A partner or service provider requires access to your intranet or a certain server in your local network. Using a RED device the partner’s network remains completely independent of your network, but they can access a defined part of your network for certain purposes, as if they were connected via LAN.

MAC Filtering Type

To restrict the MAC addresses allowed to connect to the RED device select Blacklist or Whitelist.

Whitelist: Only MAC addresses listed in the MAC Address list are allowed.

Blacklist, MAC addresses listed in the MAC address list are not allowed.

MAC Address: The list of MAC addresses used to allow or restrict access to the RED device. MAC address lists can be created on the System > Hosts and Services > MAC Host page.

Note: MAC filtering only works for RED rev. 2 or newer. For RED 10, a maximum of 200 MAC addresses is allowed, whereas for RED 50, the list may contain up to 400

MAC addresses.

Tunnel Compression

Select to compress all traffic sent through the RED tunnel. Data compression can increase the throughput of the RED device deployed in regions with very slow Internet connection such as

1-2 MBps. However, performance increase depends on the data’s potential to be compressed (for example, data that is already compressed such as HTTPS or SSH cannot be compressed further). In some circumstances enabling data compression can actually reduce throughput of the RED device.

In such case, disable data compression.

Note: Tunnel compression is not available for RED 10 rev.1.

Figure 97: RED Network Settings

6. Enter the details of Switch Settings (available only if client Type is RED 50).

Switchport Mode

RED 50 offers four LAN ports that can be configured either as simple switches or for intelligent

VLAN usage. When set to Switch, all the traffic is sent to all ports. When set to VLAN, traffic can be filtered according to the Ethernet frames’ VLAN tag, thus allowing the tunneling of more than one network into the RED tunnel.

Select the switchport mode for the switch settings

• Switch: RED 50 uses the switch by default.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 125

• VLAN: Select the LAN port(s) and enter the LAN VID(s).

When using the VLAN switch port configuration, you can configure each LAN port separately. For each LAN port, the following options are available:

• Untagged (Hybrid Port): Ethernet frames with the VLAN IDs specified in the LAN VID(s) field below will be sent to this port. The frames are sent without tags, thus the end devices do not have to support VLAN. This port allows just one VLAN ID.

• Untagged, drop tagged (Access port): Ethernet frames with the VLAN IDs specified in the

LAN VID(s) field below will not be sent to this port. The frames are sent without tags, thus the end devices do not have to support VLAN.

• Tagged (Trunk Port): Ethernet frames with the VLAN IDs specified in the LAN VID(s) field below will be sent to this port. The frames are sent with tags, and the end devices have to support VLAN. Frames without VLAN IDs will not be sent to this port. This port allows up to

64 different VLAN ID(s) separated by comma.

• Disabled: This port is closed. No frames with or without VLAN IDs specified in the LAN

VID(s) will be sent to this port.

7. Click Save.

Note: If the message “Registering with RED service failed. Please make sure that this device can connect to the Internet on port 3400” appears, a network problem has occurred. Check if you can reach red.astaro.com through port 3400 (via console command telnet red.astaro.com 3400). If you can, the error could be due to high network load. Retry to connect later.

Related tasks

Configure RED

on page 286

This page describes how to configure RED.

Related information

RED Supported 3G/4G/LTE USB Dongles

Manage RED Interface

This chapter describes the functions of the icon of RED interfaces on the Configure > Network > Interfaces page.

The following options are available:

Activate/deactivate

The toggle switch next to the branch name shows the status of the interface. Click it to turn it on/off.

Note: The RED interface is deactivated and can not be edited if the RED device is bound to another system.

Download Provisioning file

This option is available only if the RED interface is in offline provisioning mode (if Device Deployment is set to

Manually via USB Stick).

Clicking on the link will download the provisioning file for the RED device. Save the file to the root directory of a USB stick. Then plug the USB stick into the RED appliance before turning it on. The RED will fetch its configuration from the USB stick. After that the connection between your appliance and the RED appliance is going to be established.

Note: It is crucial that you keep the unlock code, which is emailed instantly to the address provided on the

RED Configuration page as soon as the RED appliance receives its configuration. (In case of switching between manual and automatic deployment, make sure to keep both unlock codes.) You need the unlock code when you want to use the RED appliance with another Sophos XG Firewall. If you then do not have the unlock code ready, the only way to unlock the RED appliance is to contact the Sophos Support. The Support

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 126 however can only help you if you deployed the configuration automatically, via the RED Provisioning

Service.

3G/UMTS Failover

Displays if the 3G/UMTS Failover function is enabled or disabled.

Configure RED Site-to-Site Tunnel

This page describes how to set up a RED Site-to-Site Tunnel.

For such a connection, you need a RED server and a RED client. RED Site-toSite connection is also possible between

Sophos XG Firewall and Sophos UTM using the RED server legacy and RED client legacy. For more information,

see

RED Site-to-Site between Sophos XG Firewall and Sophos UTM

on page 126.

1. Configure the Firewall RED Server on the server machine.

How to configure RED is described in chapter

Configure RED

on page 286.

2. Add a RED interface on the Interfaces page.

How to add a RED interface is described in chapter

on page 119.

3. Go to Configure > Network > Interfaces.

On the required RED interface, click the icon towards the right and select Download Provisioning File.

5. Configure the Firewall RED Client on the client machine and upload the provisioning file you downloaded from the server machine.

The RED Site-to-Site tunnel has been established and is active. You can control the RED connection status on both machines in the Network Security Control Center in the section User Threat Quotient.

RED Site-to-Site between Sophos XG Firewall and Sophos UTM

RED Site-toSite connection is also possible between Sophos XG Firewall and Sophos UTM. Select interface type

RED Server Legacy if you want to use Sophos XG Firewall as a RED firewall server for a Sophos UTM client. The provisioning file needs to be uploaded in the Sophos UTM client management. When you use Sophos UTM as RED firewall you need to upload the provisioning file from the Sophos UTM in a Sophos XG Firewall interface with type

RED Client Legacy.

Sophos XG Firewall as RED Firewall server

This page describes how to set up a RED Site-to-Site Tunnel between Sophos XG Firewall as RED firewall server legacy and Sophos UTM as RED client.

1. Ensure that RED on Sophos XG Firewall is activated. This can be done from Configure > System Services >

RED.

2. Go to Configure > Network, click Add Interface on the upper right and select Add RED from the drop-down list.

3. Create a RED interface with type RED Firewall Server Legacy.

How to create a RED interface is described in chapter

on page 119.

4. Download the provisioning file.

5. Log in to Sophos UTM.

6. Ensure that RED on Sophos UTM is activated. This can be done from RED Management > Global Settings.

7. Go to RED Management > [Client] Tunnel Management, click New Tunnel.

8. Create a tunnel and upload the provisioning file from Sophos XG Firewall.

How to create a tunnel is described in

Sophos UTM Administration Guide

(Chapter 15.5 Tunnel Management).

9. Go to Interface & Routing > Interfaces, click New Interface.

10. Create a interface with the RED tunnel.

How to create a RED interface is described in

Sophos UTM Administration Guide

(Chapter 6.1 Interfaces).

The Site-to-Site connection between Sophos XG Firewall and Sophos UTM is now activated and can be seen in SF-

OS under Configure > Network > Interfaces and in the Control Center.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 127

Sophos UTM as RED Firewall Server

This page describes how to set up a RED Site-to-Site Tunnel between Sophos UTM as RED firewall server and

Sophos XG Firewall as RED client legacy.

1. Ensure that RED on Sophos UTM is activated. This can be done from RED Management > Global Settings.

2. Go to RED Management > [Server] Client Management, click New RED.

3. Create a RED.

How to create a RED is described in

Sophos UTM Administration Guide

(Chapter 15.3 Client Management).

4. Download the provisioning file.

5. Go to Interface & Routing > Interfaces, click New Interface.

6. Create an interface with the RED server.

How to create a RED interface in Sophos UTM is described in

Sophos UTM Administration Guide

(Chapter 6.1

Interfaces).

7. Ensure that RED on Sophos XG Firewall is activated. This can be done from Configure > System Services >

RED.

8. Go to Configure > Network, click Add Interface on the upper right and select Add RED from the drop-down list.

9. Create a RED interface with type RED Firewall Client Legacy and upload the provisioning file from Sophos

UTM.

How to create a RED interface is described in chapter

Configure Cellular WAN Settings

on page 119.

The Site-to-Site connection is between Sophos XG Firewall and Sophos UTM is now activated and can be seen in SF-

OS under Configure > Network > Interfaces and in the Control Center.

Tap

The device provides seamless proof of concept through the Discover Mode, allowing you to evaluate its security performance prior to purchase. Through the Tap interface, Discover Mode enables you to monitor network traffic without making any change in the current network schema.

Connect the device to a switch through which all the network traffic passes. Configure the switch to forward a copy of every packet passing through it to the device. The device monitors the traffic passively and generates a Security

Assessment Report (SAR) from the gathered data. SAR provides visibility into potential risks within the network, including application and web risks, risky users, intrusion risks, and more.

Note:

• When deployed in Discover Mode, the device functions in listening mode. Hence, no firewall rule is applied.

• Only unbound physical interfaces can be configured in Discover mode.

• For interfaces configured in Discover Mode, the Interfaces page displays the zone name as Discover.

• The Tap interface cannot be updated or deleted.

• Subscription to Network Protection and Web Protection modules is required for the analysis of IPS, Web

Filter and Application Filter policies.

• Pre-requisites for Discover Mode:

• The device must be connected to the Internet for web classification, IPS updates and SAR generation in the cloud.

• The device must be integrated with external authentication servers, such as Active Directory,

RADIUS, LDAP etc., for the SAR to provide user-specific data.

Enable Discover Mode

This page allows you to enable the Discover Mode through the Tap interface.

1. Access the CLI console by clicking admin on the upper right-hand corner of the Admin Console screen.

2. Select the option Console.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 128

3. Provide the admin password.

4. Select the option 4. Device Console.

5. Execute the following command to enable discover mode: console> system discover-mode tap add

<Port>

Figure 98: Enable Discover Mode

The message “Discover Interface added successfully” is displayed on the CLI. Additionally, the interface configured in Discover Mode displays the message “Discover, Physical (Tap)” on the Interfaces page.

Zones

This page displays a list of all the zones including system zones and lets you manage the zones.

A zone is a logical grouping of ports/physical interfaces and/or virtual sub-interfaces if defined.

Zones provide a flexible layer of security for the firewall. With the zone-based security, the administrator can group similar ports and apply the same policies to them instead of writing the same policy for each interface.

Next to the Name of the zone type, the list displays the Members belonging to the specific zone, the zone Type, the kind of Device Access and, optionally, a Description.

Default Zone Types

• LAN - Depending on the device in use and network design, you can group one to six physical ports in this zone.

Group multiple interfaces with different network subnets to manage them as a single entity. Group all the LAN networks under this zone.

• By default the traffic to and from this zone is blocked and hence, it is the most secured zone. However, traffic between ports belonging to same zone with different networks will be allowed if the policy is applied for LAN to

LAN.

• DMZ (DeMilitarized Zone) – This zone is normally used for publicly accessible servers. Depending on the device in use and network design, you can group multiple physical ports in this zone.

• WAN - This zone is used for Internet services. It can also be referred to as Internet zone.

• VPN – This zone is used for simplifying secure, remote connectivity. It is the only zone that does not have an assigned physical port/interface. Whenever the VPN connection is established, the port/interface used by the connection is automatically added to this zone and on disconnection; the port is automatically removed from the zone. Like all other default zones, scanning and access policies can be applied on the traffic for this zone.

• WiFi - This zone is used for wireless Internet services.

The device is shipped with a single zone for LAN, WAN, DMZ, VPN and WiFi. These zones are called system zones.

Additionally, you can define LAN and DMZ zone types.

Add Zone

1. Go to Configure > Network > Zonesand click Add.

2. Enter the zone details.

Name

Enter a name to identify the zone.

Description

Enter the description for the zone.

Type

Select the type of zone from the available options. LAN - Depending on the device in use and network design, you can group one to six physical ports in this zone. Group multiple interfaces with

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 129 different network subnets to manage them as a single entity. Group all the LAN networks under this zone.

By default the traffic to and from this zone is blocked and hence, it is the highest secured zone.

However, traffic between ports belonging to the same zone will be allowed.

DMZ (DeMilitarized Zone) - This zone is normally used for publicly accessible servers.

Depending on the device in use and network design, you can group one to five physical ports in this zone.

Note: By default, the entire traffic will be blocked except LAN to Local zone services like administration, authentication, and network.

Members

Displays all the member ports.

Click the checkbox to select the ports. All the selected ports are moved to the ‘Selected port’ list.

Device Access

Device access defines the type of administrative access permitted to a zone.

Admin Services - Enable administrative services that should be allowed through this zone:

• HTTPS - Allow secure HTTPS connection to the admin console through this zone

• Telnet – Allow Telnet connection to CLI through this zone

• SSH – Allow SSH connection to CLI through this zone

Authentication Services – Enable authentication services that should be allowed through this zone:

• Client Authentication

• Captive Portal

• NTLM

• Radius SSO

Network Services - Enable network services that should be allowed through this zone:

• DNS – Allow this zone to respond to DNS requests

• Ping/Ping6 – Allow this zone to respond to pings

Other Services - Enable other services that should be allowed through this zone:

• Web Proxy

• SSL VPN Tunnel

• Wireless Protection

• User Portal

• Dynamic Routing

• SNMP

• SMTP Relay

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 130

Figure 99: Add Zone

3. Click Save.

Note:

• If DMZ uses a private IP address, use NATing to make them publicly accessible.

• Local and VPN zones cannot be updated or deleted.

The new zone has been created and appears on the Zones page.

WAN Link Manager

A gateway routes traffic between the networks, and if the gateway fails, communication with an external network is not possible.

By default, the device supports only one gateway. However, to cope with gateway failure problems, the device provides an option to configure multiple gateways. But simply adding one more gateway is not an end to the problem.

Optimal utilization of all the gateways is also necessary. The device’s WAN Link Manager provides link failure protection by detecting the dead gateway and switching over to an active link. It also offers a mechanism to balance traffic between various links.

At the time of deployment, you have configured the IP address for a default gateway through the Network

Configuration Wizard. You can change this configuration any time and configure additional gateways. You can use the WAN Link Manger to configure multiple gateways for load balancing and failover.

By default, all the gateways defined through the Network Configuration Wizard will be defined as “Active” gateway.

The device provides a powerful solution for routing and managing traffic across multiple Internet connections.

Designed to provide business continuity for an organization of any size, the WAN Link Manager optimizes the use of multiple Internet links, such as T1s, T3s, DSL and cable connections from one or multiple Internet service providers.

Capable of automatic failover in the event of link failure, it helps to assure that your network is always connected to the Internet.

It also gives you an option to configure multiple WAN interfaces to allow connecting your device to more than one

Internet service provider (ISP).

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 131

When you configure multiple external interfaces, you even have an option to control which interface an outgoing packet uses.

Load Balancing

Load balancing is a mechanism that permits to balance traffic between various links. It distributes traffic among various links, optimizing utilization of all the links to accelerate performance and cut operating costs. The device employs weighted round robin algorithm for load balancing to reach maximum utilization of the capacities across the various links.

Using link load balancing gives organizations the possibility to achieve:

• Traffic distribution that does not overburden any link

• Automatic ISP failover

• Improved user performance because of no downtime

• Increased bandwidth scalability

To achieve outbound traffic load balancing between multiple links:

• Configure links in active-active setup, defining gateways as Active

• Assign an appropriate weight to each gateway. Traffic is distributed across the links in proportion to the ratio of weights assigned to individual links.

How it works

Load balancing is determined by the load metric. The load metric is weight. Each link is assigned a relative weight and the device distributes traffic across links in proportion to the ratio of weights assigned to individual links. This weight determines how much traffic will pass through a particular link in relation to the other link(s).

The administrator can set the weight and define how the traffic will be directed to providers to best utilize their bandwidth investments. Weight can be selected based on:

• Link capacity (for links with different bandwidths)

• Link/Bandwidth cost (for links with varying costs)

A weighted load balancing feature enables network managers to optimize network traffic and balance the load between multiple links/interfaces.

Gateway failover

Gateway failover provides link failure protection so that when one link goes down; the traffic is switched over to the active link. This safeguard helps to provide uninterrupted, continuous Internet connectivity to users. The transition is seamless and transparent to the end user with no disruption in service and without downtime.

To achieve WAN failover between multiple links:

• Configure links in active-backup setup

• Define Active gateway/interface

• Define backup gateway/interface – Traffic through this link is routed only when the active interface is down

• Define failover rule

In the event of Internet link failure, the WAN Link Manager automatically sends traffic to available Internet connections without administrator intervention. If more than one link is configured as backup link, traffic is distributed among the links in the ratio of the weights assigned to them. On failover, the backup gateway can inherit the parent gateway’s (active gateway) weight or can be configured.

The transition from the dead link to the active link is based on the failover rule defined for the link. The failover rule specifies:

• how to check whether the link is active or dead

• what action to take when a link is not active

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 132

The failover rule has the form:

IF Condition 1 AND/OR Condition 2 then Action

Depending on the outcome of the condition, traffic is shifted to any other available gateway.

A ping rule is automatically created for every gateway. The device periodically sends the ping request to check health of the link and if link does not respond, traffic is automatically sent through another available link. The selection of the gateway and how much traffic is to be routed through each gateway depends on the number of configured active and backup gateways.

Gateway Failback

During a link failure, the device regularly checks the health of a given connection, assuring a fast reconnection as soon as the Internet service is restored. When the connection is restored and the gateway is up again, without the administrator’s intervention, traffic is again routed through the active gateway. In other words, the backup gateway fails back on the active gateway.

WAN Link Manager

The WAN Link Manager page displays a list of configured IPv4 and IPv6 gateways. The page also displays the status

Active or Deactive for each gateway and failover rule in case multiple gateways are configured. You can change the gateway parameters, change the gateway status, add or remove the failover rule, and view the data transfer passed through the gateway.

For the backup gateway, the weight is NA while for the active gateway, the configured weight is displayed.

Click the data transfer icon under the Manage column of the corresponding gateway to view the total data transferred through the gateway in graphical as well as in tabular form.

Gateway Failover Timeout Configuration

Gateway Failover Timeout

Configure the gateway failover timeout in seconds.

This is the time period the device waits before the gateway failover occurs.

Default: 60 seconds

Acceptable Range: 1 to 65535

Figure 100: Gateway Failover Timeout Configuration

Update Gateway Configuration

1. Go to Configure > Network > WAN Link Manager, click the gateway’s Name hyperlink or click the edit icon under the Manage column to edit its settings.

2. Enter the gateway details.

Name

Enter the name of the gateway.

IP Address

Enter the IP address assigned to the gateway.

Interface

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 133

Specify the IP address of the interface.

Type

Specify the type of the gateway.

Available Options: Active - Traffic will route through the active gateway(s). If more than one active gateway is configured then the traffic will be load balanced between these gateways depending on the weight assigned to the each gateway.Backup – A gateway used in an active/ passive setup, where traffic is routed through the backup gateway only when the active gateway is down.

Weight

Depending on the weight, the gateway is selected for load balancing. The device distributes traffic across links in proportion to the ratio of weights assigned to individual links.

This weight determines how much traffic will pass through a particular link relative to the other link(s).

Gateways can be assigned a weight from 1 to100.

Note: When multiple gateways are configured and one gateway goes down, the traffic is switched over to the available gateways according to the ratio of the weights assigned to the available gateways.

Default NAT Policy

Select the NAT policy to be used as default for a particular gateway.

By default, the MASQ NAT policy is configured.

Select None, if NAT should not be applied on that particular gateway.

Figure 101: Update Active Gateway Configuration

3. Enter the backup gateway details (Only available, if the type is Backup)

Activate This Gateway

Select gateway activation condition: automatically or manually.

Automatic failover

For automatic failover, activate the option If ... Active gateway fails.

From the dropdown list, specify when the backup gateway should take over from the active gateway. This takeover process will not require the administrator’s intervention.

Available Options:

• Specific Gateway - The dropdown list displays all configured gateways. The backup gateway will take over and traffic will be routed through the backup gateway only when the selected gateway fails.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 134

• ANY – The backup gateway will take over and traffic will be routed through the backup gateway when any of the active gateway fails.

• ALL – The backup gateway will take over and traffic will be routed through the backup gateway when all the configured active gateways fail.

Manual failover

If you select Manually, the administrator will have to change the gateway manually when the active gateway fails.

Action on Activation

Configure weight for the backup gateway. The device distributes traffic across links in proportion to the ratio of weights assigned to individual link. This weight determines how much traffic will pass through a particular link relative to the other link.

Inherit weight of the failed active gateway

If this option is selected, the backup gateway will inherit the parent gateway’s (active gateway) weight

Use configured weight

If this option is selected, the weight specified in the Weight field will be used for the backup gateway.

Figure 102: Backup Gateway Details

4. Click Save.

The gateway details have been updated.

5. Configure the Failover Rules.

IF Then Condition

From the dropdown list, select the communication protocol, such as TCP or PING (ICMP). Select the protocol depending on the service to be tested on the host.

Port: For TCP communication, specify the port number for communication.

on IP Address: Specify the IP address of the computer or the network device which is permanently running or most reliable.

Condition

• AND - All the conditions must be satisfied before the specified action is taken

• OR - At least one condition must be satisfied before the specified action is taken.

A request is sent to an IP address. If the IP address does not respond to the request, the device considers the IP address as unreachable.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 135

Figure 103: Configure Failover Rules

6. Click Save.

The failover rule has been updated.

Add Failover Rule

1. Go to Configure > Network > WAN Link Manager, click the gateway’s Name hyperlink or click the edit icon under the Manage column and click Add under the Failover Rules section.

2. Configure the failover rules.

IF Then Condition

From the dropdown list, select the communication protocol, such as TCP or PING (ICMP). Select the protocol depending on the service to be tested on the host.

Port: For TCP communication, specify the port number for communication.

on IP Address: Specify the IP address of the computer or the network device which is permanently running or most reliable.

Condition

• AND - All the conditions must be satisfied before the specified action is taken

• OR - At least one condition must be satisfied before the specified action is taken.

A request is sent to an IP address. If the IP address does not respond to the request, the device considers the IP address as unreachable.

Figure 104: Configure Failover Rules

3. Click Save.

The failover rule has been added.

Network Traffic Report for Default Gateway

Click the data transfer icon under the Manage column of the corresponding gateway to view the total data transferred through the gateway in graphical as well as in tabular form.

Network Traffic Report for Default Gateway

Period

From the available options, select the period for the report of the network traffic that passed through the gateway.

Available Options:

• Weekly

• Monthly

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 136

• Custom

The graph displays the upload, download and total data transfer through the gateway.

• X-axis: Date (depending on the period selected)

• Y-axis: KB/MB/GB used

Legend

• Orange Color – Upload Network Traffic (MB)

• Purple Color – Download Network Traffic (MB)

• Green Color – Total Network Traffic (MB)

Note: When the selected period is Custom, then the user can select to view data of not more than the last six (06) months. At one time, only thirty (30) days data will be displayed.

Figure 105: Network Transfer Report

DNS

Use this page to configure the DNS settings of the device.

The DNS server is configured at the time of installation. You can add additional DNS servers to which the device can connect for name resolution. If multiple DNS are defined, they are queried in the order as they are entered.

Note: You can also view and manage the DNS server status on the Monitor & Analyze > Diagnostics >

Services page.

Sophos XG Firewall supports static DNS host entry where the device acts as a DNS Name Server that provides the requesting client with A records to resolve their requested URL.

You can manually add static DNS host entries for a particular domain name. Sophos XG Firewall checks DNS host entries for the requested domain name. If the domain name requested by the user matches the DNS host entry then the device performs DNS resolution and replies to the client with the IP address found in the static DNS host entry. DNS requests do not need to be redirected to the Local/Authoritative DNS server any longer. This facilitates faster data

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 137 transfer and avoids multiple DNS resolution cycles for every client request. You can also add multiple IP addresses for a single website hosted behind Sophos XG Firewall.

When you want external domains names to be resolved through internal DNS servers in your network, you can add

DNS request routes to such servers. This will decrease the Internet traffic over the network and speed up DNS client requests as queries will not be forwarded outside the network. Also, DNS information would be less exposed on the

Internet thus enhancing security.

IPv4

Obtain DNS from DHCP

Click to override the device DNS with the DNS address received from the DHCP server.

The option is available if enabled from the Network Configuration Wizard or if a DHCP interface is configured.

Obtain DNS from PPPoE

Click to override the device DNS with the DNS address received from the PPPoE server.

The option is available if enabled from the Network Configuration Wizard or if a DHCP interface is configured.

Static DNS

Select to provide a static IPv4 DNS server address.

A maximum of three static DNS IPv4 addresses can be provided.

Figure 106: IPv4 DNS Settings

IPv6

Obtain DNS from DHCP

Click to override the device DNS with the DNS address received from the DHCP server.

The option is available if enabled from the Network Configuration Wizard or if a DHCP interface is configured.

Static DNS

Select to provide a static IPv6 DNS server address.

A maximum of three static DNS IPv6 addresses can be provided.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 138

Figure 107: IPv6 DNS Settings

DNS Query Configuration

Choose server based on incoming requests record type

Select to choose the DNS server to be used for resolving the domain name on the basis of the incoming requests record type. Incoming request can be of A or AAAA type.

Choose IPv6 DNS server over IPv4

Select to first choose the IPv6 DNS server for resolving the DNS and then the IPv4 DNS server.

If both IPv6 and IPv4 DNS servers are configured, then it first selects the IPv6 DNS server for all requests followed by the IPv4 DNS server.

Choose IPv4 DNS server over IPv6

Select to first choose the IPv4 DNS server for resolving the DNS and then the IPv6 DNS server.

If both IPv6 and IPv4 DNS servers are configured, then it first selects the IPv4 DNS server for all requests followed by the IPv6 DNS server.

Choose IPv6 if request originator address is IPv6, else IPv4

Select to choose the IPv6 DNS server if a request is received from an IPv6 source or choose the

IPv4 DNS server, if a request is received from an IPv4 source.

Apply

Click to save the configuration.

Test Name Lookup

Click and provide an IP address or host name for testing the connectivity with the DNS server.

Figure 108: DNS Query Configuration

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 139

DNS Host Entry

The DNS Host Entry section displays the list of all the configured host entries. You can filter the list based on the host/domain name. This section provides the option to add, update, or delete entries.

DNS Request Route

This section displays a list of all the configured DNS request routes. You can filter the list based on the name or the target. Additionally, you can add, update and delete routes.

Add DNS Host Entry

1. Go to Configure > Network > DNS and click Add under DNS Host Entry section.

2. Enter the host entry details.

Host/Domain Name

Provide a fully qualified domain name (FQDN) for the host/domain.

Address

Enter the address details for the host entry.

Entry Type

Select the DNS host entry type.

Available Options:

• Manual – Enter the IP address for the host manually

• Interface IP – Configure an interface as host

IP Address

Specify the IP address of the host/domain or select an interface IP depending on the option selected for the entry type.

Maximum entries per host: 8

Time to Live (seconds)

Specify the TTL in seconds.

Default: 60 seconds

Weight

Specify the weight for load balancing the traffic. The device distributes traffic across the links in proportion to the ratio of weights assigned to individual links.

This weight determines how much traffic will pass through a particular link relative to the other link(s).

Default: 1

Publish on WAN

Enable to publish the DNS host entry on WAN.

Default: Disabled

Reverse DNS Lookup

Reverse DNS lookup is the resolution of an IP address to its designated domain name. Enable to allow reverse DNS lookup.

Note: If there are multiple hosts resolving to the same IP address then Reverse DNS

Lookup can only be configured for one of the IP addresses.

• Only A, AAAA, and PTR type of DNS records are supported.

• Address (A) record points a hostname to an IP address and returns a 32-bit IPv4 address.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 140

• AAAA record points a hostname to an IP address and returns a 128-bit IPv6 address.

• Pointer records (PTR) are just the reverse of A records and are used for reverse lookups. They map the IP address to a hostname.

• Maximum DNS entries supported: 1024

• If the device interface is used as a DNS in the client system then a query is sent to the configured DNS servers prior to querying the ROOT severs.

Figure 109: DNS Host Entry

3. Click Save.

The DNS host entry has been created and appears on the DNS page.

Add DNS Request Route

1. Go to Configure > Network > DNS and click Add under DNS Request Route section.

2. Enter DNS request route details.

Host/Domain Name

Specify the domain for which you want to use the internal DNS server.

Target Servers

Select a DNS server(s) to resolve the domain specified above.

You can also add IP address to the DNS from this page by entering it in the entry field. Up to eight

IP addresses can be added.

Figure 110: Add DNS Request Route

3. Click Save.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 141

The DNS request route has been created and appears on the DNS page.

DHCP

The DHCP section allows you to configure DHCP for your network.

On a network, the dynamic host configuration protocol (DHCP) automatically assigns IP addresses to the hosts on a network, thus reducing the administrator’s configuration task. Instead of requiring administrators to assign, track and change (when necessary) IP addresses for every host on a network, DHCP settles it automatically. Furthermore,

DHCP ensures that duplicate addresses are not used.

The DHCP section covers the following topics:

Server

The device acts as a DHCP server: it assigns a unique IP address to a host and releases the address when the host leaves and re-joins the network. Each time, when the host connects to the network, it can have another IP address. In other words, the device provides a mechanism for allocating the IP address dynamically so that addresses can be reused.

An interface having static IP assignment can also act as a DHCP server. You can disable or change this DHCP server configuration. You can configure IPv4 and IPv6 DHCP servers.

Using the Server section, you can configure, manage, and enable/disable DHCP servers on the device. It displays a list of all configured DHCP servers, and you can filter the list based on the IP family.

Note:

• The device cannot act as DHCPv6 server and DHCPv6 relay agent simultaneously.

• DHCPv4 Server and DHCPv4 Relay cannot be configured using the same Interface.

Relay

Deploying DHCP in a single segment network is easy. All DHCP messages are IP broadcast messages, and therefore all the computers on the segment can listen and respond to these broadcasts. But things get complicated when there is more than one subnet on the network. The reason is that the DHCP broadcast messages do not cross the router interfaces by default. The DHCP relay agent makes it possible to place DHCP clients and DHCP servers on different networks. The relay agent allows DHCP broadcast messages to be sent over routers that do not support forwarding of these types of messages. The DHCP relay agent enables DHCP clients to obtain IP addresses from a DHCP server on a remote subnet, or from a server which is not located on the local subnet. If the DHCP relay agent is not configured, clients would only be able to obtain IP addresses from the DHCP server which is on the same subnet.

Using the Relay section, you can configure and manage DHCP relay agents on the device. It displays a list of all interfaces configured as a relay agent, and you can filter the list based on the relay agent name and the IP family.

Lease

The device acting as a DHCP server assigns or leases an IP address from an address pool to a host DHCP client. The

IP address is leased for a determined period of time or until the client relinquishes the address. The IPv4/IPv6 Lease section displays a list of all IPv4 and IPv6 addresses leased dynamically, and you can filter the lists based on the leased IP, or the client’s physical address.

IPv4 Lease

For each IPv4 address, the list displays the following:

• Leased IP address

• Leased start and end time

• Client physical address

• Client host name

• Lease type

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 142

IPv6 Lease

For each leased IPv6 address the list displays the following:

• Leased IP address

• Leased start and end time

• Client physical address

• DUID

Related information

Configure DHCP Options

Configure Interface as DHCPv4 Server

1. Go to Configure > Network > DHCP, click Add in the Server section and select IPv4 using the default filter.

2. Specify the General Settings details.

Name

Enter a name to identify the DHCPv4 server uniquely.

Interface

Select an interface to set it as DHCPv4 server. DHCP service can be configured on a virtual interface but not on an interface alias.

Note: DHCPv4 Server and DHCPv4 Relay cannot be configured using the same

Interface.

Accept Client request via Relay

Select this to accept client requests through DHCP Relay.

Note: If you select this option, Use Interface IP as Gateway is disabled.

Dynamic IP Lease

Specify the range of IP addresses from which the DHCP server must assign an IP address to the clients and set a subnet mask for the IP address range. You can configure multiple IP ranges for the same interface. Furthermore, you can provide multiple IP ranges for the DHCP server.

Click and to add or delete a range.

Static IP MAC Mapping

If you want to assign specific IP addresses to some or all clients permanently, you can define static

MAC address-to-IP address mappings. To define a MAC-IP mapping, you should know the MAC address of the client’s network card. The MAC address is usually specified in hexadecimal digits separated by colons (for example, 00:08:76:16:BC:21). Specify the host name, the MAC address and the IP address. You can provide multiple MAC-IP mappings for the DHCP server.

Use and to add or delete a MAC-IP mapping.

Subnet Mask

Select a subnet mask for the server.

Domain Name

Specify the domain name that the DHCP server will assign to the DHCP clients.

Gateway

Use this option to apply an interface IP as gateway.

Specify the IP address to be used as default gateway or select Use Interface IP as Gateway to use the IP address entered for Interface

Default Lease Time

Specify the default lease time.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 143

Acceptable range: 1 to 43200 minutes (30 days)

Default: 1440 minutes

Max Lease Time

Specify the maximum lease time. The DHCP client must ask the DHCP server for new settings after the specified maximum lease time has expired.

Acceptable range: 1 to 43200 minutes (30 days)

Default: 2880 minutes

Conflict Detection

Enable IP conflict detection to check the IP address before leasing. If enabled, the already leased IP address will not be leased again.

Figure 111: General Settings

3. Specify the DNS Server details.

Use Device’s DNS Settings

Click to use the device’s DNS server. In this case, the first two configured DNS will be used.

If not enabled, provide a primary and secondary DNS to be used.

Primary DNS (available only if Use Device’ DNS Settings is disabled)

Specify the IP address of the primary DNS server.

Secondary DNS (available only if Use Device’ DNS Settings is disabled)

Specify the IP address of the secondary DNS server.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 144

Figure 112: DNS Server details

4. Specify WINS Server details.

Primary WINS Server

Specify the IP address of the primary WINS server.

Secondary WINS Server

Specify the IP address of the secondary WINS server.

Figure 113: WINS Server details

5. Click Save.

6. To enable or disable the DHCP server, go to Configure > Network > DHCP and turn the Status On or Off.

Related information

Configure DHCP Options

Configure Interface as DHCPv6 Server

1. Go to Configure > Network > DHCP, click Add in the Server section and select IPv6 using the default filter.

2. Specify the General Settings details.

Name

Enter a name to identify the DHCPv6 server uniquely.

Interface

Select an interface to set it as DHCPv6 server. DHCP service can be configured on a virtual interface but not on an interface alias.

Accept Client request via Relay

Select this to accept client requests through DHCP Relay.

Dynamic IP Lease

Specify the range of IPv6 addresses from which the DHCP server must assign an IP address to the clients and set a subnet mask for the IPv6 address range. You can configure multiple IPv6 range for the same interface.

Furthermore, you can provide multiple IP ranged for the DHCP server.

Click and to add and delete a range.

Static IP DUID Mapping

If you want to assign specific IP addresses to some or all clients permanently, you can define static

DUID address-to-IP address mappings. To define DUID-IP mapping, you should know the DHCP

Unique Identifier (DUID) of the client. The DUID address is usually specified in groups of two hexadecimal digits separated by colons.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 145

*Each DHCP client and server has a DUID. DHCP servers use DUIDs to identify clients for the selection of configuration parameters. DHCP clients use DUIDs to identify a server in messages where a server needs to be identified.

Specify the host name, DUID and the IP address. You can provide multiple DUID-IP mappings for the DHCP server.

Click and to add or delete a DUID-IP mapping.

Preferred Time

Specify the preferred time.

Acceptable range: 1 to 43200 minutes (30 days)

Default: 540 minutes

Note: Preferred time should be less than valid time.

Valid Time

Specify the valid time.

Acceptable range: 1 to 43200 minutes (30 days)

Default: 720 minutes

Figure 114: General Settings

3. Specify the DNS Server details.

Use Device’s DNS Settings

Click to use the device’s DNS server. In this case, the first two configured DNS will be used.

If not enabled, provide a primary and secondary DNS to be used.

Primary DNS (available only if Use Device’ DNS Settings is disabled)

Specify the IPv6 address of the primary DNS server.

Secondary DNS (available only if Use Device’ DNS Settings is disabled)

Specify the IPv6 address of the secondary DNS server.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 146

Figure 115: DNS Server details

4. Click Save.

5. To enable or disable the DHCP server, go to Configure > Network > DHCP and turn the Status On or Off.

Related information

Configure DHCP Options

* RFC 3315 (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol for IPv6 (DHCPv6)

Add DHCP Relay Configuration

1. Go to Configure > Network > DHCP and click Add in the Relay section.

2. Enter the DHCP relay configuration details.

Name

Provide a name to identify the DHCP relay agent.

IP Family

Select the IP family for the DHCP relay agent.

Available Options:

• IPv4

• IPv6

Interface

Select an interface on which your client network is configured. Device listens for DHCP queries on this interface and is used to forward packets between client and server.

Interfaces having a static IP assignment can act as a DHCP relay agent.

The DHCP relay agent can be configured on a virtual interface but not on an interface alias.

Note:

• The device cannot act as DHCPv6 server and DHCPv6 relay agent simultaneously.

• DHCPv4 Server and DHCPv4 Relay cannot be configured using the same

Interface.

DHCP Server IP

Specify the DHCP server IP address. You can also configure multiple DHCP servers. This facilitates deploying DHCP servers in high availability environment. The DHCP relay will forward packets to all configured DHCP servers, and the active server will serve the request. In case the active server goes down, the backup server serves the request. The DHCP server takes care of leasing the IP address to a client.

Maximum DHCP servers configurable per DHCP relay: 8

Relay through IPSec (Only availabe if IP family is IPv4)

Select to relay DHCP messages through an IPSec VPN tunnel.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 147

Figure 116: Add DHCP Relay Configuration

3. Click Save.

The DHCP relay agent has been created and appears on the DHCP page.

IPv6 Router Advertisement

Address Assignment for IPv6 Devices

IPv6 clients are assigned an IP address through:

• DHCP for IPv6

• Stateless address auto configuration (SLAAC)

DHCP for IPv6

Similar to IPv4, IPv6 can use DHCP to assign IP addresses to any clients. The device can be configured to be a stateful DHCP server. The DHCP server is responsible for assigning the IP address to the client and for keeping a record of all clients and the IPv6 addresses assigned to them.

Stateless Address Auto Configuration

The IPv6 protocol supports address auto configuration for stateless addresses. IPv6 devices automatically create unique link-local addresses for IPv6 enabled interfaces, and clients use router advertisement messages to configure their own IP address automatically.

Router Advertisement

The device acting as a router has the ability to participate in stateless auto configuration (SLAAC) and by default provides a IPv6 address and a default gateway to the client.

When the device interface is connected to a network and enabled, the host may send out an ICMPv6 (type 135)

Router Solicitation (RS) message that requests the device to generate Router Advertisement (RA) immediately instead of waiting until their next scheduled time. On receiving the RS message, the device immediately sends an ICMPv6

(type 134) router advertisement (RA) message announcing the state of its availability. Router advertisements include information about which method to be used for address assignment, prefixes used for on-link determination and/or address configuration, hop limit value, several flag status, etc. The critical parameters can be administered centrally and if necessary, can be propagated automatically to all hosts on the network. The device advertises information about various interfaces and Internet parameters either periodically or in response to the RS message, informing all the nodes on the network about any modification regarding addressing information. Thus, Router advertisement (along

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 148 with prefix flags) permits simple stateless auto configuration and guides a host in generating an address using autoconfiguration.

Note: You can also view and manage the router advertisement service status on the Monitor & Analyze >

Diagnostics > Services page.

Configure IPv6 Router Advertisement settings

1. Go to Configure > Network > IPv6 Router Advertisement and click Add.

2. Enter details for the General Settings.

Interface

Select an interface for router advertisement.

All IPv6 enabled physical interfaces, LAG, VLAN and bridge interfaces can be selected.

Description

Enter a description for the interface to be selected for router advertisement.

Min Advertisement Interval

Specify the minimum time interval in seconds between two consecutive unsolicited router advertisement messages sent to the clients.

Acceptable range: 3 to 1350 seconds

Default: 198 seconds

If the Max Advertisement Interval is 9 seconds or above, then the Min Advertisement Interval must be: 0.75 * maximum advertisement interval.

Max Advertisement Interval

Specify the maximum time interval in seconds between two consecutive unsolicited router advertisement messages sent to the clients.

Acceptable Range: 4 to 1800 seconds

Default: 600 seconds

Managed Flag

Select to set the managed flag. When this flag is set, IPv6 addresses are obtained from the DHCPv6 server.

By default, this flag is not selected.

Note: The option must be selected only if a DHCPv6 Server is available else IPv6 clients would not get IPv6 addresses

Other Flag

Select to set the other flag. When this flag is set, the DHCPv6 client obtains other network parameters such as DNS server, domain name, NIS, NISP, SIP, SNTP, and BCMS servers from the

DHCPv6 server.

Note: This option must be selected only if a DHCPv6 server is available.

Default Gateway

Select to use the device as default gateway for communication with the client.

Life Time

Specify the time in seconds to be used for router advertisement as a default gateway at the client end.

The value specified should be between the value specified for Max Advertisement Interval and

9000 seconds.

Default: 1800 seconds

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 149

Prefix Advertisement Configuration

Prefix Advertisement includes zero or more prefix options containing information that the default gateway advertises. This information is used by stateless address auto configuration to auto-generate a global IPv6 address. Prefix advertisement has its own list of attributes:

Prefix / 64

Provide the first 64 bits of the IPv6 address.

The interface uses this prefix information from the router advertisement message to determine the last 64 bits (interface identifier) of its 128-bit IPv6 address.

The first 64 bits (higher order bits) of the IPv6 address so provided, specify the network, while the remaining specify a particular address in the network. Hence, IPv6 addresses in one network have the same first 64 bits and are called “prefix”.

On-link

Select to set the prefix to be “On-link”. With the attribute On-link set, the devices with IPv6 addresses that are within this prefix are reachable on the subnet without a need of a router.

By default, this flag is set.

Autonomous

Select to set the prefix attribute Autonomous. On being set, the global IPv6 address is automatically generated by appending the 64 bit interface identifier to the prefix (prefix /64) advertised in the prefix information.

Only those prefixes that has the Autonomous flag set gets a stateless address auto configuration

(SLAAC) IPv6 address.

By default, the flag is set.

Preferred Life Time

Specify the time in minutes for a valid address to remain in the preferred state. The use of the preferred address is unlimited.

On expiry of the valid life time, the preferred address becomes deprecated. The use of the deprecated address must be avoided, however, it is not forbidden and can be continued to be used as source address for an existing communication.

The IPv6 address will continue to remain in the preferred state as long as it is refreshed by prefixes in the router advertisement or by any other means or are renewed by DHCPv6.

Acceptable values: 0 to 71582789 minutes

Default: 240 minutes

Specify the attribute value as “-1” for an infinite preferred life time.

Valid Life Time

Specify the time in minutes for an address to remain in the valid state.

This value determines the time for an address to be in the valid state. Until the time expires, the prefix is considered to be on-link and auto-configured addresses using the prefix can be used.

On expiry of the valid life time, the IPv6 address becomes invalid and cannot be used to send or receive traffic.

Acceptable range: 0 to 71582789 minutes

Default: 1440 minutes

Specify the attribute value as “-1” for an infinite valid life time.

Use the and icons to add or remove a prefix.

Note: The value of attribute Valid Life Time must be greater than or equal to value of Preferred Life Time.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 150

Figure 117: General Settings

3. Enter the details for the Advanced Settings

Using the network discovery protocol (NDP) devices on the same interface discover the presence of each other and the respective link-layer addresses, find gateway routers and maintain the reachability information about the active paths to the peers.

Link MTU

Specify the Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU) in bytes for the packets sent on this interface.

Default: 0

Acceptable range: 1280 to 1500 bytes

If Link MTU is set to zero, the information will not be advertised by the interface.

Reachable Time

Specify the reachable time in seconds that the client will use to assume a neighbor is reachable after having received a reachability confirmation message.

Default: 0

Acceptable range: 0 to 3600 seconds

Retransmit Time

Specify the retransmission time in seconds that the client will use to determine how long it should wait before retransmitting neighbor solicitation messages.

Default: 0

Acceptable range: 0 to 4294968 seconds

Hop Limit

Specify the hop limit value.

This value determines the number of hops that a packet is limited to. The hop value is decremented by each router along the route. On reaching zero, the packet is destroyed.

Default: 64

Acceptable range: 0 to 255 seconds

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 151

Figure 118: Advanced Settings

4. Click Save.

The IPv6 router advertisement settings have been updated.

Cellular WAN

This feature is not supported in Sophos Virtual Security Devices.

Cellular WAN is a wide area network (WAN) for data that is typically provided by the cellular carriers to transmit a wireless signal over a range of several miles to a mobile device. Cellular WAN connectivity allows a user with a laptop and a Cellular WAN support to use the web, or connect to a VPN from anywhere within the regional boundaries of a cellular service.

Cellular WAN are popularly known as “wireless broadband”.

To configure Cellular WAN:

1. Enable Cellular WAN. You can also enable from CLI with the command: system cellular_wan enable.

2. Re-login to the Admin console.

3. Edit the Cellular WAN (WWAN1) interface and configure the Cellular WAN initialization string and gateway from Configure > Network > Interfaces page.

To configure Cellular WAN settings, please refer:

on page 109

Once Cellular WAN is enabled, an interface named WWAN1 is created and it is the member of the WAN zone.

As Cellular WAN interface is a member of WAN zone:

• All the services enabled for the WAN zone from the Device Access page are automatically applicable on WWAN1 connection too.

• All the firewall rules applied on WAN zone will be applied on Cellular WAN (WWAN1) interface.

• A default host named ##WWAN1 is created and firewall rules and VPN policies can be created for the default host.

• WWAN1 gateway is added as backup gateway

• When the Cellular WAN is disabled from CLI in the Cellular WAN menu, default host ##WWAN1and Cellular

WAN gateway options will be removed from the Admin Console.

Note:

• Cellular WAN is not supported in bridge mode.

• DHCP server configuration is not supported for the Cellular WAN (WWAN1) interface.

• If backup of a device is taken on which Cellular WAN is enabled and restored on a device where it is not enabled, Cellular WAN configuration would still be visible.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 152

Status

The Cellular WAN page displays the status of the Cellular WAN connection. Along with details of the Cellular WAN connection, the page also provides the facility to connect and disconnect the Cellular WAN connection. Below are the screen elements with their description:

Cellular WAN

Enable/Disable Cellular WAN.

Default - Disabled

Connect/Disconnect Button

Click to connect or disconnect the Cellular WAN connection. This process may take some time.

Status

Displays the status of the connection. Status messages can be of the following types:

Possible Status:

• Modem not supported

• No Modem plugged-in

• Connecting…

• Reconnecting

• Connected

• Disconnected

Modem Name

Name of the modem.

IP Address

IP address assigned to the device.

Gateway IP

IP address assigned as the gateway.

Bytes Uploaded

Number of bytes uploaded (in KB).

Bytes Downloaded

Number of bytes downloaded (in KB).

Time Duration

Time period since Cellular WAN is connected.

Format: HH:MM::SS

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 153

Figure 119: Status of the cellular WAN Connection

IP Tunnels

An IP tunnel is an Internet protocol network communications path between two networks. It is used to encapsulate one network protocol as a carrier for another network protocol. It is often used by two separate networks having a router with different network addresses for communication. The device supports IPv6 tunneling. Hence, IPv6 packets can be encapsulated in IPv4 headers using the IP Tunnel feature.

This page provides a list of all configured IP tunnels. The administrator can create and manage IP tunnels from this page.

Add IP Tunnel

The Add IP Tunnel page allows you to create or edit an existing 6in4, 6to4, 6rd or 4in6 IP tunnel.

1. Go to Configure > Network > IP Tunnels and click Add.

2. Enter the tunnel details.

Tunnel Name

Enter a unique name to identify the tunnel.

Tunnel Type

Select the tunnel type from the available options.

Available Options:

• 6in4 – 6in4 uses tunneling to encapsulate IPv6 traffic over IPv4 links. This is used when IPv6 packets have to travel over IPv4 links with IPv6 networks at both endpoints..

• 6to4 – 6to4 allows encapsulation of an IPv6 packet in an IPv4 header to send it to an IPv4 destination. This is used when the local endpoint is an IPv6 host while the remote endpoint is an

IPv4 host.

• 6rd – 6rd is similar in implementation to the 6to4 tunnel. However, unlike 6to4, 6rd allows the administrator to use a native IPv6 prefix.

• 4in6 – 4in6 uses tunneling to encapsulate IPv4 traffic over configured IPv6 tunnels. This is used when IPv4 traffic is to be used in a pure IPv6 network.

6rd Prefix (available only if the tunnel type 6rd is selected)

Specify the native IPv6 prefix to be used for the tunnel.

Zone

Select the zone to create the tunnel for.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 154

The tunnel is used for the traffic of the selected zone.

Available Options:

• LAN

• WAN

• DMZ

• WiFi

Local Endpoint

Specify the IP address of the local endpoint of the tunnel.

For:

• 6in4: Specify the IPv6 address of the local endpoint.

• 6to4: Specify the IPv6 address of the local endpoint.

• 6rd: Specify the IPv6 address of the local endpoint.

• 4in6: Specify the IPv4 address of the local endpoint.

Remote Endpoint (available only if the tunnel types 6in4 or 4in6 are selected)

Specify the IP address of the remote endpoint of the tunnel.

For

• 6in4: Specify the IPv4 address of the remote endpoint.

• 4in6: Specify the IPv6 address of the remote endpoint.

3. Enter the Advanced Settings.

TTL

Specify the time to live (TTL) life time for the data.

The attribute TTL defines a limit regarding the number of attempts to transmit an IP packet before discarding it.

Default: 0

Acceptable Range: 0 to 255

TOS

Specify the type of service (TOS) for the data.

The attribute TOS provides the value for an IP packet depending on the service which is provided.

The service mainly defines the packet priority, the type of route (latency, throughput, or reliable service).

Default: 0

Acceptable Range: 0 to 99

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 155

Figure 120: IP Tunnel

4. Click Save.

The IP tunnel has been created or updated and appears on the IP Tunnel page.

Neighbors (ARP-NDP)

From this page, view the IPv4 and IPv6 ARP-NDP neighbors, create static neighbors and flush existing neighbors.

ARP-NDP

TCP/IP uses ARP (Address Resolution Protocol) protocol to translate an IPv4 address into a MAC address (physical network address). In other words, it maps layer 3 (IPv4 addresses) to layer 2 (physical or MAC addresses) to enable communications between hosts residing on the same subnet. Similarly to translate IPv6 addresses, NDP (Neighbor

Discovery Protocol) is used.

ARP is used by hosts that are directly connected on a local network and uses either or both unicast and broadcast transmissions directly to each other. The host finds the physical address of another host on its network by sending an ARP query packet that includes the IP address of the receiver. As a broadcast protocol, it can create excessive amounts of network traffic on your network. To minimize the broadcast traffic, an ARP cache is maintained to store and reuse previously learned ARP information.

NDP in IPv6 is similar to ARP in IPv4. The main purpose of both protocols is to enable a host (node) to determine the link layer address (MAC address) of the node it wants to communicate with, in the local network and to find out the link layer address of the router through which it can access a node in an external network. Thus, the actual exchange of messages can take place between the two nodes. Apart from neighbor discovery, NDP functionality includes router discovery, neighbor presence, redirects, network options (as in DHCP options) and stateless auto-configuration.

Similar to ARP, NDP is also susceptible to flooding and poisoning attacks.

NDP has neighbor solicitations analogous to ARP request and neighbor advertisements analogous to ARP replies.

Unsolicited neighbor advertisements in IPv6 correspond to gratuitous ARP replies in IPv4. Static neighbor configuration protects the neighbor cache from trusted or vulnerable nodes in the network. Static neighbor discovery helps -to prevent solicit requests for configured entries and ignores any incoming solicit or advertised ND for configured entries.

Neighbors

ARP and NDP traffic is a vital communication on a network and is enabled on the Device interfaces by default.

A static neighbor entry allows binding the MAC address to the designated IP address and port. Once the MAC address is bound to a port and IP address, the Device will not update its neighbor table dynamically and will not respond to that IP-MAC pair on any other port. It will also remove any dynamically cached references to that IP address that might be present, and will not allow additional static mappings of that IP address.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 156

These entries will be stored in the Static Neighbor Table, the IPv4 Neighbor Cache and the IPv6 Neighbor Cache.

The Device performs the neighbor lookup in the static neighbor table when it receives the request on a particular port.

If there is any mismatch in an IP address or MAC address, the Device considers it as a neighbor poisoning attempt and does not update its neighbor cache. If an entry is not available in the table, the Device will lookup in the IPv4 or

IPv6 neighbor cache and adds the MAC address to the neighbor cache if required.

Consider an example when IP1 is mapped to MAC1 and the IP1-MAC1 pair is bound to Port A. Similarly, IP2 is mapped to MAC1 and the IP2-MAC1 pair is bound to Port A

Table 1: Illustration for Neighbor Poisoning

IP Address

IP1

IP3

IP2

MAC Address

MAC1

MAC2

MAC1

Port

Any other port than A

No static ARP

Any other port than A

Neighbor Poisoning Attempt

Yes

Neighbors (ARP-NDP)

The device maintains three types of table for neighbor entries: Static Neighbor Table, IPv4 Neighbor Cache and IPv6

Neighbor Cache.

IPv4/IPv6 Neighbor Cache table

The IPv4/IPv6 neighbor cache table stores static and dynamic neighbor entries. Static neighbor entries are defined by administrators and are permanent while dynamic neighbor entries are learned entries and are updated dynamically.

Such dynamic entries can be flushed by clicking Flush.

Go to Configure > Network > Neighbors (ARP-NDP) and select IPv4 Neighbor Cache or IPv6 Neighbor Cache to view the large number of neighbor entries. This page allows navigating and managing the neighbor entries in all three tables. Select the table type from the drop-down list to view the neighbor entries in the respective table. It lists IP address, MAC address, interface and type of the entry. Entry type can be static or dynamic. If everything is working properly with the neighbor, the dynamic neighbor entry will be displayed as “Complete, Dynamic”.

“Complete, Dynamic” means both MAC and IP values are there in the table while “Incomplete, Dynamic” means that the neighbor request was sent but no reply has yet been received.

Neighbor Configuration

Neighbor cache entry timeout

Specify time interval after which the entries in the cache should be flushed.

Default: 2 minutes

Input range: 1 to 500 minutes

Flush the IPv4/IPv6 neighbor cache whenever the host IP address on the network changes. As the

IP address is linked to a physical address, it can change but can still be associated with the physical address in the IPv4/IPv6 Neighbor Cache. Flushing the IPv4/IPv6 Neighbor Cache allows new information to be gathered and stored in the IPv4/IPv6 Neighbor Cache.

Log Possible Neighbor Poisoning Attempts

Enable to log the poisoning attempts.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 157

Figure 121: Neighbor Configuration

Flushing Neighbor Table and Cache

The neighbors page displays a list of all the IP address-and-MAC address mappings and you can filter the list based on the IP address or the MAC address.

Select Static Neighbor Table or the required cache and click the Flush button to empty the cache or click Add to add a new entry.

Figure 122: Neighbors

Add Static Neighbor

1. Go to Configure > Network > Neighbors (ARP-NDP). In Show section select Static Neighbor Table and click

Add.

2. Specify the details.

IP Family

Select the IP Family for the static neighbor.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 158

Available Options:

• IPv4

• IPv6

IPv4/IPv6 Address

Specify a IPv4/IPv6 address of the host outside the firewall.

MAC Address

Specify a MAC address of the host.

Interface

Select the physical interface on which the binding is to be done.

Add as a Trusted MAC Address to prevent a spoofing attempt

On enabling this option, the IP-MAC pair is added to the Trusted MAC list. If disabled, the IP-MAC pair will not be included in the Trusted MAC list.

By default, this option is enabled.

Figure 123: Static Neighbor

3. Click Save.

The static neighbor is created and appears in the Static Neighbor Table on the Neighbors (ARP-NDP) page.

Dynamic DNS

This section allows you to configure Dynamic DNS settings for your device.

Dynamic DNS (Domain Name Service) is a method of keeping a static domain/host name linked to a dynamically assigned IP address allowing your server to be more easily accessible from various locations on the Internet.

Powered by Dynamic Domain Name System (DDNS), you can access your device by the domain name, not the dynamic IP address. DDNS will tie a domain name (for example, mydevice.com, or mycompany.mydevice.com) to your dynamic IP address.

The device supports the following Dynamic DNS providers:

1. DynDNS

2. ZoneEdit

3. EasyDNS

4. DynAccess

5. Sophos

The page displays a list of all the configured DDNS, along with their names, interfaces, service providers, the last updated IP, status and time as well as the reason for failure. In addition it provides the option to add, update or delete a configuration.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 159

Add Dynamic DNS

This page describes how to either add details of a third-party DDNS provider or to configure the device itself to act as a DDNS.

Dynamic DNS cannot be configured from Sophos Firewall Manager (SFM).

1. Go to Configure > Network > Dynamic DNS and click Add.

2. Specify the DDNS parameter details.

Note: For configuring a third-party service provider, you need a registered account with any of the supported Dynamic DNS service providers:

1. DynDNS

2. ZoneEdit

3. EasyDNS

4. DynAccess

5. Sophos

Hostname

Specify a name to identify the host that you want to use on the DDNS server. It is the domain name that you registered with your DDNS service provider, for example sophos.com.

In case you are configuring DynAccess as a service provider, provide the host name in the following format: <accountname>.dynaccess.com.

In case you are configuring Sophos as a service provider, provide the host name in the following format:

<host name>.myfirewall.co.

Note: You cannot add DDNS provider as <host>.ddns.cyberoam.com.

Interface

Select the external interface. The IP address of the selected interface will be bound to the specified hostname.

IPv4 Address

Select the IPv4 address source.

Available Options:

• Use Port IP: Select to use the IP address of the selected port or interface.

• NATed Public IP: Select to use the public IP address assigned to the selected port.

IP Edit Checking Interval

Specify the time interval after which the device should check and edit the IP address of your server, if changed.

Acceptable range: 4 - 60 minutes

Default: 20 minutes

For example, if the time interval is set to 10 minutes, after every 10 minutes, the device will check for any changes in your server IP address.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 160

Figure 124: Host Details

3. Specify the Service Provider’s Details.

Service Provider

Select the service provider with whom you have registered your hostname. In case you are configuring Sophos as a service provider, login name and password are not required.

Login Name

Specify your DDNS account’s username.

In case you are configuring DynAccess as a service provider, provide the host name in the following format: <accountname>.dynaccess.com.

Provide your login name as <accountname>.

Password

Specify your DDNS account’s password.

Figure 125: Service Provider Details

4. Click Save.

Note: You can configure multiple hosts having the same interface and service provider for Dynamic

DNS.

Authentication

The Authentication menu provides basic authentication settings for the device.

This menu covers the following topics:

•

Servers

on page 161: Manage external servers for authentication

•

: Define authentication servers for the administrators and end-users logging in through the device, VPN,

or the Captive Portal.

•

Groups

on page 178:Set up policies and assign them to a number of users

•

Users

on page 182: Manage user accounts for access to the device

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 161

•

One-Time Password

: Configure the one-time password (OTP) service.

•

Captive Portal

: Customize Captive Portal through which users can log in

•

Guest Users

on page 195: Manage users accessing the device without user account

•

Clientless Users

on page 201: Manage user accounts for clientless access

•

Guest User Settings

: Configure general parameters to provide secured Internet access for guest users

•

Client Downloads

on page 209: Download clients from different platforms to interact with the device

Servers

The Authentication Server menu allows the management of databases and backend servers for external user authentication services.

External user authentication enables you to validate user accounts against existing user databases or directory services on other servers of your network.

Authentication services currently supported are:

• Novell’s eDirectory

• Microsoft’s Active Directory

• RADIUS

• TACACS+

• LDAP

This page displays a list of all existing authentication servers. For each server the list shows:

Name

Displays the name of the authentication server.

Displays the IP address of the authentication server.

Port

Displays the port of the authentication server.

Type

Displays the type of the authentication server.

Domain/Admin

Displays the domain or admin of the authentication server.

Add External Server

This page describes the authentication servers to be added. It covers the following topics:

Active Directory

Active Directory (AD) is Microsoft’s implementation of a directory service and is a central component of Windows

2000/2003 servers. It stores information about a broad range of resources residing on a network, including users, groups, computers, printers, applications, services, and any type of user-defined objects. As such it provides the means of centrally organize, manage, and control access to these resources. The Active Directory authentication method allows you to register Sophos XG Firewall at a Windows domain, thus creating an object for Sophos

XG Firewall on the primary domain controller (DC). Sophos XG Firewall is then able to query user and group information from the domain.

Note: Sophos XG Firewall supports Active Directory 2003 and newer.

Add Active Directory Server

on page 164

LDAP

LDAP, an abbreviation for Lightweight Directory Access Protocol, is a networking protocol for querying and modifying directory services based on the X.500 standard. Sophos XG Firewall uses the LDAP protocol to

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 162 authenticate users for several of its services, allowing or denying access based on attributes or group memberships configured on the LDAP server.

Add LDAP Server

on page 162

RADIUS

RADIUS, the acronym of Remote Authentication Dial In User Service, is a widespread protocol for allowing network devices such as routers to authenticate users against a central database. In addition to user information,

RADIUS can store technical information used by network devices, such as supported protocols, IP addresses, routing information, and so on. This information constitutes a user profile, which is stored in a file or database on the RADIUS server. The RADIUS protocol is very flexible, and servers are available for most operating systems.

The RADIUS implementation on Sophos XG Firewall allows you to configure access rights on the basis of proxies and users. Before you can use RADIUS authentication, you must have a running RADIUS server on the network.

Whereas passwords are encrypted using the RADIUS secret, the username is transmitted in plain text.

Add RADIUS Server

on page 167

TACACS+

TACACS+, the acronym of Terminal Access Controller Access Control System, is a proprietary protocol by Cisco

Systems, Inc. and provides detailed accounting information and administrative control over authentication and authorization processes. Whereas RADIUS combines authentication and authorization in a user profile, TACACS

+ separates these operations. Another difference is that TACACS+ utilizes the TCP protocol (port 49) while

RADIUSClosed uses the UDPClosed protocol.

Add TACACS+ Server

on page 168

eDirectory

Novell eDirectory is an X.500 compatible directory service for centrally managing access to resources on multiple servers and computers within a given network. eDirectory is a hierarchical, object-oriented database that represents all the assets in an organization in a logical tree. Those assets can include people, servers, workstations, applications, printers, services, groups, and so on.

Add eDirectory Server

on page 169

Add LDAP Server

This page describes how to add a LDAP server.

1. Go to Configure > Authentication > Servers and click Add.

2. As Server Type, select LDAP Server.

3. Specify the LDAP server details:

Server Name

Specify a descriptive name for the LDAP server.

Server IP/Domain

Specify an IP address or domain for the LDAP server.

Port

Specify the port of the LDAP server.

Default: 389

Version

Select the version of the LDAP server.

Default: 3

Anonymous Login

Enable to send anonymous requests to the LDAP server.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 163

Disable to bind user with the server.

Username (not available if Anonymous Login is selected)

Enter user name. The username must be specified as a full distinguished name (DN) in LDAP notation, using commas as delimiters (e.g., uid=root,cn=user).

Password (not available if Anonymous Login is selected)

Specify a password for the user.

Connection Security

Select the connection security for the LDAP server:

• Simple: User credentials will be send unencrypted, as plaintext. This connection security is selected by default.

• SSL: Secure Sockets Layer. This is the most common method used for secured connection. The

Port will then change from 389 (LDAPClosed) to 636 (ldaps = LDAP over SSL).

• TLS: Transport Layer Security. Same secure connection as SSL but uses the default port.

Validate Server Certificate (not available for Simple connection security)

Enable to validate the certificate on the external server.

Client Certificate (not available for Simple connection security)

Select a client certificate from the list to establish a secured connection. If you do not want a client certificate, select None.

Default: ApplianceCertificate

Note: You can manage client certificates under Protect > Web Server >

Certificates.

Base DN

Enter the Base DN for the LDAP server. The Base DN is the starting point relative to the root of the

LDAP tree where the users are included who are to be authenticated. Note that the Base DN must be specified by the Fully Distinguished Name (FDN) in LDAP notation, using commas as delimiters

(e.g., O=Example,OU=RnD).

Get Base DN

Click Get Base DN if you are not aware about the Base DN. The Base DN is automatically retrieved from the directory.

Authentication Attribute

Specify an authentication attribute for searching the LDAP directory. The user authentication attribute contains the actual login name each user is prompted for, for example by remote access services.

Display Name Attribute

Specify the name for the LDAP server which is displayed as LDAP username.

Email Address Attribute

Specify the alias for the configured email address which is displayed to the user.

Group Name Attribute

Specify the alias for the configured group name which is displayed to the user.

Expiry Date Attribute

Specify the user expiry date displayed to the user. The attribute specifies how long a user account is valid.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 164

Figure 126: Add LDAP Server

4. Click Test Connection to check the connectivity between LDAP and Sophos XG Firewall. It also validates the

LDAP server user credentials.

5. Click Save.

Add Active Directory Server

This page describes how to add an Active Directory server.

Active Directory allows the device to map the users and groups from ADS for the purpose of authentication on a

Windows platform.

1. Go to Configure > Authentication > Servers and click Add.

2. As Server Type, select Active Directory.

Note: If a user is required to authenticate using AD, the device needs to communicate with the AD server for authentication.

3. Specify the Active Directory server details.

Server Name

Enter a unique name for the Active Directory server.

Server IP

Specify an IP address for the Active Directory server.

Port

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 165

Specify the port of the Active Directory server.

Default: port 389.

NetBIOS Domain

Specify a NetBIOS domain for the Active Directory server.

ADS Username

Specify a username for the admin user of the Active Directory server.

Password

Specify a password for the admin user of the Active Directory server.

Connection Security

Select the type of security to be implemented on the established connection.

It provides a method to login to the external server by sending the username and password in encrypted format instead of plaintext.

• Simple: User credentials will be send unencrypted as plaintext.

• SSL: Secure Sockets Layer. This is the most common method used for secured connection. The

Port will then change from 389 (LDAPClosed) to 636 (ldaps = LDAP over SSL).

• TLS: Transport Layer Security. Same secure connection as SSL but uses the default port.

Note: We strongly recommend using the encryption method to protect the user credentials.

Validate Server Certificate (not available for Simple connection security)

Enable to validate the certificate on the external server.

Display Name Attribute

Specify the name for the AD server which is displayed as AD username.

Email Address Attribute

Specify the alias for the configured email address which is displayed to the user.

Domain Name

Specify the domain name for which the query is to be added.

Search Queries

Click Add to enter the search query. Use the Move Up and Move Downbuttons to rearrange the search queries in the list. Use Remove to remove the selected item.

Note: If you do not know the search DN, refer to

NetBIOS name, FQDN and Search

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 166

Figure 127: Add Active Directory Server

4. Click Test Connection to check the connectivity between the Active Directory server and Sophos XG Firewall. It also validates the Active Directory server user credentials.

5. Click Save.

NetBIOS Name, FQDN and Search DN

This page describes how a Search DN is built.

The settings have to be performed on an AD (Windows) server.

1. Go to Start > All Programs > Administrative Tools > Active Directory Users and Computers.

2. Right-click the required domain and go to the Properties tab.

Search DN is based on the FQDN. For example, if the FQDN is “google.com”, then the Search DN will be

DC=google, DC=com.

Figure 128: Search Query

Import AD User Group

This page describes how to import Active Directory groups from the Windows platform into the device.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 167

Go to Configure > Authentication > Servers and click against the AD server from which AD groups are to be imported.

The Import Group Wizard Help appears.

2. Specify a Base DN. Appliance fetches AD groups or OU groups from the specified Base DN.

3. Select the AD groups or OU groups to be imported in the appliance. Hold downCtrl to select multiple groups. The appliance already available in the device will not be imported.

4. Select various policies (surfing quota, traffic shaping, web filter, application filter, network traffic and SSL VPN) and user authentication timeout group members. Selected policies are attached to all imported groups. If you want to specify different policies for different groups, do not enable the policy. For example if you want to specify different Internet policies to filter policies to different groups, do not enable Attach to all the Groups.

5. If you do not want to apply common policies which are valid for all groups, specify policies to be applied to each group individually.

If groups are imported successfully, a “successful” message will be displayed; else the appropriate error message will be displayed. This message remains even if you close the wizard.

6. Click Close to end the wizard.

If a user is member of multiple AD groups, then the policies are applied to the first group the user is member of.

Therefore, the device browses through the group ordered list from top to bottom to determine the user’s group membership. The first group that matches is considered the group of the user and that group policies are applied to the user.

Using the wizard, you can reorder the groups to change the membership preference.

Add RADIUS Server

This page describes how to add a RADIUS server.

1. Go to Configure > Authentication > Servers and click Add.

2. As Server Type, select RADIUS Server.

3. Specify the RADIUS server details:

Server Name

Specify a descriptive name for the RADIUS server.

Server IP

Specify an IP address for the RADIUS server.

Authentication Port

Specify the authentication port of the RADIUS server.

By default, this is port 1812.

Enable Accounting

Enable accounting on the RADIUS server.

Sophos XG Firewall sends the following information to the RADIUS server as soon as the user logs in:

• Accounting start request

• User login time

Sophos XG Firewall sends the following information to the RADIUS server the moment the user logs out:

• Accounting stop request

• User logout time

Note: Supported client types: Windows client, HTTP client, Linux client, Android, iOS, iOS HTTP client, Android HTTP client, API client.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 168

Note: The accounting stop message is not sent to the RADIUS server when Sophos

XG Firewall shuts down or reboots.

Accounting Port (available only if Enable Accounting is active)

Specify a RADIUS port number through which Sophos XG Firewall can communicate with the

RADIUS server.

Shared Secret

Specify the shared secret which is a text string that serves as a password between a RADIUS client and a RADIUS server.

Group Name Attribute

Specify the alias for the configured group name which is displayed to the user.

Figure 129: Add RADIUS Server

4. Click Test Connection to check the connectivity between the RADIUS server and Sophos XG Firewall. It also validates the RADIUS server user credentials.

5. Click Save.

Add TACACS+ Server

This page describes how to add a TACACS+ server.

1. Go to Configure > Authentication > Serversand click Add.

2. As Server Type, select TACACS+ Server.

3. Specify the TACACS+ server details:

Server Name

Specify a descriptive name for the TACACS+ server.

Server IPv4

Specify an IP address for the TACACS+ server.

Port

Specify the port of the TACACS+ server.

By default, this is port 49.

Shared Secret

Specify the shared secret which is a text string that serves as a password between a TACACS+ client and a TACACS+ server.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 169

Figure 130: Add TACACS+ Server

4. Click Test Connection to check the connectivity between the TACACS+ server and Sophos XG Firewall. It also validates the TACACS+ server user credentials.

5. Click Save.

Add eDirectory Server

This page describes how to add an eDirectory server.

1. Go to Configure > Authentication > Serversand click Add.

2. As Server Type, select eDirectory.

3. Specify the eDirectory server details:

Server Name

Specify a descriptive name for the eDirectory server.

Server IP/Domain

Specify an IP address or domain for the eDirectory server.

Port

Specify the port of the eDirectory server.

By default, this is port 389.

Username

Specify a username for the eDirectory server.

Password

Specify a password for the eDirecory server.

Connection Security

Select the connection security for the eDirectory server:

• Simple: User credentials will be send unencrypted as plaintext.

• SSL: Secure Sockets Layer. This is the most common method used for secured connection. The

Port will then change from 389 (LDAPClosed) to 636 (ldaps = LDAP over SSL).

• TLS: Transport Layer Security. Same secure connection as SSL but uses the default port.

Base DN

Specify the Base DN for the eDirectory server. The Base DN is the starting point relative to the root of the eDirectory tree where the users are included who are to be authenticated. Note that the Base

DN must be specified by the full distinguished name (DN) in LDAP notation, using commas as delimiters (e.g., O=Example,OU=RnD).

Get Base DN

Click Get Base DN if you are not aware about the Base DN. The Base DN is automatically retrieved from the directory.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 170

Figure 131: Add eDirectory Server

4. Click Test Connection to check the connectivity between the eDirectory server and Sophos XG Firewall. It also validates the eDirectory server user credentials.

5. Click Save.

Services

This page allows you to configure authentication for firewall, VPN and admin traffic.

You can also configure global settings, NTLM settings, web client settings, Captive Portal parameters and Radius client settings for Single Sign-On server.

Note: You can also view and manage the authentication status on the Monitor & Analyze > Diagnostics >

Services page.

Once you have deployed the device, the default access policy is automatically applied which will allow complete network traffic to pass through the device. This will allow you to monitor user activity in your network based on the default policy.

As device monitors and logs user activity based on the IP address, all the reports are also generated based on the IP address. To monitor and log user activities based on usernames or logon names, you have to configure the device for integrating user information and authentication process. Integration will identify access requests based on usernames and generate reports based on usernames.

When the user attempts to access, the device requests a user name and password and authenticates the user’s credentials before giving access. User level authentication can be performed using the local user database on the device, external ADS server, LDAP, RADIUS or TACACS+ server.

To set up the user database

1. Integrate ADS, LDAP, RADIUS or TACACS+ if external authentication is required.

2. Configure for local authentication.

3. Register user

The device provides policy-based filtering that allows defining individual filtering plans for various users of your organization. You can assign individual policies to users, or a single policy to a number of users (group).

The device detects users as they log on to a Windows domain in your network via client machines. Users are allowed or denied access based on username and password. In order to authenticate a user, you must select at least one database against which the device should authenticate users.

To filter the Internet requests based on policies assigned, the device must be able to identify a user making a request.

You can configure Administrator, Firewall, VPN, and SSL VPN authentication through one or more servers.

This section covers the following topics:

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 171

Firewall Authentication Methods

Authentication Server List

Select an authentication server.

Authentication Server List displays all the configured servers while Selected Authentication

Server List displays servers that will be used for authentication when the user tries to login.

In case of multiple servers, the authentication request is forwarded as per the order configured in the

Selected Authentication Server list.

Default Group

Select the default group for firewall authentication.

Figure 132: Firewall Authentication Methods

VPN (IPsec/L2TP/PPTP) Authentication Methods

Set Authentication Methods Same As Firewall

Enable to use the same authentication method as configured for the firewall traffic. If enabled all the authentication servers configured for the firewall traffic will be available for VPN traffic authentication configuration.

Authentication Server List displays all the configured servers while Selected Authentication

Server list displays servers that will be used for authentication when user tries to login.

Override the authentication method for VPN traffic by selecting or deselecting any authentication server.

In case of multiple servers, the authentication request will be forwarded as per the order configured in the Selected Authentication Server list.

If RADIUS server authenticates users then PPTP and L2TP connections established using

MSCHAPv2 or CHAP protocol can be authenticated through RADIUS.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 172

Figure 133: VPN (IPsec/L2TP/PPTP) Authentication Methods

Administrator Authentication Methods

You can configure and manage authentication settings for all administrator users except for the super administrator.

Set Authentication Methods Same As Firewall

Select to use the same authentication method as configured for firewall traffic. If enabled all the authentication servers configured for the firewall traffic will be available for administrator traffic authentication configuration.

Authentication Server List displays all the configured servers while Selected Authentication

Server list displays servers that will be used for authentication when user tries to login.

Override the authentication method for administrator traffic by selecting or deselecting any authentication server.

In case of multiple servers, the authentication request will be forwarded as per the order configured in the Selected Authentication Server list.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 173

Figure 134: Administrator Authentication Methods

SSL VPN Authentication Methods

Same as VPN

Enable to use the same authentication method as configured for VPN traffic.

Same as Firewall

Enable to use the same authentication method as configured for the firewall traffic

Set Authentication Method for SSL VPN

Enable to configure the authentication server for SSL VPN.

Authentication Server List displays all the configured servers while Selected Authentication

Server list displays servers that will be used for authentication when user tries to login.

Override the authentication method for SSL VPN traffic by selecting or deselecting any authentication server.

In case of multiple servers, the authentication request will be forwarded as per the order configured in the Selected Authentication Server list.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 174

Figure 135: SSL VPN Authentication Methods

Global Settings

Maximum Session Timeout

Specify the timeout duration in minutes.

Maximum Session Timeout is the time in minutes a user is logged into the device. Exceeding the period, the user will be logged out automatically and the user must re-authenticate. This is applicable to administrative sessions only.

Acceptable range: 3 to 1440 minutes

Enable Unlimited to allow the users to remain logged in.

Simultaneous Logins

Specify the maximum number of concurrent logins allowed to the user.

Acceptable range: 1 to 99 concurrent logins

Alternatively, enable Unlimited to allow unlimited concurrent logins to the user.

Note: Login restriction is applicable only to those users who are added after this configuration.

Figure 136: Global Settings

NTLM Settings

Inactivity Time

Specify the inactivity time in minutes.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 175

The user inactivity timeout is the inactive/idle time in minutes after which the user will be logged out and has to re-authenticate.

Acceptable range: 6 to 1440 minutes

Default: 6 minutes

Data Transfer Threshold

Specify the minimum data to be transferred.

If the minimum data is not transferred within the specified time, the user will be marked as inactive.

Default: 1024 bytes

HTTP challenge redirect on Intranet Zone

Enabled: When a site hosted on the Internet initiates the NTLM web proxy challenge for authentication, the device redirects NTLM authentication challenge to the Intranet zone. The client is transparently authenticated through the device’s local interface IP and credentials are exchanged only in the Intranet zone. User credentials remain protected.

Disabled: The client is transparently authenticated by the browser through the device by sending user credentials over the Internet.

Default: Enabled

Figure 137: NTLM Settings

Web Client Settings (iOS and Android and API)

Inactivity Time

Specify the inactivity time in minutes.

The user inactivity timeout is the inactive/idle time in minutes after which the user will be logged out and has to re-authenticate.

Acceptable range: 6 to 1440 minutes

Default: 6 minutes

Data transfer threshold

Specify the minimum data to be transferred.

If the minimum data is not transferred within the specified time, the user will be marked as inactive.

Default: 1024 bytes

Figure 138: Web Client Settings

SSO using RADIUS accounting request

Device can authenticate users transparently who have already authenticated on an external RADIUS server.

RADIUS Client IPv4

Specify the IPv4 address of the RADIUS client.

Only requests from the specified IP address will be considered for SSO.

Shared Secret

Provide shared secret for authentication.

Show Shared Secret

Click Show to view the configured shared secret.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 176

Figure 139: SSO using radius accounting request

Web Policy Actions for Unauthenticated Users (Captive Portal)

Prompt unauthenticated users to login

Select Yes to redirect the access request of unauthenticated users either to the Captive Portal or

Custom Message page.

Select No to drop unauthenticated user traffic. Unauthenticated users will not be redirected to the

Captive Portal or the Custom Message page.

Login prompt method

Configure where the unauthenticated user access requests should be redirected to.

Available Options:

• Include link to the Captive Portal in the User Notification message

• Display a custom message

Select Include link to the Captive Portal in the User Notification message, if an unauthenticated user access request is to be forwarded to the Captive Portal page.

Captive Portal uses HTTPS

If enabled, the user gets access to the Captive

Portal page through secure channel.

Default: Enabled

Provide link to full User Portal

Redirect to a URL after login

URL to redirect

Preserve captive portal after login

Use keep alive to maintain user session

If enabled, the User Portal link is available on the Captive Portal page.

Default: Enabled

If enabled, the user gets redirected to the user requested page or custom page.

If request is to be redirected to the custom page, click Custom URL and specify the URL, else click User requested URL.

Select Yes to minimize the Captive Portal popup, once the user is successfully authenticated.

Selecting No lets the Captive Portal to be displayed on system screen after successful authentication.

Disable to logout the user after the configured inactivity time. If disabled, specify User

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 177

Inactivity Timeout and Data Transfer

Threshold.

The keep alive request is constantly exchanged between the device and user to check whether the user has logged out or is idle. If the device does not receive a response, the user is logged out automatically.

The more concurrent HTTP Captive Portal users there are, the more keep-alive requests are exchanged. In case of multiple concurrent HTTP

Captive Portal users we recommend to disable this option.

Default: Enabled

• User Inactivity Timeout

User Inactivity timeout is the inactive/idle time in minutes after which user will be logged out and has to re-authenticate. Enable and specify timeout duration in minutes.

Acceptable range: 3 to 1440 minutes

Alternatively, select the checkbox Unlimited to keep the user logged in.

Default: Disabled

• Data Transfer Threshold

Specify a threshold value in bytes for the data transfer. If the minimum data is not transferred within the specified time, the user will be marked as inactive.

Select Display a custom message, if unauthenticated user is to be displayed custom message.

Page Header Image

Select Default to display the default image shipped with the device at the top of the custom message page, or select Custom to browse and upload a customized image.

Supported image format: JPG, PNG or GIF

Size: 700 X 80 pixels

Page Footer Image

Select Default to display the default image shipped with the device at the bottom of the custom message page, or select Custom to browse and upload a customized image.

Supported image format: JPG, PNG or GIF

Size: 700 X 80 pixels

Custom Message

Specify a message. You can customize the message to include the client IP address, category, and

URL.

Blink Custom Message

Preview

Enable this option to display a blinking message.

Preview and check how the message will be displayed before saving the configuration.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 178

Figure 140: Captive Portal Settings

Groups

The Groups page displays a list of all the default and custom groups.

A group is a collection of users having common policies that can be managed as a single unit thus providing the possibility to assign various policies to a number of users in one operation/step. Users that belong to a particular group are referred to as group users.

A group can contain default as well as custom policies.

Various policies that can be grouped are:

• Surfing quota policy which specifies the duration of surfing time and the period of subscription

• Access time policy which specifies the time period during which the user will be allowed access

• Network traffic policy which specifies the time allocated to cyclic/non-cyclic network traffic

• Traffic shaping policy which specifies the bandwith allocated for upload and download traffic

• Remote access policy which controls the access of remote clients

• Clientless policy which controls the access of clientless users

Creating a New User Group

This page describes how to configure a user group.

Once the appropriate group is assigned, the user will automatically inherit all the policies added to the group.

1. Go to Configure > Authentication > Groups and click Add.

2. Specify the user group details.

Group Name

Enter a unique name for the group.

Description

Specify a description for the group.

Group Type

Select the group type.

Available Options:

• Normal - The user of this group needs to log on using the client device to access the Internet.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 179

• Clientless - The user of this group does not need to log on using the client device to access the

Internet and is symbolically represented by “group name (C)”. Access control is performed through the IP address.

Figure 141: User Group Details

3. Specify the Policies.

Surfing Quota

Select the surfing quota policy from the list.

Note: For the group type Clientless, the option Unlimited is automatically applied.

Access Time

Select the access time policy from the list.

Note: For the group type Clientless, the option Unlimited is automatically applied.

Network Traffic (not available for the Clientless group)

Select the network taffic policy from the list.

Configured policy will be applicable to all the users who are member of this group.

Traffic Shaping

Select the traffic shaping policy from the list.

Configured policy will be applicable to all the users who are member of this group.

Remote Access

By default, the user will inherit his group’s policy. To override the group policy, select a policy from the list.

You can also create a new policy directly on this page or from VPN > SSL VPN (Remote

Access) > VPN > SSL VPN (Remote Access) page.

If a user shall not be provided SSL VPN access then select No Policy Applied.

Clientless

By default, the user will inherit his group’s policy. To override the group policy, select the policy from the list.

You can also create a new policy directly on this page or from VPN > Clientless Access > VPN >

Clientless Access page.

If a user shall not be provided SSL VPN access then select No Policy Applied.

Quarantine Digest

Configure quarantine digest.

Quarantine digest is an email containing a list of quarantined spam messages filtered by the device and held in the user quarantine area. If configured, the device will mail the digest on hourly, daily

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 180 or weekly basis to the user. Digest also provides a link to the User Portal from where the user can access and take an action on quarantined messages.

Available Options:

• Enable - The user will receive the quarantine digest at the configured frequency. This setting overrides the group setting.

• Disable - The user will not receive quarantine digest. This setting overrides the group setting.

Note: Quarantine digest is not applicable to Wi-Fi devices.

MAC Binding

Enable to bind the user to a MAC address. By binding a user to a MAC address, you are mapping the user with a group of MAC addresses.

L2TP (not available for the Clientless group)

Enable to grant group members access through an L2TP connection.

PPTP (not available for the Clientless group)

Enable to grant group members access through an PPTP connection.

Select the appropriate option to specify the login restriction for the group.

Available Options:

• Any Node - Select to allow a user to login from any of the nodes in the network.

• Selected Nodes - Select to restrict user login to the specified nodes. Specify an IP address. For an existing group, you can add further nodes, edit a node or remove a node.

• Node Range - Select to allow the user to login from a range of IP address. Specify the IP address range.

For the options Selected Nodes and Node Range, only IPv4 addresses are permitted.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 181

Figure 142: Policies

4. Click Save.

Note: User configuration - MAC binding and policies is given precedence over the group configuration.

Adding Users to the Existing Groups

This page describes how to add a user to an existing group.

1. Go to Configure > Authentication > Groups

Select the group to which you want to add the users by clicking the respective icon in the Manage column.

3. Click Add Member(s).

A pop-up window Add Group Member appears providing a list of all the users who can be added to the group along with some details. To search for a user filter the list based on the name and/or the current group.

4. Select the user you want to add to the group. You can select a single user or multiple users on the same page.

5. Click Add to confirm adding the member to the group.

6. Click Save.

The user is added to the group. You can check this by editing the group and clicking the Show Group Members button.

Viewing List of Group Members

This page describes how to check a user’s membership in a group.

1. Go to Configure > Authentication > Groups.

Select the group for which you want view the group members and click the edit icon in the Manage column.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 182

3. Click Show Group Member(s).

A pop-up Group Members appears providing the list of all the users who are member of the selected group along with their usernames.

4. Click Close to close the Group Members pop-up window.

Users

The Users page displays the list of all users added in the device.

Users are identified by an IP address or a username and are assigned to a user group. All the users in a group inherit the policies defined for that group.

User Types

The device supports the following types of users:

• Normal

• Clientless

• Single Sign-On

• Thin Client user

• WWAN user

A normal user has to log in into the device which requires a client (client.exe) on the user machine, or the user can use a HTTP client component and all the policy-based restrictions are applied.

A clientless user does not require a client component (client.exe) on the user machine.

If Single Sign-On settings are configured, users are automatically logged to the device.

Thin client users do not need to have a client installed on the user machine.

WWAN users can log on via WLAN.

Use the given decision matrix below to choose which type of the user should be created.

Table 2: Decision matrix for adding a user

Feature Normal User

User login required

Type of Group

Normal

Clientless

Yes

Apply login restriction Yes

Apply Surfing Quota policy Yes

Apply Access Time policy Yes

Apply Traffic Shaping policy

Yes

Apply Web Filter Policy

Apply Application Group policy

Yes

Apply Network Traffic policy

Yes

Clientless User

Yes

Single Sign On User

Yes

The page displays a list of all the available users along their user IDs, names and usernames, user types, profiles, group memberships, and their activity status.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 183

Note: You can also view and manage live users on the Monitor & Analyze > Current Activities > Monitor

& Analyze > Current Activities > Live Users page.

Registering a New User

This page describes how to create a new user and quickly configure a related policy.

Once a user is registered successfully, the page provides two more options:

•

- Click to view the Internet usage and data transfer usage for that user.

- Click to reset Internet usage time and data transfer of the user.

•

View Usage

1. Go to Configure > Authentication > Usersand click Add.

2. Specify the user details.

Username

Enter a unique username for the user.

Name

Enter a name for the user.

Description

Specify a description for the user.

Password

Specify a password and re-enter the same password for confirmation.

The password is case-sensitive.

User Type

Select the type of user from the available options.

Available options:

• User

• Administrator

Profile (available only if Uuser Type selected is Administrator)

Select the administrator profile. The administrator will get access to various Admin Console menus as per the configured profile.

You can create a new profile directly from this page or from the System > Profiles > Device Access page after clicking Add.

Email

Enter a email address of the user.

Use comma to seperate multiple email addresses.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 184

Figure 143: Add User

3. Specify the Policies details.

Group

Select a group in which the user is to be added. User will inherit all the policies assigned to the group.

Surfing Quota

By default, the user will inherit its group policy. To override the group policy, select the policy from the list.

You can also create a new policy directly from this page or from the Protect > Web > Surfing

Quotas page.

Access Time

By default, the user will inherit its group policy. To override the group policy, select the policy from the list.

You can also create a new policy directly from this page or from the System > Profiles > Access

Time page.

Network Traffic

By default, the user will inherit its group policy. To override the group policy, select the policy from the list.

You can also create a new policy directly from this page or from the System > Profiles > Network

Traffic Quota page.

Traffic Shaping

By default, user will inherit its group policy. To override the group policy, select the policy from the list.

You can also create a new policy directly from this page or from the System > Profiles > Traffic

Shaping page.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 185

Figure 144: Policies

4. Specify the SSL VPN Policy details.

Remote Access

By default, the user will inherit its group policy. To override the group policy, select a policy from the list.

You can also create a new policy directly from this page or from the Configure > VPN > SSL VPN

(Remote Access) page.

If the user is not to be provided SSL VPN access then select No Policy Applied.

Clientless

By default, the user will inherit its group policy. To override the group policy, select a policy from the list.

You can also create a new policy directly from this page or from the Configure > VPN > Clientless

Access page.

If the user is not to be provided clientless access then select No Policy Applied.

L2TP

By default, the user is provided remote access through L2TP. Disable if remote access is not to be provided to the user.

If enabled, provide the IP address (IPv4/IPv6) to be leased to the user for L2TP access.

PPTP

By default, the user is provided remote access through PPTP. Disable if remote access is not to be provided to the user.

If enabled, provide the IP address (IPv4/IPv6) to be leased to the user for PPTP access.

CISCO

™

VPN Client

By default, the user is provided remote access through CISCO VPN client. Disable if remote access is not to be provided to the user.

If enabled, provide the IP address (IPv4/IPv6) to be leased to the user for CISCO VPN access.

Note: To use this feature, CISCO ™

VPN client needs to be configured from the

Configure > VPN > Cisco VPN Client page.

Quarantine Digest

Configure the quarantine digest.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 186 configured frequency. Digest also provides a link to the User Portal from where the user can access and take an action on quarantined messages.

Available options:

• Enable - The user will receive the quarantine digest daily. This option overrides the group setting.

• Disable - User will not receive quarantine digests. This option overrides the group setting.

Note: This feature is only available for non-wifi devices.

Simultaneous Logins

Specify the number of concurrent logins that will be allowed for the user or click Unlimited for allowing unlimited concurrent logins.

Acceptable range: 1 to 99

Default: 1

Note: The specified setting will override the global setting specified in the client preferences.

MAC Binding

Enable/disable MAC Binding. By binding the user to a MAC address, you are mapping the user with a group of MAC addresses.

If enabled, specify MAC addresses for example 01:23:45:67:89:AB.

Once you enable MAC binding, the user will only be able to login through pre-specified machines.

Use a comma to seperate multiple MAC addresses. For example 01:23:45:67:89:AB,

01:23:45:67:89:AC.

Login Restrictions

Select the appropriate option to specify the login restriction for the user.

Available options:

• Any Node - User will be able to login from any of the nodes in the network.

• User Group Node(s) - User will be able to login only from the nodes assigned to his group.

• Selected Nodes (only available for IPv4) - User will be able to login from the specified nodes only.

•

Node Range (only available for IPv4) - User will be able to login from any of the IP addresses from the configured range.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 187

Figure 145: SSL VPN Policy

5. Select Administrator Advanced Settings (available only if the user type is Administrator)

Schedule for Device Access

Schedule the device access.

The administrator will be able to access the device only during the time configured in the schedule.

Login Restriction for Device Access

Select the appropriate option to specify the login restriction for the user.

Available options:

• Any Node - Administrator will be able to login from any of the nodes in the network.

• Selected Nodes - Administrator will only be able to login from the specified nodes.

• Node Range - Administrator will be able to login from any of the IP addresses from the configured range.

Reset User Accounting (available only when editing a user)

Click to reset the Internet usage time and network traffic of the user.

View Usage (available only when editing a user)

Click to view the Internet usage and data transfer usage.

Note: User configuration is given precendence over group configuration.

Figure 146: Administrator Advanced Settings

6. Click Save.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 188

Reset User Accounting

This option allows you to reset the Internet usage time and data transfer of the user.

Edit the user account of the user whose data accounting you want to reset by clicking the icon in the Manage column.

2. Click Reset User Accounting and OK to confirm.

Note: You cannot reset user accounting for the live user.

View Usage

This page describes how to view the Internet usage and data transfer usage of users.

1. Go to Configure > Authentication > Users.

Edit the user account of the user whose data usage you want to view by clicking the icon in the Manage column.

3. Click View Usage.

A pop-up window displays policy information such as time allotted, renewal of the surfing quota cycle, the data transfer cycle and the spent Internet usage time. In addition it provides facts on the network traffic.

4. Select the month for which you want to display the usage information.

5. Click OK to return to the parent page.

Importing User Information

The Import Users page allows you to add new users by importing user details from the file.

Instead of creating users again in the device, if you already have users detail in a csv file, you can upload the csv file.

1. Go to Configure > Authentication > Users and click Import to import the csv file.

2. Browse to include the complete path for migrating user’s information file.

3. Please consider the csv file format requirements:

• Header (first) row should contain field names. Format of header row:

• Compulsory field: username

• Optional fields: password, name, group, email address

• Fields can be configured in any order.

• Subsequent rows should contain values corresponding to each field in the header row.

• Number of fields in each row should be same as in the header row.

• An error will be displayed if data is not provided for any field specified in the header.

• Blank rows will be ignored.

• If no password field is included in the header row then it will be set the same as the username.

• If no group name is included in the header row, the administrator will not be able to configure a group at the time of migration.

4. Click Upload to import the file.

Exporting Users

This menu allows you to export user information.

1. Go to Configure > Authentication > Users and click Export to export the user details in a csv file.

A pop-up window appears displaying the name of the csv file you are going to export.

2. Select to open or save the file.

3. Click OK.

The csv file is generated with the following headers: Name, Username, Enc_password, Email Address, and Group.

Note: Backend users, that means users who are authenticated against a backend authentication service like

Active Directory, will not be exported.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 189

Purging Active Directory Users

This page allows you to purge AD Users.

1. Go to Configure > Authentication > Users and click Purge AD Users to synchronize the device’s Active

Directory users with an external Active Directory server.

Note: The purge operation will not interrupt user login/logout and accounting events. If HA is configured, user details are deleted from both, the primary device and the auxiliary device.

2. Click OK to confirm the message.

Change Status

1. Go to Configure > Authentication > Users.

2. Select a user whose status is to be changed and click Change Status to change the status of that user.

If the current status is Enabled, the status of the user will change to Disabled when you click this button and viceversa.

One-Time Password

On this page, you can configure the one-time password (OTP) service, and you can monitor or edit the tokens of the one-time-password users.

One-time passwords are a method to improve security for password-based authentication. The user-specific password, which is sometimes too weak, will be amended with a one-time password that is valid for only one login. Thus, even if an attacker gets hold of it, he will not be able to log in with it.

One-time passwords generally change consistently, in regular intervals, being calculated automatically by a specific algorithm. Soon after a new password is calculated, the old password expires automatically. To calculate one-time passwords, the user needs to have either a mobile device with an appropriate software, or a special hardware or security token. Hardware tokens are ready to use from the start. On the mobile device, the end user needs to install

Sophos Authenticator or a similar software and deploy the configuration, which is available in the User Portal as a QR code, on the start page or on the OTP Token page (see User Portal page). Having done that, the device calculates onetime passwords in token-specific intervals. It is important that date and time are correct on the mobile device as the time stamp is used for one-time password generation.

Note: To authenticate on the facilities where the one-time password ist required, the user has to enter his user-specific device password, directly followed by the one-time password.

The administrator can also generate one-time passwords, also known as passcodes, manually. In this case, you have to ensure that these not time-limited one-time passwords are safely transmitted to the end user. This process, however, should only be considered as a temporary solution, for example when a user temporarily has no access to his or her password calculating device.

The page displays all existing one-time passwords. You can add , update or delete an OTP. For each OTP, the list shows:

Username

Displays the user name of the OTP owner.

Status

Displays the status of the OTP.

Secret

Displays the 32-hex secret of the OTP.

Related information

Create OTP Token Automatically for Two-Factor Authentication

Add OTP Token

This page enables you to add and edit one-time password tokens.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 190

1. Go to Configure > Authentication > One-Time Password and click the Add button.

2. Specify the following details for adding an OTP token:

Secret

This is the shared secret of the user’s hardware token or soft token. A hardware token has an unchangeable secret, given by the hardware producer. The soft token is created randomly by Sophos

XG Firewall, when Auto-create OTP tokens for users is enabled. The secret should have a hexadecimal format and consist of at least 32 characters.

User (optional)

Select the user to whom the token should be assigned.

Description (optional)

Add a description or other information. This text will be displayed for the administrator with the QR code. If you define different tokens for one person, e.g., a hardware token and a soft token for the mobile phone, it is useful to enter some explanation here as the user will be displayed all QR codes side by side.

Use custom token timestep

If you need another timestep for a token than the default token timestep defined in the OTP Settings section, enable this toggle switch and enter the value. The timestep defined here has to correspond with the timestep of the user’s password generation device, otherwise authentication fails.

Timestep

Enter the value for the additional timestep.

Acceptable range: 10 - 300 seconds.

Additional Codes (Available only when editing OTP token)

You can add one-time passwords manually for a token. Click the Plus icon to generate the one-time passwords (10 at maximum). These one-time passwords are not time-limited. A one-time password will be deleted automatically when the user logged in with it.

Figure 147: Add OTP Token

3. Click Save.

The OTP token for the specific user has been created and appears in the one-time password list on the One-time

Password page.

Configure One-time Password

This page allows you to enable and configure the one-time password service.

1. Go to Configure > Authentication > One-Time Password and click the Settings button.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 191

2. Activate the one-time password service by clicking on the ON/OFF slider.

3. Specify the OTP service status.

OTP for all users

If enabled, all users have to use one-time passwords. If only specific users should use one-time passwords, disable this option and select or add users or groups from the list.

Auto-Create OTP Tokens for users

If enabled, a QR code for configuring the mobile device software will be presented to the authorized users the next time they log in to the User Portal. For this to work, make sure that the users have access to the User Portal. When a user logs in to the User Portal, the respective token will appear in the OTP Tokens list. Enabling this feature is recommended when you are using soft tokens on mobile devices. If your users only use hardware tokens you should instead disable this option and add the tokens before enabling the OTP feature.

Enable OTP for facilities

Here, you select the Sophos XG Firewall facilities that should be accessed with one-time passwords by the selected users. When you select the Auto-create OTP tokens for users option, the User

Portal needs to be enabled for security reasons: As the User Portal gives access to the OTP tokens, it should have no weaker protection itself.

Note: When selecting WebAdmin you have to ensure that the selected users have access to the one-time password tokens. Otherwise you may log them out permanently.

4. Specify the timestep settings.

Default token timestep in seconds

To synchronize one-time password generation on the mobile device and on the Sophos XG Firewall, the timestep has to be identical on both sides. Some hardware tokens use 60 seconds. Other software

OTP tokens use a timestep of 30 seconds which is the default value here. If the timestep does not match, authentication fails.

Acceptable Range: 10 - 300 seconds

Default: 30 seconds

Maximum passcode offset steps

With help of this option you can set the maximum passcode offset steps. This means if you for example set 3 steps you restrict the clock of a token to drift no more than 3 timesteps between two logins.

Acceptable range: 0 - 10 steps

Default: 1 step

Maximum initial passcode offset steps

With help of this option you can set the maximum initial passcode offset steps. This means if you for example set 10 steps you restrict the clock of a token to drift no more than 10 timesteps between two logins. This option is only applied when the user employs the token for the very first time.

Acceptable range: 0 - 600 steps

Default range: 10 steps

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 192

Figure 148: Configure OTP

5. Click Apply.

Captive Portal

The Captive Portal allows customization of the Captive Portal login page.

The device provides flexibility to customize the Captive Portal login page. This page can include your organization name and logo.

The device also supports a customized page in languages other than English.

External users, who need to use authentication services, are required to log in over the Captive Portal once before they get access to the User Portal. External users can access the Captive Portal by browsing to https://<Sophos

Device IP Address>:8090. After login, external users have access to the User Portal and are listed on the Configure >

Authentication > Users page. External users can access the User Portal by browsing to https://<Sophos Device IP

Address> or clicking Click here for User My Account on the Captive Portal page.

1. Go to Configure > Authentication > Captive Portal.

2. Specify the General Settings.

Logo

Decide which logo to use.

• Custom - Select to upload the custom logo and specify an image file name to be uploaded. Click

Browse to browse and select the complete path.

• Default - Select to use the default logo

The image size should not exceed 125x70 pixels.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 193

Logo URL

Provide an URL to be redirected to on clicking the logo.

Default:

/www.sophos.com

Page Title

Change the page title if required.

Default: Network Authentication

Login Page Header

Provide the text to be displayed on the Captive Portal login page.

Login Page Footer

Provide a message to be displayed in the footer of the Captive Portal login page.

Username Caption

Provide a label for the textbox to be displayed on the Captive Portal login page.

Default: Username

Password Caption

Provide a label for the textbox to be displayed on the Captive Portal login page.

Default: Password

Login Button Caption

Provide a label for the button to be displayed on the Captive Portal login page.

Default: Login

Logout Button Caption

Provide a label for the button to be displayed on the Captive Portal login page.

Default: Logout

User Portal Link Caption

Provide a text to be displayed for the User Portal login page link. By clicking the link, the user will be directed to the User Portal login page.

Default: Click here for User Portal

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 194

Figure 149: General Settings

3. Specify the Color Scheme settings.

Customize the color scheme of the Captive portal if required. Specify the color code or click the square box to pick the color.

Figure 150: Color Scheme

4. Specify the Custom HTML Template settings.

Use Custom HTML Template

Select to fully customize Captive Portal using custom HTML code.

HTML Text

Provide HTML code to render the Captive Portal according to your requirement. Dynamic contents like banners from external web servers, a customizable Message of the day box and so on can be integrated in the HTML code.

By default, sample HTML will be displayed.

Note: It is compulsory to have one HTML div element with ID __loginbox (e.g.

<div id=’__loginbox’>The system will render necessary input elements in this div.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 195

Figure 151: Custom HTML Template

5. Select from the following possibilities:

Apply

Click to save your settings.

Preview

Click to view the custom settings before saving the changes.

Reset To Default

Click to revert to the default settings.

Guest Users

The Guest Users page displays a list of all the guest users added.

Users without a pre-existing user account who want to access the Internet using a hotspot, via a network available at the airport, hotels, hostels, etc., are called “guest users”. These users, that are otherwise considered unauthenticated and/or are denied access, are allowed to make a request to connect to the Internet for a limited time by authenticating themselves. Being authenticated, these users are authorized to access the Internet as guest user. At such public places,

Internet access is secured by configuring access policies to restrict any malicious use of the network.

Sophos XG Firewall allows the administrator to pre-configure individual or multiple guest users using the Admin

Console. The credentials of guest users configured via the Admin Console can be printed and handed over to the guest user. Alternately, guest users can register themselves using the guest user portal. The credentials and Internet access details of guest users registered via the guest user portal can either be sent via SMS or can be printed.

In case of successful authentication the guest user is granted access according to the applicable group, or else is redirected to the Captive Portal page.

You can filter the list based on the name or username of the user, cell phone number of the user, and validity of the user account, . The page also provides options to add a single or multiple users, distributing credentials for the

Internet access, update user parameters, view or reset the data transfer usage.

Resend Credential – Click the Resend Credential icon in the Manage column against a user registered via the

Guest User Portal to whom the access detail’s SMS are to be resent.

Registering a Single Guest User

This page describes how to register a new single guest user.

This page allows you to manually enter and configure guest user details. Before adding a guest user, you have to configure the general settings on the Configure > Authentication > Guest User Settings page.

1. Go to Configure > Authentication > Guest Usersand click Add Single.

2. Specify guest user details.

Username

Displays auto-generated username.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 196

Password

Displays auto-generated password.

Name

Specify the name of the guest user.

Email

Specify the email address of the guest user.

User Validity (Duration in Days)

Specify the validity for the specified guest user in days.

Minimum number of days: 1 day

Maximum number of days: 999 days

Validity Start

Select the type from when a user’s validity should be counted.

Available Options:

• Immediately - Validity is counted from the time the guest user is created.

• After First Login - Validity is counted from the time the guest user logs into the network for the first time.

Figure 152: Add Guest User

3. Click Add to register the guest user or Add and Print to register the user and print the login credentials.

Reset User Accounting

This option allows you to reset the Internet usage time and data transfer of the user.

Edit the user account of the user whose data accounting you want to reset by clicking the icon in the Manage column.

2. Click Reset User Accounting and OK to confirm.

Note: You cannot reset user accounting for the live user.

View Usage

This page describes how to view the Internet usage and data transfer usage of users.

1. Go to Configure > Authentication > Users.

Edit the user account of the user whose data usage you want to view by clicking the icon in the Manage column.

3. Click View Usage.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 197

4. Select the month for which you want to display the usage information.

5. Click OK to return to the parent page.

Register Multiple Guest Users

This page describes how to create multiple guest users.

1. Go to Configure > Authentication > Guest Users and click Add Multiple.

2. Specify the guest user details.

Number of Users

Specify the number of guest users to be created.

User Validity (Duration in Days)

Specify the validity of multiple guest users in days.

Minimum number of day: 1 day

Maximum number of days: 999 days

Validity Start

Select the type from when the users’ validity should be counted.

Available Options:Immediately - Validity is counted from the time the guest users are created.After

First Login - Validity is counted from the time one of the guest users just created logs into the network for the first time.

Figure 153: Add Guest User

3. Click Add to register the users or Add and Print to register the users and print the login credentials.

The guest users have been created and appear on the Guest Users page.

Note: The users only appear with the name “guest-XXX”. To allocate names to these entries, you have to edit each user.

Update Guest User Configuration

This page describes how to change the policies configured for the guest user.

1. Go to Configure > AuthenticationGuest Users.

Select the guest user for which you want to change the policies by clicking the icon in the Manage column.

3. Update the guest user details.

Username

Displays the username of the guest user.

Name

Change the name of the guest user if required.

Descripton

Specify a description of the guest user.

Password

Displays the password in encrypted format.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 198

You can change the password by clicking on Change Password.

If you change it, enter the new password in the Password field and re-enter it in the Confirm

Password field.

Cell Phone Number

Displays the cell phone number.

Note: The cell phone number cannot be edited.

Email

Change the the email address of the guest user if required.

Internet Usage Time

Displays total Internet usage time information in HH:MM format.

Figure 154: Edit Guest User

4. Specify the Policies.

Group

Displays the group to which the user belongs. User will inherit all the policies assigned to the group.

Note: The guest user group cannot be edited.

Surfing Quota

Select the surfing quota policy from the list.

You can also create a new policy directly from this page by selecting Create new and attach it to the user.

Access Time

Select the access time policy from the list.

You can also create a new policy directly from this page by selecting Create new and attach it to the user.

Network Traffic

Select the network traffic policy from the list.

You can also create a new policy directly from this page by selecting Create new and attach it to the user.

Traffic Shaping

Select the traffic shaping policy from the list.

You can also create a new policy directly from this page by selecting Create new and attach it to the user.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 199

Note: User configuration is given precedence over group configuration i.e. user MAC binding and policies configuration is given priority over group configuration.

Figure 155: Policy

5. Specify the SSL VPN Policy details.

Remote Access

Select a policy for remote access from the list or create a new one. To create a new policy, select

Create new.

You can create a new policy directly from this page or from the Configure > VPN > SSL VPN

(Remote Access) page.

Clientless

Select a policy for clientless access from the list or create a new one. To create a new policy, select

Create new.

You can create a new policy directly from this page or from the Configure > VPN > Clientless

Access page.

If a user is not to be provided SSL VPN access then select No Policy Applied.

L2TP

Enable if you are mapping the user to get access through L2TP connection.

Provide the IP address to be leased to the guest user for L2TP access.

PPTP

Enable if you want to allow the user to get access through a PPTP connection.

If enabled, provide the IP address (IPv4/IPv6) to be leased to the guest user for PPTP access.

CISCO

™

VPN Client

By default, the user is provided remote access through the CISCO VPN client. Disable if remote access is not to be provided to the user.

If enabled, provide the IP address (IPv4/IPv6) to be leased to the user for CISCO VPN access.

Note: To use this feature, CISCO ™

VPN client needs to be configured from the

Configure > VPN > Cisco VPN Client page.

Quarantine Digest

Configure the quarantine digest.

Quarantine digest is an email and contains a list of quarantined spam messages filtered by the device and held in the user quarantine area. If configured, the device will mail the quarantine digest to the user every day. The digest provides a link to the user’s My Account from where the user can access his quarantined messages and take the required action.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 200

Available Options:

• Enable - User receives the quarantine digest daily. This option overrides the group setting.

• Disable - User does not receive quarantine digests. This option overrides the group setting.

Note: Quarantine digest is not applicable to Wi-Fi devices.

Simultaneous Logins

Specify the number of concurrent logins that will be allowed to the user or click Unlimited for allowing unlimited concurrent logins.

The specified setting overrides the global setting specified in the client preferences.

MAC Binding

Enable/disable MAC Binding. By binding the user to a MAC address, you are mapping the user with a group of MAC addresses.

For Selected Nodes and Node Range only IPv4 addresses can be provided.

MAC address List

Specify MAC addresses, for example 01:23:45:67:89:AB.

Once you enable MAC binding, the user can login through pre-specified machines only.

To configure multiple MAC addresses use commas. For example 01:23:45:67:89:AB,

01:23:45:67:89:AC.

Login Restriction

Select the appropriate option to specify the login restriction for the user.

Available Options:

• Any Node - User can login from any of the nodes in the network.

• User Group Node(s) - User can login only from the nodes assigned to the group.

• Selected Nodes - User can login from the specified nodes only.

• Node Range - User can login from any of the IP addresses from the configured range.

Figure 156: SSL VPN Policy

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 201

Note: Before saving, you have two more options on this page

•

- Click to restart the accounting of the guest user’s Internet usage.

Note: You cannot reset the user accounting of live users.

•

View Usage

- Click to view the Internet usage information of a particular guest user.

6. Click Save .

The guest user settings have been updated.

Clientless Users

The Clientless Users page displays a list of all the clientless users.

Clientless users are the users who can bypass the client login to access the Internet and are managed by the device itself. As clientless users can bypass the device login, create clientless users when your network has few Non-

Windows machines, VOIP boxes, or servers.

Add a Single Clientless User

This page describes how to add a single clientless user.

1. Go to System > Authentication > Clientless Usersand click Add.

2. Specify the clientless users details.

Username

Specify a username which uniquely identifies the user and will be used for login.

IP Address

Specify an IP address(IPv4/IPv6) for the clientless user.

Group

Select a group to which the user is to be added. The user will inherit all the polices assigned to the group.

Change the policies applied to the user by editing the user details (once the user has been created).

Name

Enter a unique name for the user.

Email

Specify an email address.

Quarantine Digest

Configure quarantine digest. Quarantine digest is an email and contains a list of quarantined spam messages filtered by the device and held in the user quarantine area. If configured, the device will mail the quarantine digest to the user every day. The digest provides a link to the User Portal from where the user can access quarantined messages and take the required action.

Available Options:

• Enable - User will receive the quarantine digest daily. This option overrides the group setting.

• Disable - User will not receive quarantine digests. This option overrides the group setting.

• Apply Group Settings - User will receive quarantine digests as configured for the group the user belongs to.

Note: Quarantine digest is not available for Wi-Fi devices.

Description

Specify a user description.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 202

Figure 157: Add Clientless User

By clicking the icon you can add further users.

By clicking the icon you can remove users.

3. Click Save.

Reset User Accounting

This option allows you to reset the Internet usage time and data transfer of the user.

Edit the user account of the user whose data accounting you want to reset by clicking the icon in the Manage column.

2. Click Reset User Accounting and OK to confirm.

Note: You cannot reset user accounting for the live user.

View Usage

This page describes how to view the Internet usage and data transfer usage of users.

1. Go to Configure > Authentication > Users.

Edit the user account of the user whose data usage you want to view by clicking the icon in the Manage column.

3. Click View Usage.

4. Select the month for which you want to display the usage information.

5. Click OK to return to the parent page.

Add Multiple Clientless Users

This page describes how to add multiple clientless users.

1. Go to Configure > Authentication > Clientless Usersand click Add Range.

2. Specify the following:

From IP

Specify a Start-IP address for the range.

To IP

Specify an End-IP address for the range.

Group

You can change the policies applied to the user by editing the user details. If you change the policies for the user, user specific policies will take precedence over user group policies.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 203

Figure 158: Clientless User

3. Click Save.

The users have been created and appear on the Clientless Users page.

Note: The users only appear with their IP addresses. To allocate names to these addresses, you have to edit each user.

Changing Policies of the Clientless User

This page describes how to change the policies configured for a clientless user.

Changing the policies applied to a user can be performed by updating the user details. If you change the policies for the user, user specific policies will take precedence over user group policies.

1. Go to Configure > Authentication > Clientless Users.

Select the user for which you want to change the policies by clicking the icon in the Manage column.

3. Update the Policies.

Traffic Shaping

Change the Traffic Shaping policy applied to the user.

The policy applied here will take the precedence over the group policy.

You can also create a new traffic shaping policy on this page or on the System > Profiles > Traffic

Shaping page.

Quarantine Digest

Configure quarantine digest.

Quarantine digest is an email and contains a list of quarantined spam messages filtered by the device and held in the user quarantine area. If configured, the device will mail the quarantine digest every day to the user. The digest provides a link to the User Portal from where the user can access his quarantined messages and take the required action.

Available Options:

• Enable - User will receive the quarantine digest daily. This option overrides the group setting.

• Disable - User will not receive quarantine digests. This option overrides the group setting.

Note: Quarantine digest is not available for Wi-Fi devices.

Figure 159: Policies

Note: Before saving, you have two more options on this page.

•

- Click to reset the Internet usage time and data transfer of the user.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 204

Note: You cannot reset the user accounting of live users.

•

View Usage

- Click to view the Internet usage and data transfer usage.

4. Click Save.

Guest User Settings

This page allows you to configure general settings, registration settings and SMS gateway for guest users.

Users without a pre-existing user account wanting to access the Internet using a hotspot, or via a network available at the airport, hotels, hostels, etc. are called “guest users”. These users, that are otherwise considered unauthenticated and/or denied access, are allowed to make request to connect to the Internet for a limited period by authenticating themselves. On being authenticated, these users are authorized to access Internet as guest users. At such locations,

Internet access is secured by configuring access policies to restrict any malicious use of the network.

Sophos XG Firewall allows administrator to pre-configure single or multiple guest users using the Admin Console.

The credentials of guest users configured via the Admin Console can be printed and handed over to the guest user.

Alternately, guest users can register themselves using the guest user portal. The credentials and Internet access details of guest users registered via the guest user portal can either be sent via SMS or can be printed.

In case of successful authentication the guest user is granted access according to the applicable group, or else is redirected to the Captive Portal page.

The page allows configuring general parameters to provide secured Internet access for guest users.

1. Go to Configure > Authentication > Guest User Settings.

2. Specify the Guest User General Settings.

Username Prefix

Enter a prefix to be used for auto-generation of a username for guest users.

Default: guest

Group

Select a group of policies to assign to guest users or create a new one.

Note: You can create a new group of policies directly from this page or from the

Configure > Authentication > Groups page.

Password Length

Specify the length of the auto-generated password for Guest Users.

Acceptable range: 3 to 60 characters

Default: 8 characters

The password length is a basic security parameter, the value of which affects the strength of password against brute force attack.

Password Complexity

Select a type of password from the available options to be used for complexity of an auto-generated password:

Available options:

• Numeric Password – Password will include only numeric characters.

• Alphabetic Password – Password will include only alphabetic characters.

• Alphanumeric Password – Password will include numeric as well as alphabetic characters.

• Alphanumeric with Special Character Password - Password will include numeric, alphabets and special characters.

The password strength is a function of its length, complexity, and unpredictability. Combining password length with password complexity makes a password difficult to guess.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 205

Disclaimer

Provide the disclaimer message to be printed below every user’s login credentials.

Disclaimer once configured can be edited but cannot be removed.

Auto Purge on Expiry

Check to enable automatic purging of user details on expiry of user validity.

Note: Details of a user who is bound to rules (like firewall, IM, etc.) will not be purged automatically.

Figure 160: Guest User General Settings

3. Specify the Guest User Registration Settings.

Enable Guest Users Registration

Enable to allow secured Internet access to guest users.

SMS Gateway

Select the gateway using which SMS should be sent.

Alternately you may add the SMS gateway from this page itself by clicking Create new.

Guest Username

Select Use Cell Number as Username as method of generating a username.

If the Guest Username option is not selected, by default, the new user name will be generated with the value specified in Username Prefix.

User Validity (Duration in Days)

Specify the validity of guest users in days.

Default Country Code

Enable to configure a default country code.

The selected country is displayed as default option in the Cell Phone Number selection at the guest user registration page.

CAPTCHA Verification

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 206

Select to enable or disable CAPTCHA (Completely Automated Public Turing Test To Tell

Computers and Humans Apart) code verification on the guest user registration page to ensure the request is received for human being.

By enabling CAPTCHA verification, the user will be displayed a picture with characters that user must insert in a provided textbox below the picture. The administrator can therefore protect the device against attacks generated by automated programs.

Default: Enabled

Figure 161: Guest User Registration Settings

4. Click Apply.

5. Specify the SMS Gateway.

An SMS gateway allows sending and receiving short message service (SMS) to/from a home network for guest user registration. The device supports HTTP and HTTPS protocol based SMS service.

Configure SMS Gateway

This page allows you to configure an SMS Gateway for guest user registration.

1. Go to Configure > Authentication > Guest User Settingsand click Add under the SMS Gateway section.

2. Enter SMS gateway details.

Name

Enter the name of the SMS gateway.

URL

Specify the URL of the SMS gateway for sending an SMS request.

HTTP Method

Select the method for sending an SMS request to the SMS gateways from the options available:

Available Options:Get: Requests data from a specified resource.Post: Submits data to be processed to a specified resource.

Cell Number Format

Select to use country code with cell number.

Number Prefix

Specify the prefix value to be used with the cell number.

Number Prefix can include alpha-numeric and ASCII special characters.

It can be up to 4 characters long.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 207

Request Parameters

Specify the following request parameters to configure the SMS gateway.

Name

Value

Name is a descriptor used to describe the meaning of the value. E.g. username, password, mobile

Indicates the value of a variable that are defined for the Name.

Response Format

Response describes the delivery status of the message such as success, failed, limit exceeded. Status message can be in various formats. Few of them are described below:

Response Format

{0} | {1} | {2}

Response Received

success | mbno | msgid/transactionid

Response Format

Response Received

<status>500</status><transactionid>2323</ transactionid><reason>Limit Exceeded</reason>

When the response format is different for success and failure, it is recommended that the response format string should have a single content holder. E.g. {0}

Response Parameters

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 208

Response Parameter is the value presented by the content holder {0,1, 2...n} that will be displayed in the log viewer.

Parameter Index: Parameter Index is the content holder value {0,1, 2...n}.

Name: Name represents the content holder in the log viewer.

Example 1:

Parameter Index

Name

Status

Recipient

SMSID

Example 2:

Parameter Index

Name

SMSID - 2323

SMS Status Message – Length Exceeded

Figure 162: Add SMS Gateway

3. Click Save.

Testing Connectivity with SMS Gateway

This page allows you to check connectivity with the gateway after you have configured an SMS gateway.

1. Go to Configure > Authentication > Guest User Settings and in section SMS Gateway, edit the configured

SMS gateway and click Test Connection.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 209

2. Enter a cell phone number. You will receive SMS through the gateway configured if you are able to connect to the gateway.

Figure 163: Test Connectivity

3. Click Save.

Client Downloads

The Client Downloads page allows you to to download all the clients or add-ins needed to interact with the device.

The device provides various options for user authentication. All the users are authenticated before they are provided access to network resources. User authentication can be performed using a local database, Active Directory, LDAP,

RADIUS, TACACS, eDirectory, NTLM or combination of these. The device also supports Single Sign On (SSO) for transparent authentication whereby Windows credentials can be used to authenticate and the user has to login only once to access network resources. SSO can be used in Active Directory and Citrix or Terminal Services Environment.

Users can authenticate with the device using the Captive Portal, authentication clients for Windows, Linux,

Macintosh, Android and iOS platforms or Single Sign On (SSO).

Following Clients can be downloaded from this page:

Single Sign-On

Sophos Single Sign-On Client - Enables users to logon to the organization network as well as to the device simultaneously. This requires client installation on the user’s machine.

Sophos Transparent Authentication Suite (STAS) - Enables transparent authentication whereby Windows credentials can be used to authenticate and the user has to login only once to access network resources. This does

NOT require a client installation on the user’s machine.

Sophos Authentication for Thin Client (STAC) - Enables transparent authentication for users in Citrix or Terminal

Services Environment whereby network credentials can be used to authenticate and the user has to login only once to access network resources. This does NOT require a client installation on the user’s machine.

Authentication Clients

Download MSI - Enables admins to install authentication clients via Microsoft Installer to multiple user devices to access network resources and the Internet as per the policies configured in the device.

Download CA for MSI - Download the digital certificate to be installed via MSI to ensure a safe connection with the device.

Download for Windows - Enables users using a Windows operating system to logon to the device to access network resources and the Internet as per the policies configured in the device.

Download for MAC OS X - Enables users using a system with Macintosh OS X onwards to logon to the device to access network resources and the Internet as per the policies configured in the device.

Download for Linux 32 - Enables users using a 32-bit Linux operating system to logon to the device to access network resources and the Internet as per the policies configured in the device.

Download for Linux 64 - Enables users using a 64-bit Linux operating system to logon to the device to access network resources and the Internet as per the policies configured in the device.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 210

Download Certificate for iOS/Android client - Download the digital certificate to be installed in an iOS or Android system to ensure a safe connection with the device. Authentication Clients for iOS/Android can be downloaded from the respective App Store/Play Store.

SPX Add-ins

This feature is available only with a valid Email Protection subscription

This feature is available in Sophos Firewall Models XG105 and above, Cyberoam Models CR25iNG and above, and all Sophos UTM Models.

The SPX Add-in simplifies the encryption of the messages that contain sensitive or confidential information leaving the organization. The Add-in integrates seamlessly with the user’s Microsoft Outlook software, making it easy for users to encrypt messages through the Sophos Firewall (SF) Email Protection.

Follow the steps given below to install the Add-in Outlook:

1. Unzip the files to a temporary folder.

2. For an interactive installation, run setup.exe (users will be prompted for input).

3. For an unattended installation, please note the following prerequisites.

• Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows 8 (both 32 and 64-bit) versions are supported.

• Microsoft Outlook 2007 SP3, 2010 or 2013 (both 32 and 64-bit) versions are supported.

Now, proceed as follows:

a. Install Microsoft .NET Framework 4 Client Profile.

b. Install Microsoft Visual Studio 2010 Tools for Office Runtime 4.0.

c. Run the installer with the following parameters: msiexec /qr /i SophosOutlookAddInSetupUTM.msi T=1

EC=3 C=1 I=1.

STAS

This page describes how to configure the Sophos Transparent Authentication Suite (STAS).

Sophos Transparent Authentication Suite (STAS) enables transparent authentication whereby Microsoft Windows credentials can be used to authenticate. The user has to log in only once to access the network resources. A client installation on the user’s machine is not required.

The Sophos Transparent Authentication Suite (STAS) program can be found under Configure > Authentication >

Client Downloads. For more information about STAS installation, see

Sophos Transparent Authentication installation guide

1. Go to Configure > Authentication > STAS.

2. To enable Sophos Transparent Authentication Suite click the toggle switch.

3. Click Activate STAS.

4. To enable the user inactivity click the toggle switch.

5. Specify the user inactivity.

Inactivity Time

Specify the inactivity time in minutes. The user inactivity timeout is the inactive/idle time in minutes after which the user will be logged out and has to re-authenticate.

Acceptable range: 3 to 1440 minutes

Default: 3 minutes

Data Transfer Threshold

Specify the minimum data to be transferred.

Default: 100 bytes

6. Click Apply.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 211

Related information

How to implement Single Sign-On using STAS

Add New Collector

This page describes how to add a collector.

The STAS Collector collects user authentication requests from multiple agents, processes the requests and sends them to Sophos XG Firewall for authorization.

1. Go to Configure > Authentication > STAS.

2. Click Add New Collector.

3. Specify the collector details.

Collector IP

Enter a collector IP address.

Collector Port

Select collector port.

Default: 6677

Collector Group

Select a collector group. If you select New Group the collector will automatically be tagged with a group number. If you select Existing Group you can add the collector to an existing group.

Figure 164: Add New Collector

4. Click Save.

Disable STAS

This page describes how to disable STAS.

If you disable STAS, the current STAS configuration will be removed.

1. Click the toggle switch of the Sophos Transparent Authentication Suite.

2. Confirm deactivation by clicking on the Confirm removal of STAS configuration button.

VPN

The VPN menu allows you to configure required IPsec, L2TP, PPTP and SSL VPN connections and connections with a CISCO

™

VPN Client. Also, the section allows certificate and bookmark management required in the configured

VPN connections.

A virtual private network (VPN) is a tunnel that carries private network traffic from one endpoint system to another over a public network such as the Internet without the traffic, being aware that there are intermediate hops between the endpoints or the intermediate hops being aware they are carrying the network packets that are traversing the tunnel. The tunnel may optionally compress and/or encrypt the data, providing enhanced performance and some measure of security. VPN allows you to pretend you are using a leased line or a direct telephone call to communicate between the endpoints. VPNs allow users and telecommuters to connect to their corporate intranets or extranets.

VPNs are cost-effective because users can connect to the Internet locally and tunnel back to connect to corporate

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 212 resources. This not only reduces overhead costs associated with traditional remote access methods, but also improves flexibility and scalability. For all business people traveling or working from home, connecting securely to the corporate network is essential. With the device, setting up a VPN is almost effortless.

The two endpoints in device VPN are referred to as:

• Local - First endpoint is the local machine itself.

• Remote - Second endpoint is the remote peer - the machine you are trying to establish a VPN connection to, or the machine which is trying to establish a VPN connection with you.

Device VPN automatically encrypts the data and sends it to the remote site over the Internet, where it is automatically decrypted and forwarded to the intended destination. By encrypting, the integrity and confidentiality of data is protected even when transmitted over the un-trusted public network. Device uses IPsec standard i.e. IPsec protocol to protect traffic. In IPsec, the identity of communicating users is checked with the user authentication based on digital certificates, public keys or preshared keys.

Device ensures that all the VPN traffic passing through the VPN tunnels is threat free. All the firewall rules and policies are applicable to the traffic going into the VPN tunnels and coming out of the VPN tunnels. Device inspects all the traffic passing through the VPN tunnels and makes sure that there are no viruses, worms, spam, and inappropriate content or intrusion attempts in the VPN traffic. As VPN traffic is by default subjected to the DoS inspection, the device provides a facility by which one can bypass scanning of traffic coming from certain hosts from a VPN zone. The above functionality is achieved by adding one additional zone called VPN zone. VPN traffic passes through the VPN zone and a firewall rule can be applied to the VPN zone.

Device can be used to establish VPN connection between sites, LAN-to-LAN and client-to-LAN connection. VPN is the bridge between local & remote networks/subnets.

Device supports following protocols to authenticate and encrypt traffic:

• Internet Protocol Security (IPsec)

• Layer Two Tunneling Protocol (L2TP)

• Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol (PPTP)

• Secure Socket Layer (SSL)

IPsec Connections

The IPsec menu allows you to create and manage IPsec connections and failover groups.

IP Security (IPsec) is a suite of protocols designed for cryptographically secure communication at the IP layer (layer

3).

IPsec protocols:

• Authentication Header (AH) – Used for the authentication of packet senders and for ensuring the integrity of packet data. The authentication header protocol (AH) checks the authenticity and integrity of packet data. In addition, it ensures that sender and receiver IP addresses have not been changed during transmission. Packets are authenticated using a checksum created by using a hash-based message authentication code (HMAC) in connection with a key.

• Encapsulating Security Payload (ESP) – Used for encrypting the entire packet and for authenticating its contents. In addition to encryption, ESP provides the ability to authenticate senders and verify packet contents.

This page contains two (2) sections:

IPsec Connections

Failover Groups

IPsec Connections

The IPsec Connections section displays a list of all the IPsec connections. You can filter the list based on name, group name, policy name, connection type, and status of the connection. The page also provides the option to add a new connection, update the parameters of the existing policy, or delete a policy. In addition, you can create a

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 213 connection manually or through the connection wizard. In case of a remote access connection export the connection configuration by clicking the Export icon under the Manage column.

Note: You can also view and manage active IPsec connections on the System > Current Activity > IPsec

Connections page.

The status of each connection is indicated as follows:

Connection Status

Active Connection

Description

Connection is active but not connected. Click to initiate the connection.

Connection is active and connected. Click to disconnect the connection.

When you disconnect, the connection will be deactivated. To re-establish the connection, activate the connection.

Connection is active but only partially connected. Click to disconnect the connection. When multiple subnets are configured for LAN and/or remote network, the device creates a sub-connection for each subnet. This status indicates that one of the sub-connections is not active.

Connection is inactive. Click to activate the connection.

Failover Group

Connection Failover

Connection Failover is a feature that enables you to provide an automatic backup connection for VPN traffic and provide “Always ON” VPN connectivity for IPsec connection. If the primary connection fails, the subsequent connection in the group will take over without manual intervention and keep traffic moving. The entire process is transparent to users.

Connection Failback

During a connection failure, the device checks the health of a primary connection every 60 seconds. When the primary connection is restored without the administrator’s intervention, the secondary connection fails back to the primary connection.

Connection Failover Group

A VPN group is a grouping of IPsec connections. The phase 1 and phase 2 security parameters for each connection in a group can be different or identical except for the IP address of the remote gateway. The order of connections in the group defines the failover priority of the connection. Failover to the next connection will not occur if the group is manually deactivated.

The failover group containing the connection must be activated for the first time before participating in the failover.

Failover to the next connection will not occur if the group is manually disconnected.

When the primary connection fails, the subsequent active connection in the group takes over without manual intervention and keeps traffic moving. For example, if the connection established using the 4th connection in the group is lost then the 5th connection will take over. Once the 4th connection is re-stored, the 5th connection will automatically fail back on the 4th connection.

The device considers a Site to Site and Host to Host connection as failed connection if the remote peer does not reply.

Connections that are not a part of the connection group do not participate in failover/failback process and such connections will not be re-established automatically if lost.

To configure connection failover, you have to:

• Create connections.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 214

• Create a failover group. A failover group is created by grouping all the connections that are to be used for failover.

The order of connections in the group defines the failover priority of the connection.

• Define a failover condition.

Prerequisites

• Packets of the protocol specified in the failover condition must be allowed from local server to remote server and its reply on both local and remote server

• One connection can only be member of single group

• Connection must be ACTIVE to participate in failover

Procedure

1. Once the connection is added as a member of the group, DPD is configured as “Disable”, Key Negotiation Tries as

3, and Action on VPN Restart as “Disable”.

2. Once the connection is removed from the group, the original policy and connection configuration will be considered.

3. If the connection is already established at the time of adding it in the failover group, it will get disconnected.

4. On factory reset, failover configuration will not be retained.

The Failover Group section displays the list of created failover groups. You can filter or sort the groups based on group name. You can add a new group, update, or delete the group. In addition, the list displays the status of the group as: indicating an activate group while indicates an inactive group.

Types of IPsec Connections

IPsec connection is the encrypted VPN connection established between two systems using the Internet protocol security (IPsec). It can link two hosts, two sites or remote user and a LAN.

The device supports following types of IPsec connections:

• Remote Access – This type of VPN is a user-to-internal network connection via a public or shared network. Many large companies have employees that need to connect to the internal network from the field. These field agents access the internal network by using remote computers and laptops without a static IP address.

• Site to Site – A Site to Site VPN connects an entire network (such as a LAN or WAN) to a remote network via a network-to-network connection. A network-to-network connection requires routers on each side of the connecting networks to transparently process and route information from one node on a local LAN to another node on a remote LAN.

• Host to Host – Host to Host VPN connects one desktop or workstation to another station by way of a host-to-host connection. This type of connection uses the network to which each host is connected to create a secure tunnel between the two.

IPsec Connection Wizard

The IPsec Connection Wizard allows you to configure a VPN connection manually.

The wizard is not available if you are managing the device through Sophos Firewall Manager.

The VPN Connection Wizard takes you step-by-step through the configuration of a VPN connection on the device.

After the configuration is completed, the wizard creates a new VPN connection.

Wizard is divided into two panels – Configuration panel and Help panel. Configuration parameters are to be entered in the Configuration panel while the Help panel on left-most side provides the help on the configuration parameters.

First screen of the wizard provides an overview of the configuration steps. You can create three types of connections through wizard:

•

Remote Access

•

Site to Site

•

Host to Host

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 215

Creating Remote Access Connection Using VPN Wizard

Go to Configure > VPN > IPsec Connections. Click Wizard and follow the steps given below.

Specify name and description (if required) for a VPN connection and click Start. The Help panel on left-most side provides an overview of each configuration step.

On the Select a Connection Type page

1. Select the connection type Remote Access.

2. Select VPN policy to be applied to the connection traffic. Default policies as well as custom policies applicable to connection will be displayed.

3. Select action to be taken on the connection when VPN services or the device restart.

Available options:

• Disable – Connection will be disabled till the user activates it.

• Respond Only – Connection in ready state to respond to any incoming request.

4. Click > icon to continue.

On the Authentication Details page

1. Select authentication type.

Available options:

Preshared Key

Digital Certificate

Specify the preshared key of minimum 5 characters.

This preshared key will have to be shared or communicated to the peer at the remote end. At the remote end, the client will have to specify this key for authentication. Refer to the VPN client guide, Phase 1

Configuration.

If there is a mismatch in the key, the user will not be able to establish the connection.

Select local certificate that should be used for authentication by the device.

Select remote certificate that should be used for authentication by the remote peer.

2. Click > to continue.

On the Local Network Details page

1. Select Local WAN Port. Selected port acts as an end-point of the tunnel.

2. Select Local Subnet. Select the local network(s) you wish to give access to remote users via this connection.

3. Select Local ID.

For Preshared Key and Digital Certificate, select any type of ID and enter its value. DER ASN1 DN (X.509) is not applicable.

For Local Certificate, the ID and its value configured in the local certificate are displayed automatically.

4. Click > to continue.

On the Remote Network Details page

1. In the Remote VPN Server field specify the IP address or host name of the remote endpoint.

To specify any IP address, enter *.

2. Enable NAT traversal if a NAT device exists between your VPN endpoints i.e. when remote peer has private/nonroutable IP address.

3. Select Remote Subnet. Select the remote network(s) that you wish to access via this connection. This option will be available only if NAT traversal is enabled.

4. Select Remote ID.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 216

For Preshared Key, select any type of ID and enter its value. DER ASN1 DN (X.509) is not applicable.

In case of Local Certificate, the ID and its value configured in the local certificate are displayed automatically.

5. Click > to continue.

On the User Authentication page

1. Select User Authentication Mode.

Available options:

• Disabled – Choose if authentication is not required.

• Enable as Client – Enter username and password for authentication by the remote gateway.

• Enable as Server – Select all the users that are to be allowed to connect.

2. Click > to continue.

On the IPsec Connection Summary page

The page displays the settings with which the IPsec connection will be created.

Click Finish to create the IPsec connection or click < to go back to the previous page and change the settings.

Creating Site to Site Connection using VPN Wizard

Go to Configure > VPN > IPsec Connections. Click Wizard and follow the steps given below:

Specify name and description (if required) for a VPN connection and click Start. The Help panel on left-most side provides an overview of each configuration step.

On the Select a Connection Type page

1. Select the connection type Site to Site.

2. Select VPN policy to be applied to the connection traffic. Default policies as well as custom policies applicable to connection will be displayed.

3. Select action to be taken on the connection when VPN services or the device restart.

Available options:

• Disable – Connection will be disabled until the user activates it.

• Respond Only – Connection is in ready state to respond to any incoming request.

• Initiate – Initiate to establish the connection every time VPN services or the device restart.

4. Click > icon to continue.

On the Authentication Details page

1. Select authentication type.

Available options:

Preshared Key

Digital Certificate

Specify the preshared key of minimum 5 characters.

Configuration.

If there is a mismatch in the key, the user will not be able to establish the connection.

Select local certificate that should be used for authentication by the device.

Select remote certificate that should be used for authentication by the remote peer.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 217

RSA

Local RSA key is displayed which can be re-generated from the CLI console. Refer to the console guide for more details. Specify remote RSA key.

2. Click > to continue.

On the Local Network Details page

1. Select Local WAN Port. Selected port acts as an end-point of the tunnel.

2. Select Local Subnet. Select the local network(s) you wish to give access to remote users via this connection.

3. Select Local ID.

For Preshared Key and RSA Key, select any type of ID and enter its value. DER ASN1 DN (X.509) is not applicable.

For Local Certificate, the ID and its value configured in the local certificate are displayed automatically.

4. Click > to continue.

On the Remote Network Details page

1. In the Remote VPN Server field specify the IP address or host name of the remote endpoint.

To specify any IP address, enter *.

2. Enable NAT traversal if a NAT device exists between your VPN endpoints i.e. when remote peer has private/nonroutable IP address.

3. Select Remote Subnet. Select the remote network(s) that you wish to access via this connection. This option will be available only if NAT traversal is enabled.

4. Select Remote ID.

For Preshared Key and RSA Key, select any type of ID and enter its value. DER ASN1 DN (X.509) is not applicable.

In case of Local Certificate, the ID and its value configured in the local certificate are displayed automatically.

5. Click > to continue.

On the User Authentication page

1. Select User Authentication Mode.

Available options:

• Disabled – Choose if authentication is not required.

• Enable as Client – Enter username and password for authentication by the remote gateway.

• Enable as Server – Select all the users that are to be allowed to connect.

2. Click > to continue.

On the IPsec Connection Summary page

The page displays the settings with which the IPsec connection will be created.

Click Finish to create the IPsec connection or click < to go back to the previous page and change the settings.

Creating Host to Host Connection using VPN Wizard

Go to Configure > VPN > IPsec Connections. Click Wizard and follow the steps given below:

Specify name and description (if required) for a VPN connection and click Start. The Help panel on left-most side provides an overview of each configuration step.

On the Select a Connection Type page

1. Select the connection type Host to Host.

2. Select VPN policy to be applied to the connection traffic. Default policies as well as custom policies applicable to connection will be displayed.

3. Select action to be taken on the connection when VPN services or the device restart.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 218

Available options:

• Disable – Connection will be disabled until the user activates it.

• Respond Only – Connection is in ready state to respond to any incoming request.

• Initiate – Initiate to establish the connection every time VPN services or the device restart.

4. Click > icon to continue.

On the Authentication Details page

1. Select authentication type.

Available options:

Preshared Key

Specify the preshared key of minimum 5 characters.

Configuration.

If there is a mismatch in the key, the user will not be able to establish the connection.

Digital Certificate

RSA

Select local certificate that should be used for authentication by the device.

Select remote certificate that should be used for authentication by the remote peer.

Local RSA key is displayed which can be re-generated from the CLI console. Refer to the console guide for more details. Specify remote RSA key.

2. Click > to continue.

On the Local Network Details page

1. Select Local WAN Port. Selected port acts as an end-point of the tunnel.

2. Select Local ID.

For Preshared Key and RSA Key, select any type of ID and enter its value. DER ASN1 DN (X.509) is not applicable.

For Local Certificate, the ID and its value configured in the local certificate are displayed automatically.

3. Click > to continue.

On the Remote Network Details page

1. In the Remote VPN Server field specify the IP address or host name of the remote endpoint.

To specify any IP address, enter *.

2. Enable NAT traversal if a NAT device exists between your VPN endpoints i.e. when remote peer has private/nonroutable IP address.

3. Select Remote Subnet. Select the remote network(s) that you wish to access via this connection. This option will be available only if NAT traversal is enabled.

4. Select Remote ID.

For Preshared Key and RSA Key, select any type of ID and enter its value. DER ASN1 DN (X.509) is not applicable.

In case of Local Certificate, the ID and its value configured in the local certificate are displayed automatically.

5. Click > to continue.

On the User Authentication page

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 219

1. Select User Authentication Mode.

Available options:

• Disabled – Choose if authentication is not required.

• Enable as Client – Enter username and password for authentication by the remote gateway.

• Enable as Server – Select all the users that are to be allowed to connect.

2. Click > to continue.

On the IPsec Connection Summary page

The page displays the settings with which the IPsec connection will be created.

Click Finish to create the IPsec connection or click < to go back to the previous page and change the settings.

Add VPN Failover Group

A VPN failover group enables you to have an always-on VPN connection. If the primary connection fails, the subsequent connection in the group will take over without manual intervention and keep traffic moving.

1. Go to Configure > VPN > IPsec Connections, scroll to the Failover Group section and click Add.

2. Type a name.

3. Select at least two connections.

SF-OS selects the subsequent active connection from the list if the primary connection fails.

4. Enable mail notification to receive connection failure notifications.

The email recipient is the one you entered during the network configuration.

5. Specify failover conditions.

6. Click Save.

SSL VPN (Remote Access)

The SSL VPN (Remote Access) tab allows control of remote devices connected to your system.

The remote access SSL feature of Sophos XG Firewall is realized by OpenVPN, a full-featured SSL VPN solution.

You can create point-to-point encrypted tunnels between remote employees and your company, requiring both SSL certificates and a username/password combination for authentication. This enables access to internal resources. In addition, a secure User Portal is offered, which can be accessed by each authorized user to download a customized

SSL VPN client software bundle. This bundle includes a free SSL VPN client, SSL certificates and a configuration that can be handled by a simple one-click installation procedure. The SSL VPN client supports most business applications such as native Outlook, native Windows file sharing, and many more.

This page displays a list of all available remote policies. For each policy, the list shows:

Name

Displays the name of the SSL VPN remote access policy.

Use as Default Gateway

Displays if and which default gateway is used for the policy.

Description

Displays the description which was entered for the policy.

Figure 165: About SSL

Add SSL VPN Remote Access Policy

This page allows adding SSL VPN remote access policies.

1. Go to Configure > VPN > SSL VPN (Remote Access) and click Add.

2. Specifiy the General Settings details:

Name

Enter a unique name for the policy.

Description

Enter a description or other information.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 220

Figure 166: General Settings

3. Specify the Identity details:

Policy Members

Click Add New Item to select available users/groups from a list or search for users/groups. When selected, click Apply Selected Items.

Note: You can also view and manage active SSL VPN users on the Monitor &

Analyze > Current Activities > Remote Users page.

Selected items are displayed in the list. To remove an item from the list, click the Minus icon on the right of the item.

Figure 167: Identity

4. Specify the Tunnel Access details:

Use as Default Gateway

Activate the toggle switch if you want to use this as default gateway. If activated, all traffic is forwarded to a default gateway including external Internet requests. If deactivated, the traffic uses a split mode to separate traffic for internal network segments and external Internet requests through different gateways.

Permitted Network Resources (IPv4)

Click Add New Item to select available network resources from a list or search for network resources. When selected, click Apply Selected Items.

Selected items are displayed in the list. To remove an item from the list, click the Minus icon on the right of the item.

Permitted Network Resources (IPv6)

Click Add New Item to select available users/groups from a list or search for users/groups. When selected, click Apply Selected Items.

Selected items are displayed in the list. To remove an item from the list, click the Minus icon on the right of the item.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 221

Figure 168: SSL VPN (Remote Access) Tunnel Access

5. Specify the Idle Timeout settings:

Disconnect Idle Clients

Activate/deactivate by clicking the toggle switch. If activated, clients which are idle will be disconnected from the session after a specified time.

Override Global Timeout (Default 15 Minutes) (available only if Disconnect Idle Clients is selected)

Enter a value for the idle timeout in minutes.

Acceptable range: 15 to 60 minutes

Default: 15 minutes

Figure 169: SSL VPN (Remote Access) Idle Timeout

6. Click Apply.

New remote access policies immediately appear on the SSL VPN (Remote Access) list.

Note: For remote access connections to work check that LAN and WAN zones are activated for the User

Portal on the System > Administration > Device Access page.

SSL VPN (Site to Site)

The SSL VPN (Site to Site) tab allows you to establish secure Site-to-site VPN tunnels via an SSL connection.

SSL VPN connections have distinct roles attached. The tunnel endpoints act as either client or server. The client always initiates the connection, the server responds to client requests. Keep in mind that this contrasts with IPsec where both endpoints normally can initiate a connection.

Server Connections

This section displays a list of all existing SSL VPN site-to-site server connections along with their status, connection name, connection. local and remote networks, received and sent bytes, and the date of connection. You can sort the list by the connection name, the local or remote networks. The list displays the status of each connection as follows:

Status

Indicates if the connection is active or not. You can activate/deactivate the connection by clicking the toggle switch.

Connection Name

Displays the name of the connection.

Connection

Indicates the status of the connection: online (green) or offline (red).

Local Networks

Displays the local networks that are allowed to be accessed remotely.

Remote Networks

Displays the remote networks that are allowed to connect to the local network(s).

Bytes

Indicates the number of bytes sent and received through this connection.

Connected Since

Displays the date the connection was established.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 222

Figure 170: Server

Client Connections

This section displays a list of all existing SSL VPN site-to-site client connections along with their status, connection name, connection. usage of HTTP proxy server, received and sent bytes. You can sort the list by the connection name and the usage of the HTTP proxy server. The page also provides options to add, edit, download or delete a connection.

The list displays the status of each connection as follows:

Status

Indicates if the connection is activated or not. You can activate/deactivate the connection by clicking the toggle switch.

Connection Name

Displays the name of the connection.

Connection

Indicates the status of the connection: online (green) or offline (red).

Use HTTP Proxy Server

Displays the HTTP proxy server which is used for the connection.

Bytes

Indicates the number of bytes sent and received through this connection.

Figure 171: Client

Add SSL VPN Site-to-Site Server Connection

This page describes how to add a SSL VPN site-to-site server connection.

1. Go to Configure > VPN > SSL VPN (Site to Site) and click Add in the Server section.

2. Specify the server details:

Connection Name

Enter a descriptive name for the connection.

Description

Enter the description or other information.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 223

Use Static Virtual IP Address

Only select this option if the IP address pool is not compatible with the client’s network environment: By default, clients are assigned an IP address from a virtual IP pool. Rarely, it may happen that such an IP address is already in use on the client’s host. In that case, enter a suitable IP address in the Static Peer IP field which will then be assigned to the client during tunnel setup.

Local Networks

Select or add one or more local networks to which remote network(s) are allowed to connect. If you create a new network, you can either add a single IP host or an IP host group.

Remote Networks

Select or add one or more remote networks that are allowed to connect to the local network(s). If you create a new network, you can either add a single IP host or an IP host group.

Figure 172: Add SSL Server Connection

3. Click Save.

The new SSL VPN site-to-site server connection appears on the Server list.

The next step is the client configuration which has to take place on client side and not on server side. Download the client configuration file with help of the provided button in the Server list.

Note: If you want to send the file via mail it is recommended to use the encryption option which is provided in the download dialog.

How to configure the client is described in the Client section.

Add SSL VPN Site-to-Site Client Connection

This page describes how to add a SSL VPN site-to-site client connection.

1. Go to Configure > VPN > SSL VPN (Site to Site) and click Add in the Client section.

2. Specify the client details:

Connection Name

Enter a descriptive name for the connection.

Description

Enter the description or other information.

Configuration File

Browse for the client configuration file and click Open.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 224

Note:

• The file has to be in .apc or .epc format.

• The file can be downloaded via the download icon in the Manage column of the server list on the System > VPN > SSL VPN (Site to Site) page.

Password (optional)

If the file has been encrypted, enter the password.

Use HTTP Proxy Server (optional)

Activate if the client is located behind a proxy server and enter the proxy settings:

• Proxy Server: Select or add a proxy server.

• Proxy Port: Enter a proxy port.

• Proxy Requires Authentication: Select the checkbox if the client needs to authenticate against the proxy and enter Username and Password.

Override Peer Hostname

Select the checkbox and add or select a Hostname if the server system’s regular hostname cannot be resolved from the client host.

Figure 173: Add SSL Client Connection

3. Click Save.

The new SSL VPN site-to-site client connection appears on the Client list.

CISCO

™

VPN Client

This page describes how to configure an Cisco VPN client.

CISCO

VPN Client is a software developed by CISCO that runs on Windows systems. It establishes encrypted

VPN tunnels with highly secured remote connectivity for the remote workers.

1. Go to Configure > VPN > Cisco VPN Client.

2. Specify the General Settings.

CISCO

™

VPN Client

Select to enable CISCO ™ VPN Client.

All the fields will be available for configuration, once CISCO

™

VPN Client is enabled.

Default: disabled.

Interface

Select an WAN port to act as endpoint.

IP Aliases created for WAN interfaces will be listed along with the default WAN interfaces.

Authentication Type

Select the authentication type.

Authentication of users depend on the connection type.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 225

Available Options:

• Preshared Key - Preshared key authentication is a mechanism whereby a single key is used for encryption and decryption. Both peers should possess the preshared key. The remote peer uses the preshared key for decryption. On selecting this option the user has to provide:

• Preshared Key – Specify the preshared key to be used. The preshared key should be of minimum 5 characters.

• Confirm Preshared Key – Provide the same preshared key to confirm it.

This preshared key will have to be shared or communicated to the peer at the remote end. At the remote end, the client will have to specify this key for authentication. If there is a mismatch in the key, the user will not be able to establish the connection.

• Digital Certificate: Digital certificate authentication is a mechanism whereby sender and receiver both use a digital certificate issued by the certificate authority. Both sender and receiver must have each other’s certificate authority.

• Local Certificate – Select the local certificate that should be used for authentication by the device

• Remote Certificate – Select the remote certificate that should be used for authentication by the remote peer.

Local ID (available only if Authentication Type selected is Preshared Key)

Specify a value for the local ID selected.

Available Options:

• DNS

• IP Address

• Email

• DER ASN1 DN (X.509)

Note: DER ASN1 DN(X.509) can not be used for Preshared Key authentication.

If Digital Certificate is selected, the ID and its value is displayed automatically as specified in the

Local Certificate.

Remote ID

Select a value for the remote ID selected.

Available Options:

• DNS

• IP Address

• Email

• DER ASN1 DN (X.509)

Note: DER ASN1 DN(X.509) can not be used for Preshared Key authentication.

Allowed User

Select all the users who are to be allowed to connect to the configured CISCO

™

VPN client.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 226

Figure 174: General Settings

3. Specify the Client Information.

Name

Enter a unique name for the connection.

Assign IP from

Specify the IP address range.

The device will lease the IP address to the Cisco

™

IPsec client from the specified IP address range.

Note: Do not configure the above IP address range in L2TP or PPTP configuration.

Allow leasing IP address from Radius server for L2TP, PPTP and CISCO VPN Client

Click to lease the IP address to the L2TP, PPTP and CISCO VPN client users through the Radius server.

Radius is a protocol that allows network devices to authenticate users against a central database. It can also store technical information used by network devices.

If enabled, the configured IP address is overridden with the IP address provided by the Radius server.

DNS Server 1

Provide a DNS server IP address to be pushed to CISCO VPN clients.

DNS Server 2

Provide a DNS server IP address to be pushed to CISCO VPN clients.

Figure 175: Client Information

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 227

4. Specify the Advanced Settings.

Disconnect when tunnel is idle

Click to allow the device to delete an idle VPN session if it exceeds the specified idle session time interval.

Idle session time interval (available only if Disconnect when tunnel is idle option is enabled)

Specify the time limit after which an idle VPN session will be deleted by the device.

Acceptable Range: 120 to 999

Apply

Click to accept and save the Cisco VPN client configuration.

Export Connection (available only if a Cisco VPN connection is configured)

Click to export Cisco VPN client configuration.

Once the .tgb file has been exported, it has to be passed to the client.

On the client side, the client needs the Sophos IPsec client to import the .tbg file and establish a connection to Sophos XG Firewall.

The Sophos IPsec VPN client may be downloaded from

https://www.sophos.com/en-us/support/utmdownloads.aspx

Note: You cannot export the connection when an external certificate is selected as

Remote Certificate.

Reset

Click to delete the entire Cisco VPN client configuration.

Figure 176: Advanced Settings

L2TP (Remote Access)

The L2TP Connections page displays a list of all the L2TP connections and you can sort the list based on the connection name. The page also provides the option to add a new connection, update existing connections, or delete a connection. The page displays the status of each connection as follows:

Connection Status

Active Connection

Description

Connection is active but not connected.

Click to initiate the connection.

Connection is active and connected.

Click to disconnect the connection. When you disconnect, the connection will be deactivated and to re-establish the connection, click again to activate the connection.

Connection is inactive. Click to activate the connection.

Add L2TP Connection

This page describes how to create an L2TP connection.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 228

1. Go to Configure > VPN > L2TP (Remote Access) and click Add.

2. Specify the General Settings.

Name

Enter a unique name for the L2TP connection.

Description

Enter a description for the L2TP connection.

Policy

Select a policy to be used for the connection.

A new policy can be added by clicking Create New.

Action on VPN Restart

Select the action to be taken on the connection when VPN services or the device restart.

Available Options:

• Respond Only – Keeps the connection ready to respond to any incoming request.

• Disable – Keeps the connection disabled until the user activates it.

Figure 177: General Settings

3. Specify the Authentication Details.

Authentication Type

Select the authentication type. Authentication of the user depends on the type of connection.

Available Options:

• Preshared Key – Preshared key authentication is a mechanism whereby a single key is used for encryption and decryption. Both peers should possess the preshared key. The remote peer uses the preshared key for decryption. On selecting this option the user shall has to provide the following details:

• Preshared Key – Specify the preshared key to be used. The preshared key should be of minimum 5 characters.

• Confirm Preshared Key – Provide the same preshared key to confirm it.

• Digital Certificate – Digital certificate authentication is a mechanism whereby sender and receiver both use a digital certificate issued by the certificate authority. Both sender and receiver must have each other’s certificate authority.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 229

• Local Certificate – Select the local certificate that should be used for authentication by the device.

• Remote Certificate – Select the remote certificate that should be used for authentication by the remote peer.

Figure 178: Authentication Details

4. Specify the Local Network Details.

Local WAN Port

Specify the local port number that the local VPN peer uses to transport traffic related to TCP or

UDP protocol.

Acceptable range: 1 to 65535

To specify any local port, enter *.

Local ID (available only if Authentication Type selected is Preshared Key)

Select any type of ID from the available options and specify its value.

Available Options:

• DNS

• IP Address

• Email

• DER ASN1 DN (X.509)

Note: DER ASN1 DN (X.509) can not be used for Preshared Key authentication.

If Digital Certificate is selected, the ID and its value is displayed automatically as specified in the

Local Certificate.

Figure 179: Local Network Details

5. Specify the Remote Network Details.

Remote Host

Specify the IP address or hostname of the remote end-point. Specify * for any IP address.

Allow NAT Traversal

Enable NAT traversal if a NAT device is located between your VPN endpoints i.e. when the remote peer has a private/non-routable IP address.

At a time only one connection can be established behind one NAT-box.

Remote LAN Network

Select an IP addresses and netmask of the remote network which is allowed to connect to the device server through a VPN tunnel. Multiple subnets can be specified. Select IP hosts from the list of IP hosts available on the Admin console.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 230

You can also add a new IP host by clicking Create New or on System > Hosts and Services > IP

Host.

Remote ID

Select any type of ID from the available options and specify its value.

Available Options:

• DNS

• IP Address

• Email

• DER ASN1 DN (X.509)

Note: DER ASN1 DN (X.509) can not be used for Preshared Key authentication.

Figure 180: Remote Network Details

6. Specify the Quick Mode Selectors.

Local Port

Specify local port number that the local VPN peer uses to transport the traffic related to TCP or

UDP protocol.

Default: 1701

Acceptable range: 1 to 65535

To specify any local port, enter *.

Remote Port

Specify remote port number that the remote VPN peer uses to transport the traffic related to TCP or

UDP protocol.

Default: *

Acceptable range: 1 to 65535

To specify any local port, enter *.

Figure 181: Quick Mode Selectors

7. Specify the Advanced Settings.

Disconnect when tunnel is idle

Click this option to allow the device to delete an idle VPN session if it exceeds the specified idle session time interval.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 231

Idle session time interval (available only if Disconnect when tunnel is idle is enabled)

Specify the time limit after which an idle VPN session will be deleted by the device.

Acceptable range: 120 to 999 seconds.

Figure 182: Advanced Settings

8. Click Save.

Clientless Access

Using clientless access, you can allow users to access services and areas on your network such as remote desktops and file shares using only a browser, and without the need for additional plug-ins. Clientless access policies specify users (members) and bookmarks. Users obtain access to your network through bookmarks on the VPN page in the user portal.

You can use this feature to provide multiple users access to resources that do not support multi-user access themselves

(for example, network hardware) or constrain access to a specific service rather than providing access to entire systems or networks.

Allowing Access to the User Portal From Outside Your Network

If you want to allow users outside your network to access the user portal, go to System > Administration > Device

Access and specify WAN access.

Clientless Access for Safari on Mac OSX or iOS

Follow the instructions in

How to access clientless bookmarks in iOS

to use clientless access on Safari on Mac OSX or iOS.

Add a Clientless Access Policy

To be able to configure a policy, you need to create at least one bookmark.

1. Go to Configure > VPN > Clientless Access and click Add.

2. Type a name.

3. For Policy Members, click Add New Item and select the users or groups who should have access to the bookmarks.

4. For Published Bookmarks, click Add New Item and select bookmarks or bookmark groups.

5. Specify other settings as required.

Option Description

Restrict Web Applications

When enabled, hide the Secure Web Browsing section in the user portal. This prevents users from being able to enter a URL and restricts them to the URLs specified in the bookmarks.

Bookmarks

Bookmarks are connections that specify a URL, a connection type, and any required security settings. You can use bookmarks with clientless access policies to give users access to your internal networks or services. For example, you may want to provide access to file shares or allow remote desktop access. Users can access bookmarks through the

VPN page in the user portal.

Bookmarks support several secure and non-secure connection types, or protocols.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 232

Add a Bookmark

1. Go to Configure > VPN > Bookmarks and click Add.

2. Type a name.

3. Select a type (protocol).

Note: If you select a secure type, you must specify security settings.

Option

HTTPS

HTTP

RDP

Description

Secure browser-based access to web applications using the Hypertext Transfer Protocol.

Bookmarks of this type support referred domains.

These are domains or URLs that contain formatting information or scripts (for example, CSS or JavaScript) that are required to render the bookmarked URL appropriately.

Non-secure browser-based access to web applications using the Hypertext Transfer Protocol.

Access to remote desktops using the Remote Desktop

Protocol.

TLS, NLA, and RDP protocol security is supported.

Your security settings must comply with the server settings.

TELNET

SSH

FTP

FTPS

SFTP

SMB

VNC

Terminal access using the Telnet protocol.

Secure terminal access using Secure Socket Shell.

Non-secure access to servers using the File Transfer

Protocol.

Secure access to servers using the File Transfer

Protocol. Security is provided by TLS and SSL.

Secure access to servers using the Secure File Transfer

Protocol. Security is provided by SSH.

Access to servers using the Server Message Block file sharing protocol.

Remote access to Linux/UNIX hosts using Virtual

Network Computing.

Classic VNC authentication (password only) is supported.

4. Type the URL of the website or the IP address of the server to which you want to provide access.

Note: Changing the default port number is advisable for advanced users only.

5. Specify security settings as required.

• For SSH: Specify a user name and paste the public host key.

• For FTPS: Paste the public host key.

• For SFTP: Type a user name and select an authentication method. Specify a password and paste keys as required.

6. Optionally, activate Automatic Login and specify credentials as required.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 233

When enabled, users do not need to provide login credentials. The session will be established using the specified credentials.

If Automatic Login is disabled, authentication works as follows:

Option

VNC

RDP

SMB

Description

Users will be presented a dialog box asking for the

VNC password.

Users will be presented a Windows login screen.

FTP(S)

SF-OS tries to log in as guest user. For this to work, you must have set up the guest user account on the target server.

Username “anonymous” and password “anonymous” is used.

7. Specify other settings as required.

Option

Share Session

Description

Domain

Init Remote Folder

When enabled, users can use the same connection simultaneously, allowing them to see the same screen.

Domain that the user is allowed to access.

Remote directory. After successful authentication, the user is redirected to the specified folder on the remote server.

Bookmark Groups

Bookmark groups allow you to combine bookmarks for easy reference. For example, you can create a group containing all of the bookmarks for remote desktops so that you do not need to specify access on an individual basis.

Related tasks

Add a Clientless Access Policy

on page 231

Add a Bookmark Group

1. Go to Configure > VPN > Bookmark Groups and click Add.

2. Enter a name.

3. Click Add New Item and select bookmarks.

Figure 183: Add Bookmark Group

PPTP (Remote Access)

This page describes how to configure PPTP remote access.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 234

The Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol allows organizations to extend their own private network through private tunnels over the public Internet.

The device supports several authentication options including Password Authentication Protocol (PAP), Challenge

Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP), and Microsoft Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol (MS-

CHAPv2).

The PPTP (Remote Access) page provides options to configure the device as PPTP server and enable/disable remote access through PPTP to various users.

1. Go to Configure > VPN > PPTP (Remote Access).

2. Click to enable PPTP.

3. Specify the General Settings.

Assign IP from

Specify IP address range. PPTP server will lease IP address to the PPTP client from the specified IP address range. The PPTP client uses the assigned IP address as its source address for the duration of the connection.

Do not specify the same IP address range in L2TP configuration and PPTP configuration.

Allow leasing IP Address from Radius server for L2TP, PPTP and CISCO VPN Client

Click to lease the IP address to the PPTP users through the Radius server.

Radius server is a protocol that allows network devices to authenticate users against a central database. It can also store technical information used by network devices.

If enabled, the configured IP address is overridden with the IP address provided by the Radius server.

Figure 184: General Settings

4. Specify the Client Information.

Primary DNS Server

Select the DNS server to be used at the client end.

Secondary DNS Server

Select the alternate DNS server to be used at the client end.

Primary WINS Server

Specify the WINS server to be used at the client end.

Secondary WINS Server

Specify the alternate WINS server to be used at the client end.

Figure 185: Client Information

5. Click Apply to save the configuration.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 235

6. Use the other buttons if required.

Add Member(s) (available only if PPTP is configured)

Click to select users who are to be allowed remote access through PPTP.

Show Members (available only if PPTP is configured)

Click to view a list of PPTP members.

Related tasks

Add PPTP Member

The Add PPTP Member page allows you to select users who are to be allowed remote access through PPTP.

1. Go to Configure > VPN > PPTP (Remote Access) and click Add Member(s) to add users or user groups. A new window is displayed showing a list of users and user groups.

2. Select users or user groups who are to be allowed remote access through PPTP. You can add a single or multiple users or user groups.

3. Click Apply to add these users and user groups to the PPTP members list.

PPTP Members

The PPTP Members page allows you to view list of PPTP members and remove members for whom remote access through PPTP is to be disabled.

1. Go to Configure > VPN > PPTP (Remote Access) and click Show Members to view a list of PPTP members. A new window is displayed showing a list of PPTP users who who are allowed access through the PPTP connection.

2. Select the users for whom you want to disable PPTP access. You can select multiple users or user groups.

3. Click Delete.

IPsec Profiles

This IPsec Profiles page displays a list of all preconfigured and custom IPsec policies.

A policy describes the security parameters used for negotiations to establish and maintain a secure tunnel between two peers.

Before you set up your secure tunnels, to make their configuration faster and easier, you can create VPN policies that work on a global level. Rather than configuring the policy parameters for every tunnel you create, you can configure general policies and then later apply them to your secure tunnels.

Click Show Configuration to show all configuration tabs.

Authentication mode

To ensure secure communication, there are two phases to every IKE (Internet Key Exchange) negotiation - Phase 1

(Authentication) and Phase 2 (Key exchange).

The Phase 1 negotiation establishes a secure channel between peers and determines a specific set of cryptographic protocols, exchanges shared secret keys and encryption algorithm that will be used for generating keys.

The Phase 2 negotiation establishes a secure channel between peers to protect data. During Phase 2 negotiation, the protocol security association for the tunnel is established. Either of the peers can initiate Phase 1 or Phase 2 renegotiation at any time. Both can specify intervals after which to negotiate.

Key life

Lifetime of key is specified as key life.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 236

Once the connection is established after exchanging authenticated and encrypted keys, connection is not dropped till the key life. If the key life of both the peers is not same then negotiation will take place whenever the key life of any one peer is over. This means intruder has to decrypt only one key to break in your system.

Key generation and key rotation are important because the longer the life of the key, the larger the amount of data at risk, and the easier it becomes to intercept more ciphered text for analysis.

Perfect Forward Secrecy (PFS)

It becomes difficult for a network intruder to get the big picture if keys are changing and they have to keep cracking keys for every negotiation. This is achieved by implementing PFS. By selecting PFS, new key will be generated for every negotiation and a new DH key exchange is included. So every time intruder will have to break yet another key even though he already knows the key. This enhances security.

Diffie-Hellman (DH) Group (IKE group)

Diffie-Hellman is a public-key cryptography scheme that allows peers to establish a shared secret over an insecure communications channel. Diffie-Hellman Key Exchange uses a complex algorithm and public and private keys to encrypt and then decrypt the data.

The Diffie-Hellmann Group describes the key length used in encryption. Group number is also termed as Identifiers.

DH Group

Key length (bits)

768

1024

1536

2048

3072

4096

If mismatched groups are specified on each peer, negotiation fails. The group cannot be switched during the negotiation.

Re-key Margin

Time before the next key is exchanged. Time is calculated by subtracting the time elapsed since the last key exchange from the key life. By turning Re-keying ‘Yes’, negotiation process starts automatically without interrupting service before key expiry.

Dead Peer Detection settings

Use to check whether device is able to connect the IP Address or not. Set time interval after which the status of peer is to be checked and what action to take, if peer is not alive.

Tunnel Negotiation

Negotiation process starts to establish the connection when local or remote peer wants to communicate with each other. Depending on the connection parameters defined, the key is generated which is used for negotiations. Lifetime of key is specified as Key life. Once the connection is established, connection is alive/active and data can be transferred up to the specified key life. Connection will be closed/deactivated once the key expires.

If the connection is to be activated again then the entire negotiation process is to be started all over again. Negotiation process can be started again automatically by either local or remote peer only if Allow Re-keying is set to ‘Yes’.

Set the re-keying time in terms of the remaining key life when negotiation is to be started automatically without interrupting the communication before key expiry. For example, if key life is 8 hours and Re-key margin time is 10 minutes then negotiation process will automatically start after 7 hours 50 minutes of key usage.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 237

Negotiation process will generate new key only if Perfect Forward Secrecy (PFS) is set to ‘Yes’. PFS will generate a new key from scratch and there will be no dependency between old and new key.

Re-keying

Yes

Result

Local and remote peer both will be able to initiate request for connection. Depending on PFS, negotiation process will use same key or generate a new key.

Only remote peer will be able to initiate request for connection. Depending on PFS, negotiation process will use same key or generate a new key.

Device provides 5 default policies and you can also create a custom policy to meet your organization’s requirement.

To make VPN connection configuration an easy task, following five preconfigured VPN policies are included for the frequently used VPN deployment scenarios:

• Road warrior

• L2TP

• Head office connectivity

• Branch office connectivity

• Default

It also provides option to add a new policy, update the parameters of an existing policy, or delete the policy. Instead of creating a policy from scratch, you can also create a new policy based on the already created policy by duplicating its parameters.

Duplicate - Click the icon in the Manage column against the VPN Policy to be duplicated. The Add VPN Policy window is displayed which has the same values for parameters as the existing policy. Click OK to add a new policy with modification in values for parameters.

Note: The default policy can be updated but cannot be deleted.

Create a New IPsec Policy

This page describes how to quickly configure a new IPsec policy.

The Add IPsec Policy menu allows you to manually enter details to add a IPsec policy.

1. Go to Configure > VPN > IPsec Profiles and click Add.

2. Specify the General Settings details.

Name

Enter a unique name for the IPsec policy.

Description

Enter a description for the IPsec policy.

Key exchange

Select an Internet Key Exchange (IKE) version to be used.

Authentication Mode

Select an authentication mode. It is used for exchanging authentication information.

Available Options:Main Mode - Executes the Diffie-Hellman Key Exchange in three twoway exchanges.Aggressive Mode - Executes the Diffie-Hellman Key Exchange in one two-way exchange. A tunnel can be established faster as fewer messages are exchanged during authentication and no cryptographic algorithm is used to encrypt the authentication information. Use this option when the remote peer has dynamic IP addresses.

Note: Aggressive Mode is insecure and, therefore, not recommended.

Key Negotiation Tries

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 238

Specify maximum number of key negotiation trials. Set to 0 for unlimited.

Allow Re-keying

Enable re-keying to start the negotiation process automatically before the key expires. The negotiation can be initiated by the local or remote peer. Depending on PFS, the negotiation will use the same key or generate a new key.

Pass Data In Compressed Format

Enable to pass data in compressed format to increase throughput.

SHA2 with 96-bit truncation (available only for IKEv1)

Enable for truncation of SHA2 to 96 bits.

Figure 186: General Settings

3. Specify the Phase 1 and Phase 2 details.

Key Life

Lifetime of the key, in seconds.

Re-key Margin

Time, in seconds, of the remaining life of the key after which the negotiation process should be re-attempted. For example, if the key life is 8 hours, and the re-key margin is 10 minutes, the negotiation process will start after 7 hours and 50 minutes.

Randomize Re-Keying Margin by

Factor by which the re-keying margin is randomized. For example, if the key life is 8 hours, the rekey margin is 10 minutes, and the randomization is set to 20%, the negotiation attempts will start after 8 minutes and end at 12 minutes.

Algorithm

Combination of algorithms to use for encryption and authentication for the Diffie-Hellman Key

Exchange. You can specify one or more combinations.

Note: The remote peer must be configured to use at least one of the defined algorithm combinations.

DH Group (Key Group)

Diffie-Hellman Group to use for encryption. The group specifies the key length used for encryption.

Note: The remote peer must be configured to use the same group.

Dead Peer Detection

Enable to check at specified interval to see whether peer is active.

Check Peer After Every (only if the Dead Peer Detection option is enabled)

Interval, in seconds, at which peer is checked.

Wait For Response Up to (only if the Dead Peer Detection option is enabled)

Time, in seconds, to wait for a peer response. If the response is not received within the specified interval, the peer is considered inactive.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 239

Action When Peer Unreachable (only if the Dead Peer Detection option is enabled)

Specify the action to take when peer is determined to be inactive.

4. Click Save.

SSL VPN

This page describes how to configure general SSL VPN settings.

The SSL VPN tab allows you to define parameters requested for remote access such as protocols, server certificates and IP addresses for SSL clients. The SSL VPN client supports most business applications such as native Outlook, native Windows file sharing, and many more.

1. Go to Configure > VPN > SSL VPN.

2. Specify the SSL VPN Settings.

Protocol

Select the protocol to use. You can choose either TCP or UDP. UDP is recommended because it provides a better performance.

SSL Server Certificate

Select a local SSL certificate to be used by the SSL VPN server to identify itself against the clients.

Default: ApplianceCertificate

Note: The SSL VPN server does not support self-signed certificates that are not approved by a CA (which is not identical to the Generate self-signed certificate option in the Certificate section.)

Override Hostname

Here you can set the server IP address for client VPN connection. Usually this should be the external IP address of Sophos XG Firewall.

IPv4 Lease Range

Set an IP address range which is used to distribute IP addresses to the SSL clients. This should be a private IP address range.

Default Range: 10.81.234.5 to 10.81.234.55

Subnet Mask

Select a netmask for the IP address range above. The netmask must not be greater than 29 bits, because OpenVPN cannot handle address ranges whose netmask is /30, /31, or /32. The netmask is limited to a minimum of 16.

IPv6 Lease (IPv6/Prefix)

If you want to lease IPv6 addresses to clients, set the IPv6 prefix in the first field and the netmask in the last field.

You then also have to select the option IPv4 and IPv6 both in parameter Lease Mode.

Lease Mode

Select if you want to only lease IPv4 addresses to SSL clients or both IPv4 and IPv6 addresses.

IPv4 DNS

Specify up to two IPv4 DNS servers, primary and secondary, of your organization.

IPv4 WINS

Specify up to two IPv4 WINS servers, primary and secondary, of your organization.

Windows Internet Naming Service (WINS) is Microsoft’s implementation of NetBIOS Name Server

(NBNS) on Windows operating systems. Effectively, WINS is to NetBIOS names what DNS is to domain names—a central mapping of hostnames to IP addresses.

Domain Name

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 240

Enter the hostname of your Sophos XG Firewall as a Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN). The

FQDN is an unambiguous domain name that specifies the node’s absolute position in the DNS tree hierarchy, for example sf.example.com. A hostname may contain alphanumeric characters, dots, and hyphens. At the end of the hostname there must be a TLD (top level domain) such as com, org, or de. The hostname will be used in notification messages to identify the Sophos XG Firewall.

Disconnect dead peer after

Enter a time limit in seconds after which a dead connection will be terminated by Sophos XG

Firewall.

Default: 180 seconds.

Disconnect idle peer after

Enter a time limit in minutes when an idle connection will be terminated.

Default: 15 minutes.

Figure 187: SSL VPN Settings

3. Specify the Cryptographic Settings.

Encryption Algorithm

Specify the algorithm used for encrypting the data sent through the VPN tunnel. The following algorithms are supported and all in Cipher Block Chaining (CBC) mode:

• DES-EDE3-CBC

• AES-128-CBC (128 bit)

• AES-192-CBC (192 bit)

• AES-256-CBC (256 bit)

• BF-CBC (Blowfish (128 bit))

Authentication Algorithm

Key Size

• SHA-1 (160 bit)

• SHA2 256 (256 bit)

• SHA2 384 (384 bit)

• SHA2 512 (512 bit)

• MD5 (128 bit)

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 241

The key size (key length) is the length of the Diffie-Hellman key exchange. The longer this key is, the more secure the symmetric keys are. The length is specified in bits. You can choose between a key size of 1024 or 2048 bits.

Key Lifetime

Enter a time period after which the key will expire.

Default: 28,800 seconds

Figure 188: SSL VPN Cryptographic Settings

4. Specify the Compression Settings.

Compress SSL VPN Traffic

If enabled, all data sent through SSL VPN tunnels will be compressed prior to encryption.

5. Specify the Debug Settings.

Enable Debug Mode

When enabling debug mode, the SSL VPN log file will contain extended information useful for debugging purposes.

6. Click Apply.

L2TP

This page describes how to enable and configure settings for L2TP connections.

Following is a description of the settings of this page:

1. Go to Configure > VPN > L2TP.

2. Click to enable L2TP.

3. Specify the General Settings.

Assign IP from

Set an IP address range which is used to distribute IP addresses to L2TP clients. This should be a private IP address range.

Allow leasing IP address from RADIUS server for L2TP, PPTP and CISCO VPN Client

If this option is enabled and if the user is authenticated via a RADIUS server, the configured IP address (static or leased from the IP address range) is overridden with the IP address provided by the RADIUS server. If no IP addresses are configured on the RADIUS server, the static IP address configured for the user will be assigned, else an IP address will be leased from configured IP address range.

4. Specify the Client Information.

Primary DNS Server

Select the DNS server to be used at the client end.

Secondary DNS Server

Select the alternate DNS server to be used at the client end.

Primary WINS Server

Specify the WINS server to be used at the client end.

Secondary WINS Server

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 242

Specify the alternate WINS server to be used at the client end.

5. Click Apply to save the configuration.

6. Use the other buttons if required.

Add Member(s) (available only if L2TP is configured)

Click to select users who are to be allowed remote access through L2TP.

Show Members (available only if L2TP is configured)

Click to view a list of L2TP members.

Related tasks

Add L2TP Member

on page 242

Show/Remove L2TP Member

on page 242

Add L2TP Member

This page describes how to add an L2TP member.

Before you can add L2TP members, L2TP must be enabled. See chapter

L2TP

on page 241.

1. Go to Configure > VPN > L2TP and click Add Member(s) at the bottom of the page.

2. Select users and groups from the table who would use L2TP to connect to the device.

3. Click Add.

All selected entries will be added as LT2P members.

Related tasks

L2TP

on page 241

This page describes how to enable and configure settings for L2TP connections.

Show/Remove L2TP Member

on page 242

Show/Remove L2TP Member

This page describes how to see which users or groups are members of L2TP and how to remove L2TP members.

Before you can view L2TP members, L2TP must be enabled. See chapter

L2TP

on page 241.

1. Go to Configure > VPN > L2TP and click Show Members at the bottom of the page.

A dialog opens that shows all current members of L2TP.

2. Select users or groups from the table that should be removed as L2TP members.

3. Click Delete.

All selected entries will be removed as L2TP members.

Related tasks

L2TP

on page 241

This page describes how to enable and configure settings for L2TP connections.

Add L2TP Member

on page 242

Routing

This section provides options to configure both static and dynamic routes.

Available configurations:

•

Static Routing

- Allows to configure packets redirection to a destination other than the configured default gateway.

•

Policy Routing

- Allows to configure Policy routes.

•

Gateways

- Allows to configure IPv4/IPv6 gateways.

•

BGP

- Allows to configure and manage BGP routes.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 243

•

OSPF

- Allows to configure and manage OSPF routes.

•

Information

- Shows information and status of dynamic routes configured using RIP, OSPF, BGP or PIM-SM protocols.

•

Upstream Proxy

- Allows to configure parent proxy settings when the web traffic is blocked by the upstream gateway.

•

Multicast (PIM-SM)

- Allows to configure and manage PIM-SM routes.

•

RIP

- Allows to configure and manage RIP routes.

Static Routing

A route provides the device with the information it needs to forward a packet to a particular destination. A static route causes packets to be forwarded to a destination other than the configured default gateway.

By specifying through which interface the packet will leave and to which device the packet should be routed, static routes control the traffic exiting the device.

IP Multicast

Internet Protocol (IP) multicast is a bandwidth-conserving technology that reduces traffic by simultaneously delivering a single stream of information to thousands of recipients and homes. IP multicast delivers source traffic to multiple receivers without adding any additional burden on the source or the receivers.

Applications like videoconferencing, corporate communications, distance learning, and distribution of software, stock quotes, and news use IP multicasting.

If IP multicast is not used, the source is required to send more than one copy of a packet or individual copy to each receiver. In such case, high-bandwidth applications like video or stock where data is to be send more frequently and simultaneously, uses large portion of the available bandwidth. In these applications, the only efficient way of sending information to more than one receiver simultaneously is by using IP multicast.

Multicast Group

Multicast is based on the concept of a group. An arbitrary group of receivers expresses an interest in receiving a particular data stream. This group does not have any physical or geographical boundaries - the hosts can be located anywhere on the Internet. Hosts that are interested in receiving data flowing to a particular group must join the group.

Hosts must be a member of the group to receive the data stream.

IP Multicast Addresses

Multicast addresses specify an arbitrary group of IP hosts that have joined the group and want to receive traffic sent to this group.

IP Class D Addresses

The Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA) controls the assignment of IP multicast addresses. Multicast addresses fall in class D address space ranging from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255.

This address range is only for the group address or destination address of IP multicast traffic. The source address for multicast datagram is always the unicast source address.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 244

Multicast forwarding

With multicast forwarding, a router forwards multicast traffic to networks where other multicast devices are listening.

Multicast forwarding prevents the forwarding of multicast traffic to networks where there are no nodes listening.

For multicast forwarding to work across inter-networks, nodes and routers must be multicast-capable.

A multicast-capable node must be able to:

• Send and receive multicast packets.

• Register the multicast addresses being listened to by the node with local routers, so that multicast packets can be forwarded to the network of the node.

IP multicasting applications that send multicast traffic must construct IP packets with the appropriate IP multicast address as the destination IP address. IP multicasting applications that receive multicast traffic must inform the TCP/

IP protocol that they are listening for all traffic to a specified IP multicast address.

Manage Static Routes

Static Routing menu allows configuring a unicast route and a multicast route. This page describes the available elements.

IPv4 Unicast Route

The IPv4 Unicast Route section displays a list of all the configured IPv4 unicast routes. You can filter the list based on

IP address, gateway, or interface. The page also provides the option to Add a route, update the route configuration and

Delete the route.

IPv6 Unicast Route

The IPv6 Unicast Route section displays a list of all the configured IPv6 unicast routes. You can filter the list based on

IP address, gateway, or interface. The page also provides the option to Add a route, update the route configuration and

Delete the route.

Multicast Forwarding Setting

Enable Multicast Forwarding

Enable/disable multicast forwarding. Enable and click Apply to allow the router to forward packets to other networks where other multicast devices are active and listening.

Manage Multicast Route

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 245

The Manage Multicast Route section displays a list of all the configured multicast routes. You can filter the list based on source IP, multicast IP, source interface and destination interface. The page also provides the option to Add a route, update the route configuration and Delete the route.

Add Unicast Route

1. For an IPv4 unicast route, go to Configure > Routing > Static Routing and click Add under IPv4 Unicast

Route. For an IPv6 unicast route, click Add under IPv6 Unicast Route.

2. Enter unicast route details.

Destination IP/Prefix

Specify the destination IPv4 or IPv6 address and select the prefix of subnet mask from the dropdown list.

Gateway

Specify the gateway IPv4 or IPv6 address. The gateway address specifies the next-hop router to which traffic will be routed.

Interface

Select an interface from the drop-down list.

Distance

Specify the distance for routing.

For IPv4

For IPv6

Default: 0

Acceptable Range: 0 to 255

Default: 1

Acceptable Range: 1 to 255

Figure 189: IPv4 Unicast Route

Figure 190: IPv6 Unicast Route

3. Click Save.

The unicast route has been created and appears on the Static Routing page.

Add Multicast Route

1. Go to Configure > Routing > Static Routing and click Add under Manage Multicast Route.

2. Enter multicast route details.

Source IPv4 Address

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 246

Specify the source IPv4 address.

Source Interface

Select the source interface from the drop-down list.

Multicast IPv4 Address

Specify the multicast IPv4 address. For example, (224.0.2.0 - 239.255.255.255)

Destination Interface

Select destination interface(s) from the available options. You can select more than one destination interface.

Figure 191: Add Multicast Route

3. Click Save.

Policy Routing

Routers generally forward packets to the destination addresses based on the information available in their routing tables. With Policy Routing, you can make routing decisions based on the policies configured by the administrator.

You can selectively forward the packets based on different criteria such as source network, destination network, services and so on. If the packet matches the criteria defined in the policy routing then the packet will be forwarded to the gateway configured in the policy.

Firewall Rule can still override policy route decision, if primary and/or backup gateway is configured.

Benefits of Policy Routing include:

• Packets originating from different source networks and having same destination can be routed to different networks.

• You can distribute traffic requiring high bandwidth to use different Internet connection.

• You can implement policies to achieve failover/failback. For example: If you have two links MPLS and VPN link and if MPLS link fails then you can route your traffic that matches the policy to VPN link. When the MPLS link comes up, then traffic can be failed back to MPLS link.

Note: When device firmware is upgraded to SF-OS v16, source routes will be migrated as policy routes.

Manage Policy Route

This page displays a list of all the configured IPv4 and IPv6 policy routes.

You can also reorder the policy routes. To change the processing order, you can reorder policy routes by drag and drop action. Policy routes are evaluated top down in the order they appear on the Manage page until first match is made, after which subsequent policy routes are not evaluated.

The page also displays the status Up or Down for the gateways configured in the policy route.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 247

Add Policy Route

1. Go to Configure > Routing > Policy Routing and click Add under IPv4/IPv6 Policy Route section.

2. Specify the Policy Route details.

Name

Specify a name for policy route.

Description

Specify a description for policy route.

Figure 192: About this Policy Route

3. Specify the Traffic Selector details.

Incoming Interface

Select the incoming interface receiving the packet.

Note: Deleting the incoming interface will also delete the policy route defined for the interface.

Source Networks

Select the source network(s) of the packet to be routed. A new network host can be created directly from this page itself or from System > Hosts and Services.

Destination Networks

Select the destination network(s) of the packet to be routed. A new network host can be created directly from this page itself or from System > Hosts and Services.

Services

Select the services(s) of the packet to be routed. These services allow you to specify precisely which kind of traffic should be processed. A new service/service group can be created directly from this page itself or from System > Hosts and Services.

DSCP Marking

Select the type of DSCP Marking to match the packets marked with the given DSCP value.

For available options, refer to

DSCP Values

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 248

Figure 193: Traffic Selector

4. Specify the Routing details.

Gateway

Select the gateway to which you want to forward the packet if the packet meets the configured matching criteria.

Note:

• Deleting the gateway will also delete the policy route defined for the gateway.

• Policy route is not applied when gateway goes down. As soon as the gateway comes up again, traffic is routed through the gateway automatically.

Figure 194: Routing

5. Click Save.

Gateways

The Gateway page displays a list of configured IPv4 and IPv6 gateways. The page also displays the status Up or Down for each gateway. You can add/delete/clone gateway, change the gateway parameters/status and enable health check for the gateway.

Add a Gateway

1. Go to Configure > Routing > Gateways and click Add.

2. Enter Gateway details.

Name

Enter the name of the gateway.

Gateway IP

Enter the IP address of the gateway.

Interface

Select the Out interface for the gateway.

Default NAT Policy

Select the default NAT policy to be used for the gateway.

Select None, if NAT policy should not be applied on the gateway.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 249

Figure 195: Gateway Host

3. Enter Health Check details

Health Check

Click to enable health check for monitoring the gateway and specify the parameters based on the description shown below.

Interval (in seconds)

Specify the time interval in seconds after which the health should be monitored.

Acceptable Range: 5 to 65535 seconds

Default: 60 seconds

Timeout (in seconds)

Specify the time interval in seconds within which the gateway must respond.

Acceptable Range: 1 to 10 seconds

Default: 2 seconds

Retries

Specify the number of tries to probe the health of the gateway, after which the gateway will be declared unreachable.

Acceptable Range: 1 to 10

Default: 3

Mail Notification

Enable to receive an Email notification if there is a change in gateway status.

Note: You need to configure

Mail Server

for the device to send and receive alert

Emails.

Monitoring Condition

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 250

Protocol:From the drop-down list, select the communication protocol, such as TCP or PING

(ICMP). Select the protocol depending on the service to be tested for the gateway’s health.

Port: For TCP communication, specify the port number for communication.

IP Address: Specify the IP address of the computer or the network device which is permanently running or most reliable.

Operator:

• AND - All the conditions must be satisfied for the gateway to be considered alive.

• OR - At least one condition must be satisfied for the gateway to be considered alive.

A protocol request is sent to the given IP address. If the IP address does not respond to the request within the timeout interval then given number of retries are attempted. If it still does not respond then the device considers the IP address as unreachable.

Figure 196: Health Check

BGP

This page allows you to manage BGP routes.

Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) is a path vector protocol that contains path information, enabling the routers to share routing information between autonomous systems (AS) so that loop-free routes can be created. This protocol is generally used by ISPs.

An AS is a connected group of networks or routers under the control of single administrative entity and share common routing policies. A unique AS number is assigned to each AS to uniquely identify them. AS number enables information exchange between neighboring autonomous systems. You should use private AS numbers if you don’t require a unique AS number. BGP private AS-numbers range from 64512 to 65535.

BGP selects a single path from the multiple advertisements received from multiple sources for the same route. When the path is selected, BGP puts it in the IP routing table and passes the path to its neighbor.

Global Configuration

Router ID

Specify router ID for BGP.

Example: 12.34.5.66.

Local AS

Specify Local Autonomous System (AS) number.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 251

Acceptable Range: 1 to 4294967295

Figure 197: Global Configuration

Neighbors

Neighbors are the routers between which a TCP connection is established. In this section, you can

add

, update, or delete neighbors.

Networks

This section list all available BGP networks togegher with their corresponding netmasks. You can

add

, update, or

delete networks.

Add BGP Network

1. Go to Configure > Routing > BGP and click Add in the section Networks.

2. Enter the IPv4 address of the network and select a subnet mask from the dropdown list.

Figure 198: Add BGP Network

3. Click Save.

Add Neighbor

This page allows you to add a BGP neighbor and specify an IPv4 address of the neighbor router and AS number.

1. Go to Configure > Routing > BGP and click Add in the section Neighbors.

2. Specify the IPv4 address of the neighbor router.

3. Specify the remote autonomous system (AS) number of the neighbor.

Acceptable Range: 1 to 4294967295

Figure 199: Add BGP Neighbor

4. Click Save.

OSPF

This page allows you to manage OSPF routes. You can also add, update, or delete the areas/networks/interfacespecific configuration from this page.

Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) is an interior gateway protocol that multicasts the routing information to all the hosts within a single network. It sends routing information to all the routers in the network by calculating the shortest path to each router on the basis of the structure built up by each router.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 252

OSPF allows sets of networks to be grouped together into what is known as areas. Area is a logical division of a network. Each area maintains a separate database whose information may be summarized by the connecting router.

Hence, the topology of an area is not known to the outside world. There are three types of areas:

Backbone Area

Backbone area also known as area 0, distributes information between non-backbone areas. All other areas in the network are connected to it and the routing between areas takes place using routers which are connected to the backbone area as well as to their respective areas.

Stub Area

A stub area is an area that do not receive route advertisements external to the Autonomous System (AS), which is a collection of networks under a common network operator that share same routing policy.

NSSA

A Not-so-stubby-area (NSSA) is a type of stub area that can import AS external routes in a limited amount.

Area Border Router

An Area Border Router (ABR) is a router that connects areas to the backbone network and maintains separate routing information for each area that it is connected to. It has interfaces in more than one area with at least one interface in the backbone area.

Global Configuration

Router ID

Specify a unique router ID.

Example: 12.34.5.66.

Figure 200: Global Configuration

Advanced Settings

Default Metric

Specify the default metric value to be used for redistributed routes.

Metric is a property that contains a value used by a routing protocol to decide whether a particular route should be taken or not.

Default: 1

Acceptable Range: 1 to 16777214

ABR Type

Select the type of Area Border Router (ABR).

Available Options:

• Standard

• CISCO

• IBM

• Shortcut

Auto cost reference bandwidth (Mbits/s)

Specify the cost reference to calculate the OSPF interface cost based on bandwidth.

Default: 100 Mbits/s

Acceptable Range: 1 to 4294967

Default Information Originate

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 253

Select an option to control the distribution of the default route.

Available Options:

• Never

• Regular – On selecting Regular provide the metric and select the metric type.

• Always – On selecting Always provide the metric and select the metric type.

The default setting is Never.

Redistribute Connected

Click to enable the redistribution of connected routes into the OSPF routing table.

Specify the metric and the metric type for redistributing connected routes.

Acceptable Range: 0 to 16777214

Metric Type: External Type 1 or External Type 2.

Redistribute Static

Click to enable the redistribution of static routes into the OSPF routing table.

Specify the metric and the metric type for redistributing static routes.

Acceptable Range: 0 to 16777214

Metric Type: External Type 1 or External Type 2.

Redistribute RIP

Click to enable the redistribution of OSPF routes into OSPF routing table.

Specify the metric and the metric type for redistributing RIP routes.

Acceptable Range: 0 to 16777214

Metric Type: External Type 1 or External Type 2.

Redistribute BGP

Click to enable the redistribution of BGP routes into the OSPF routing table.

Specify the metric and the metric type for redistributing BGP routes.

Acceptable Range: 0 to 16777214

Metric Type: External Type 1 or External Type 2.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 254

Figure 201: Advanced Settings

Click Apply.

Networks and Areas

Networks

This section lists all available OSPF networks together with the corresponding netmasks and the area they belong to.

Areas

This section lists all available OSPF areas, specifies their types and authentication type, the area cost and, if available, virtual links.

Override Interface Configuration

You can manage the interface configuration from this section.

Add OSPF Areas

1. Go to Configure > Routing > OSPF and click Add in the Areas section.

2. Enter OSPF area details.

Area

Specify an IP address for the area.

Type

Select the type of OSPF area from the options available.

Available Options: NormalStub Stub No-SummaryNSSANSSA No-Summary

Virtual Links (Available only if Normal area type is selected)

Specify a virtual link for an area that does not have a physical connection to connect to the backbone area.

Use Add icon and Remove icon to add and remove virtual links.

Authentication

Select the type of authentication from the options available.

Available Options: TextMD5

Area Cost (Not Available for Normal area type)

Specify the area cost.

Acceptable Range: 0 to 16777215

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 255

Figure 202: Add OSPF Area

3. Click Save.

Add OSPF Network

1. Go to Configure > Routing > OSPF and click Add in the Networks section.

2. Enter the IPv4 address of the network and select a subnet mask from the dropdown list.

3. Enter an OSPF area.

Figure 203: Add OSPF Network

4. Click Save.

Override Interface Configuration

You can override default interface configurations of OSPF from this page.

1. Go to Configure > Routing > OSPF and click Select Interface in the Override Interface Configuration section.

2. Enter interface configuration details.

Interface

Select the interface to be configured for OSPF.

Hello Interval

Specify the time interval after which the interface sends hello packet to the neighbor router.

Default: 10 seconds

Acceptable Range: 1 to 65353 seconds

Dead Interval

Specify the time interval after which the interface is declared as dead.

Default: 40 seconds

Acceptable Range: 1 to 65353 seconds

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 256

Retransmit Interval

Specify the time interval for retransmitting the link state advertisements (LSA) to the interface’s neighbor.

Default: 5 seconds

Acceptable Range: 3 to 65353 seconds

Transmit Delay

Specify the time in seconds needed to transmit a link state update packet to the interface.

Default: 1 second

Acceptable Range: 1 to 65353 seconds

Interface Cost

Specify the interface cost.

You can either provide the interface cost automatically by selecting Auto or specify it manually.

Acceptable Range: 1 to 65353 seconds

Authentication

Select the type of authentication for authenticating the OSPF packets.

Available Options: Text - If Text is selected, provide a password for authentication. MD5 - If MD5 is selected, provide a key ID and a key. Key ID can be from 0 to 255.

Router Priority

Specify priority for a router.

Default: 1

Acceptable Range: 0 to 255

Figure 204: Override Interface Configuration

3. Click Save.

Information

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 257

Administrator can view various information and status of any dynamic routes configured using RIP, OSPF, BGP and

PIM-SM protocols. This overview of the dynamic route information will be useful for further configurations and/or debugging.

RIP

Routes

Displays the entire routing configuration information and the routing table for an interface configured using the RIP protocol.

Codes and Sub-codes

Codes

Sub-codes

Network

Next Hop

Metric

From

Shows how the destination routing information is obtained.

R – RIP, C – connected, S – Static, O – OSPF, B

– BGP, K – Kernel route.

(n) – normal, (s) – static, (d) – default, (r) – redistribute, (i) – interface

Specifies the IP address and subnet mask of the destination.

Specifies an IP address of the next hop routing device.

Specifies the number of routing devices (hop count) a packet must pass through to reach the final destination.

Indicates the router (router IP address) from which the metric is calculated to reach the destination.

If it is directly connected it will show self.

Tag

Indicates the method used for distinguishing between internal routes (learned by RIP) and external routes learned from External Gateway

Protocol (ERP) protocols.

0 indicates no tag is attached to the route.

Time

Indicates the elapsed time after which the routing entry will be flushed from the RIP table.

Status

Displays the RIP routing protocol process parameters and statistics.

Routing Protocol is “rip”

Sending updates

Next due

Timeout after

Garbage collect

Indicates the routing protocol used.

Indicates the time between sending updates.

Specifies when the next update is due to be sent.

Indicates the timeout interval for RIP route after which it is declared invalid and removed from the routing table until the garbage-collect time expires.

Indicates the time period during which the route metric is set to 16. If no updates are received for the route before the expiry of the garbage-

Outgoing update

Incoming update

Default redistribution metric

Redistributing

Default version control

Interface

Send

Recv

Key-chain

Routing for Network

Routing Information Sources

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 258 collect timer, a route with metric 16 is deleted from the routing table.

Indicates whether the outgoing filtering list has been set.

Indicates whether the incoming filtering list has been set.

Metric of routes that are redistributed from other routes.

Indicates the information about redistribution of other protocols.

Indicates the version of RIP packet that are sent and received.

Shows a RIP-enabled routing interface

Displays the version of RIP packets sent out to the routing interface. The version is one of the following: RIP1, RIP2

Displays the version of RIP packets accepted on the routing interface. The version is one of the following: RIP1, RIP2 , Both

Displayed the authentication key-chain name for the interface, if it is configured.

Indicates the networks for which the routing process is currently injecting routes.

Indicates the routing sources used to build the routing table. For each source, the following information is displayed.

Gateway

Indicates an IP address of the next hop routing device.

Bad Packets

Indicates the number of bad packets received by the router.

Bad Routes

Distance Last Update Indicates the time when the administrative distance was last updated.

Distance

Indicates the number of invalid routes from the router.

Indicates the administrative distance. The distance displayed by default is

120

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 259

OSPF

Border Routers

Displays the information about the internal OSPF routing table entries to an Area Border Router

(ABR) and Autonomous System Boundary Router (ASBR).

Network IP Address

Metric

Area

Next Hop

Outgoing Interface

Indicates that the information for the route is provided to a particular border router.

Indicates the router ID of the destination.

Specifies the cost to reach the final destination.

Indicates the area identifier of the outgoing interface.

Specifies the management IP address of the next hop routing device.

Indicates the name and IP address of the outgoing interface to reach the destination.

Routes

Displays the information about the internal OSPF routing table entries.

Network IP Address

Metric

Area

Next Hop

Directly attached

Outgoing Interface

Indicates that the information is provided for a network.

Indicates the router ID of the destination.

Specifies the cost to reach the final destination.

Indicates the area identifier of the outgoing interface.

Specifies the management IP address of the next hop routing device.

Indicates a network is directly connected to the interface.

Indicates the name and IP address of the outgoing interface to reach the destination.

Database

Database shows the list of information related to the OSPF database summary for a specific router.

Each link-state database includes link-state an advertisement from throughout the areas to which the router is attached.

Link ID

ADV Router

Indicates the ID of the link-state advertisement using which a router learns the route. In other words, while a link-state advertisement describes a router, the link-state ID router’s

OSPF router ID.

The link-state advertisement describing a network can have one of the following two formats of link-state ID: the network’s IP address or an address generated using the linkstate ID.

Indicates the advertising router ID of the destination.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 260

Age

Seq#

CkSum

Link count

Net Link States

Router Link States

Summary Net Link States

Indicates the time, in seconds, since the LSA was generated.

Link state sequence number (detects old or duplicate link-state advertisements).

Checksum of the complete content of the linkstate advertisement.

Number of interfaces detected for the router.

Gives information about network LSA originated by DR (designated router)

Gives information about router LSA originated by every router.

Indicates the information about summary LSA originated by ABR’s.

Neighbors (ARP - NDP)

Provides neighbor information based on peer-interface relation.

Neighbor ID

Pri

State

Indicates the neighbor router’s ID.

Indicates the router priority assigned to that neighbor.

Displays the conversation between router and neighbor since the neighbor was created. It can have one of the following values:

Down

Attempt

Init

Indicates the initial state of a neighbor conversation, that is, there has been no recent information received from the neighbor.

Valid only for neighbors attached to non-broadcast networks. Indicates that there has been no recent information received from the neighbor.

Indicates a hello packet has been received recently from a neighbor although the adjacency is not two-way, that is, a bi-directional communication has not yet been established with neighbor.

2-Way

ExStart

Exchange

Loading

Full

Backup

Dead time

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 261

Indicates that a bi-directional communication is established between the routers and the neighbor has included the router ID in its

Hello message. The

DR and BDR are elected from the set of neighbors in 2-way state or higher.

Indicates that the two routers are going to synchronize and determine which router will be master and which the slave.

Indicates that the two routers are describing their respective linkstate database by sending database description packets.

Indicates that link-state request packets are sent to the neighbor, requesting for more advertisements that have been discovered but are not yet received in Exchange state.

Indicates that both routers have accomplished the exchange of all the relevant advertisements and can now appear in router-link and neighbor-link advertisements.

Indicates that the neighbor is a backup designated router

The waiting time in seconds to receive a hello message from

OSPF neighbor before assuming the neighbor is dead.

Interface

Displays OSPF interface information.

Interface Value

IfIndex

MTU

Internet Address

Network Type/IP Address

Area

MTU mismatch detection

Router ID

Network Type

Address

Interface

RXmtL

RqstL

DBsmL

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 262

Specifies the IP address of the router’s interface with the neighbor.

Indicates the IP address of neighbor interface

Indicates the link-state retransmit count.

Indicates the link-state request count.

Indicates the link-state summary count.

Indicates the status of the physical interface, that is, whether the interface is up or down.

Indicates the value of interface index (IfIndex).

It is an identification unique number associated with an interface.

Indicates the Maximum Transmission Unit

(MTU) value of the interface.

MTU is the largest physical packet size, in bytes, that a network can transmit. This parameter becomes an issue when networks are interconnected and the networks have different

MTU sizes. Any packets larger than the MTU value are divided (fragmented) into smaller packets before being sent.

Indicates the bandwidth of the interface.

Displays the IP address of the interface.

Indicates the type of the network along with the

IP address.

Indicates the IP address of the area identifier.

Indicates whether the MTU mismatch detection is enabled or disabled. If it is enabled, it would match the MTU of both the interfaces participating in neighborship establishment.

Indicates the identification number of the

OSPF router selected at the start of the OSPF process. The router ID is unique within the

OSPF domain and does not change unless OSPF restarts or is manually modified.

Indicates the type of network to which the OSPF interface is connected. A network can be one of the following types:

Cost

Transmit delay

State

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 263

Point-to-point

Point-to-Multipoint

(non-broadcast)

Broadcast

Non Broadcast

Multiple Access

(NBMA)

Displays the OSPF metric. It is calculated using formula: 10

[bps]) where

/ bandwidth (in bits per seconds

• 10

: is the reference bandwidth

• bandwidth: is the bandwidth of the interface in bps

Indicates the time in seconds which the OSPF router waits before flooding a link-state advertisement (LSA) over the link. The link state age is incremented by this value, before transmitting an LSA.

The default value of transmit delay is 1 second.

Indicates the current state of the specified interface. The state can be one of the following:

BDR

DROTHER

The router is a designated router

(DR) on the network.

The router is a backup designated router (BDR) on the network.

The router is neither a DR nor a BDR on the network

A point-to-point network can connect only two routers.

A point-to-multipoint network connects one router to several other routers.

Indicates a network that supports broadcast. In a broadcast network a single packet sent

(broadcasted) by a router is received by all the routers within the network.

Indicates that the network does not have the capability to broadcast or multicast. It is used to accurate model

X.25 and framerelay environment in multiple-access network.

Priority

Designated Router ID

Backup Designated Router ID

Saved Network-LSA sequence number

Multicast group membership

Timer intervals configured

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 264

Waiting

and it establishes adjacencies only with the DR and the BDR.

The interface router is in waiting to announce the state of the link as

DR.

Note: This state is normal in case of non broadcast multi access network.

Point-to-Point

The interface in pointto-point state is fully functional and starts exchanging hello packets with all its neighbors.

Point-to-Multipoint

Indicates the interface to be point-to multipoint for OSPF.

Indicates the priority of the interface router.

It assists in electing the DR and BDR on the network to which the interface is connected.

Default: 1

Note: A router with priority value 0 can never be a DR/BDR.

Indicates the DR router ID for the respective network.

Indicates the BDR router ID for the respective network

Indicates the network’s link-state sequence number. It is used to calculate shortest path first

(SPF).

Indicates the multicast group in which the router is a member.

Displays the value of following OSPF timers:

Hello

Dead

Wait

Time interval in seconds that a router sends a hello packet.

Indicates the waiting time in seconds before declaring a neighbor dead.

Displays the time interval that leads the

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 265

Retransmit

Hello Due In

Neighbor Count

Adjacent neighbor count

interface to terminate the waiting period and elect the DR on the network.

Displays the waiting time before retransmitting a database description

(DBD) packet if it has not been acknowledged earlier.

Specifies when the next hello packet is due to be sent.

Indicates the total number of discovered neighbors on the interface.

Indicates the total number of adjacent neighbors that are fully adjacent to the interface.

BGP

Neighbors (ARP - NDP)

Displays the information about the BGP and its peer connections and shows the number of routes advertised/neighbors to/from that peer.

BGP Neighbor

Remote AS

Local AS

Internal/External Link

BGP Version

Remote Router ID

BGP State

Last Read

Hold Time

Indicates the IP address of the BGP neighbor.

Indicates the AS number of the neighbor router.

Indicates the value of the configured local autonomous systems (AS).

Displays internal links for internal BGP (iBGP) neighbors and external link for external BGP

(eBGP).

Indicates BGP version used for communication with remote router.

Indicates router ID of the neighbor router.

Indicates the finite state machine (FSM) stage.

It describes what action should be taken by the BGP routing engine and when for session negotiation.

Displays the time, since BGP router last received a message from the neighbor. The time is displayed in HH:MM:SS format.

Displays the time in seconds, until which the

BGP will maintain the session with the neighbor without receiving any message from it.

Keepalive Interval

Message Statistics

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 266

Displays the time interval in seconds specifying how often the BGP router sends the keep-alive message to the neighbor.

Displays the statistics organized by message type.

InQ

OutQ

Sent

Received

Opens

Notifications

Updates

Keepalives

Route Refresh

Capability

Total

Indicates the number of messages that are in queue, pending to be processed from the neighbor.

Indicates the number of messages that are in queue, pending to be sent to the neighbor.

Indicates the number of messages sent to the neighbor.

Indicates the number of messages received from the neighbor.

Indicates the total number of open messages sent and received.

Indicates the total number of error notification messages sent and received.

Indicates the total number of update messages sent and received.

Indicates the total number of keep-alive messages sent and received.

Indicates the total number of route refresh messages sent and received.

Indicates the total number of BGP capabilities advertised and received from the neighbor.

Indicates the total number of messages sent and received.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 267

Minimum Time between advertisement runs Displays the time in seconds between the sent advertisements.

For Address Family

Community attribute sent to this neighbor

Indicates the IP address family.

Indicates the numerical value of the BGP community.

This numerical value is assigned to a specific prefix and advertised to the neighbor, based on which it decides whether to filter or modify attributes.

Accepted Prefix

Indicates the number of accepted prefixes that can participate in a BGP peer session.

Connections established

Indicates the number of times a TCP and a BGP connection has been established successfully.

Dropped

Indicates the number of times a valid session failed or has been taken down.

Last reset

Displays the time since when the previously established session with the neighbor ended.

Local host and Local port

Displays the IP address and port number of the local BGP router.

Foreign host and Foreign port

Displays the IP address of neighbor and BGP destination port number.

Next hop

Indicates the management IP address of the next hop routing device.

Next connect timer due in

Specifies when the next hello packet is due to be sent to the BGP neighbor.

Read Thread

Write Thread

Indicates if the read thread is ON or Off.

Indicates if the write thread is ON or Off.

Routes

Displays the entire routing configuration information and the routing table for an interface configured using the BGP protocol.

BGP Table Version

Local Router ID

Status codes and Origin codes

Indicates the table version number. The version number is updated with any change in the BGP table.

Indicates the IP address of the router.

Shows how the destination routing information is obtained.

Status Codes: A Status code indicates the status of the table entry and is displayed at the beginning of each line in the table. Status code value can be one of the following: s – suppressed, d –damped, h – history, *

– valid, > – best, i – internal, r – Routing

Information Base (RIB)-failure, S – Stale, R –

Removed.

Origin codes: An Origin code indicates the origin of the entry and is displayed at the end of

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 268

Network

Next Hop

Metric

LocPrf

Weight

Path

Total number of prefixes

each line in the table. Origin code value can be one of the following: i – Interior Gateway Protocol (IGP), e – Exterior

Gateway Protocol (EGP), ? – incomplete/path not clear.

Indicates the IP address and subnet mask of the destination.

Indicates the management IP address of the next hop routing device.

0.0.0.0 indicates the router has noon-BGP routes to the network.

Indicates the value of inter autonomous system metric.

Indicates the local preference value.

Local preference is one of the methods to change the path taken by one autonomous system (AS) to reach to another AS.

Local preference value indicates to AS about the path that has local preference, and one with the highest preference being preferred.

Indicates the route weight as set via autonomous system filters. If more than one path exists to a particular IP address, then the path with the highest weight is selected.

Indicates the autonomous system path to the destination network.

Indicates the total number of prefixes/networks.

Summary

Displays the status of all the BGP connections details such as path, prefixes and attributes information about all the connections to BGP neighbors.

BGP Router Identifier

Local AS Number

RIB entries

Memory

Peer

Memory

Neighbor

LocPrf

Indicates the router ID of the BGP router

Indicates the local autonomous system number to which this router belongs.

Indicates the number of routing information entries in RIB

Indicates the memory used by RIB entry/ies.

Indicates the number of neighbors with which the connection is established.

Indicates the memory used by neighbor entries.

Indicates the IP address of the neighbor.

Indicates BGP version number provided to the neighbor.

Indicates local preference value.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 269

MsgRcvd

MsgSent

TblVer

InQ

OutQ

Up/Down

State/PfxRcd

Total number of neighbors

Local preference is one of the methods to change the path taken by one autonomous system (AS) to reach to another AS.

Local preference value indicates to AS about the path that has local preference, and one with the highest preference being preferred.

Indicates the autonomous system number.

Indicates the number of messages received from the neighbor.

Indicates the number of messages sent to the neighbor.

Indicates the last version of the BGP database that was sent to the neighbor.

Indicates the number of messages that are in queue, pending to be processed from the neighbor.

Indicates the number of messages that are in queue, pending to be sent to the neighbor.

Indicates the total time of a BGP session to remain in established state, or gives the current status of BGP session, if it is not in established state.

Indicates the state of the neighbor and the number of prefixes received.

Indicates the total number of neighbors.

PIM-SM

Interface Table

Displays all the PIM enabled interfaces and the neighbor information of each interface.

Multicasting Routing Table

Displays the information of the multicast groups joined. The information includes the source address, multicast group address, the incoming interface from which packets are accepted, list of outgoing interfaces to which packets are sent, PIM timers, flag bits etc.

RP SET

Displays RP set information which is a collection of group-to-RP mappings. This information is used to determine the RP for a multicast group and is maintained by a PIM router.

Upstream Proxy

If your enterprise contains numerous internal branches, an upstream proxy can bundle the requests from the internal network before passing the traffic on to the external network/Internet.

This page allows you to configure an upstream proxy for IPv4/IPv6.

IPv4 Parent Proxy

Parent Proxy

Click to enable the parent proxy, if the web traffic is intercepted by an upstream gateway.

If enabled, the device forwards all the HTTP requests to the parent proxy server.

Domain Name/IPv4 Address

Specify a domain name or IPv4 address for the parent proxy.

Port

Specify the port number, which is to be used for the parent proxy.

Default: 3128

Username

Specify a username for authentication.

Password

Specify a password for authentication.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 270

Figure 205: IPv4 Parent Proxy

Click Apply.

IPv6 Parent Proxy

Parent Proxy

Click to enable the parent proxy. if the web traffic is intercepted by an upstream gateway.

If enabled, the device forwards all the HTTP requests to the parent proxy.

Domain Name/IPv6 Address

Specify a domain name or IPv6 address for the parent proxy.

Port

Specify the port number to be used for the parent proxy.

Default: 3128

Username

Specify a username for authentication.

Password

Specify a password for authentication.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 271

Figure 206: IPv6 Parent Proxy

Click Apply.

Multicast (PIM-SIM)

This page allows you to configure PIM.

Protocol Independent Multicast (PIM) is a protocol for routing IP packets efficiently to multicast groups that may span throughout the Internet. PIM provides dynamic multicast support on the device. With dynamic multicast support, a host can join/leave a multicast group dynamically and there is no need to manually add/delete multicast routing entries on the device.

Note: The device supports PIM version2 and PIM-SM mode with Rendezvous Point (RP) selection method as BSR (Bootstrap Router)

PIM-SM Configuration

Enable PIM

Enable PIM to provide dynamic multicast support on the device.

PIM Enabled Interface

Select the physical interfaces on which PIM service needs to be enabled.

To enable PIM, at least one interface has to be selected.

Note:

• Only IPv4 bound interfaces can be selected.

• Alias, PPPoE and Cellular WAN interfaces are not supported.

Figure 207: PIM-SM Configuration

RP Settings

Enable to configure Static RP or Candidate RP.

Static RP

RIP IP

Multicast Group

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 272

Specify a unicast IP address for static RP. RPs can be added or deleted.

Maximum eight RP IP addresses per RP are allowed.

Specify Multicast Group IP address or network address separated by comma that will be served by given RP.

Maximum eight multicast group addresses per

RP are allowed

Use * in Multicast Group List to serve all the multicast groups by the defined RP.

Figure 208: Static RP Settings

Candidate RP

Candidate RP IP

Multicast Group List

Candidate RP Priority

Timer

Select interface IP that will be used as RP IP, if the router is selected as candidate RP.

Specify multicast group IP address or network address separated by a comma that will be served by given RP.

Maximum eight multicast group IP/network addresses are allowed.

Use * in Multicast Group List to serve all the multicast groups by the selected RP.

Specify the priority of the PIM router in the RP election process.

Default: 1

Acceptable Range: 1 to 255

Specify time in seconds after which at every specified time, RP candidate messages are generated.

Default: 60 seconds

Acceptable Range: 30 to 180 seconds

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 273

Figure 209: Candidate RP Settings

RIP

This page allows you to manage RIP routes. You can also add, update, or delete the networks/interface-specific configuration from this page.

Routing Information Protocol (RIP) is a widely used routing protocol that uses hop count to determine the best route to a destination.

RIP avoids routing loops from continuing indefinitely by limiting the number of hops permitted between the source and destination. The maximum number of hops supported is 15. Hence, if the hop count becomes 16, it is known as an infinite distance and is considered as unreachable.

With the help of the RIP protocol, the device sends routing update messages at regular intervals to the next router.

When the next router receives the changes, it updates them in the routing table and also increases the metric value for the path by 1. The sender of the message is considered as the next hop. The device maintains only the route with the least metric value to a destination.

Global Configuration

Default Metric

Specify the default metric value to be used for redistributed routes.

Metric is a property that contains a value used by a routing protocol to decide which route will be taken.

Default: 1

Acceptable Range: 1 to 16

Administrative Distance

Specify the administrative distance. It is a number used by the routers to find out the better route.

Default: 120

Acceptable Range: 1 to 255

RIP Version

Select the RIP version to be used for sending and receiving updates.

Available Options:

• Send V2 & Receive both

• V1

• V2

Timers

Update

Specify the time interval in seconds between two periodic routing updates.

Default: 30 seconds

Acceptable Range: 5 to 2147483647 seconds

Timeout

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 274

Specify the time in seconds after which the route becomes invalid.

Default: 180 seconds

Acceptable Range: 5 to 2147483647 seconds

Garbage

Specify the garbage time. It is amount of time that the device will advertise a route as being unreachable before deleting the route from the routing table.

Default: 120 seconds

Acceptable Range: 5 to 2147483647 seconds

Default Information Originate

Enable to control the distribution of the default route. It will generate and advertise a default route into the RIP-enabled networks.

The default setting is disabled.

Redistribute Connected

Click to enable the redistribution of connected routes into the RIP routing table.

Specify metric for redistributed connected routes.

Acceptable Range: 0 to 16

Redistribute Static

Click to enable the redistribution of static routes into the RIP routing table

Specify metric for redistributed static routes.

Acceptable Range: 0 to 16

Redistribute OSPF

Click to enable the redistribution of OSPF routes into the RIP routing table.

Specify metric for redistributed OSPF routes.

Acceptable Range: 0 to 16

Redistribute BGP

Click to enable the redistribution of BGP routes into RIP routing table.

Specify metric for redistributed BGP routes.

Acceptable Range: 0 to 16

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 275

Figure 210: Global Configuration

Click Apply.

RIP Networks

This section shows a list of available RIP networks including the corresponding netmasks.

Override Interface Configuration

You can manage interface configuration from this section.

Add RIP Network

1. Go to Configure > Routing > RIP and click Add in the RIP Networks section.

2. Enter the IPv4 address of the network and select a subnet mask from the dropdown list.

Figure 211: Add RIP Network

3. Click Save.

Override Interface Configuration

1. Go to Configure > Routing > RIP and click Select Interface under the Override Interface Configuration section.

2. Enter interface configuration details.

Interface

Select the interface for which you want to override the default configuration.

RIP Version

Send

Select the RIP version(s) to be used for sending the routing updates.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 276

You can select V1 or V2 or both, V1 and V2. The selection overrides the version selected in the

Global Configuration settings.

The default setting is V2.

Receive

Select the RIP version to be used for receiving the routing updates.

You can select V1 or V2 or both, V1 and V2. The selection overrides the version selected in the

Global Configuration settings.

The default setting is V2 and V2.

Split Horizon

Enable to prevent the routing loops.

The default setting is disabled.

Poisoned Reverse (only applicable when Split Horizon is enabled)

Enable to prevent the device from sending packets through the route that has become invalid.

The default setting is disabled.

Authentication

Click to enable authentication of RIP packets.

If enabled, provide a password to authenticate the RIP packets.

Passive Mode

Enable to prevent the interface from sending RIP advertisements.

The default setting is disabled.

Figure 212: Override Interface Configuration

3. Click Save.

System Services

System Services allows configuration of device components along with the associated services.

Available configurations:

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 277

•

High Availability

- High Availability allows a second system to be used for redundancy or scalability.

•

Traffic Shaping Settings

- QoS traffic shaping allows network bandwidth to be limited or guaranteed.

•

RED

- Sophos RED allows seamless, encrypted, and tightly integrated connections between branch locations.

•

Log Settings

- Configure Syslog servers and enable/disable logs to be sent.

•

Data Anonymization

- Enable Data Anonymization and set Authorizers.

•

Traffic Shaping

- Displays list of predefined and custom policies and provides option to create a new traffic

shaping policy.

•

- View the current status and manage all the configured services.

High Availability

Hardware failure such as a failure of the power supply, hard disk, or processor is the main reason behind the failure of a Internet security system and/or a device. To provide reliable and continuous connection to the Internet and to provide security services such as firewall, VPN, intrusion detection and prevention, virus scanning, web filtering, and spam filtering services, two devices can be configured to function as a single device and provide high availability.

Clustering technology is used to ensure high availability. In a cluster, devices are grouped together and instructed to work as a single entity.

Note: This feature is not available in models: CR15i, CR 15wi, CR25wi, CR35wi, CR15wiNG,

CR25wiNG/6P and CR35wiNG/6P and on all WiFi models of XG Series devices.

How a Cluster works

The device offers high availability by using virtual MAC address shared between a primary device and an auxiliary device linked together as a “cluster”.

Devices - primary and auxiliary device, are physically connected over a dedicated HA link port.

Typically, traffic enters your network by passing through a network switch. In an HA solution, one of the devices in the cluster has a virtual MAC address and traffic is forwarded to the cluster device which has the virtual MAC address. The device which has virtual MAC address is the primary device and the other peer is the auxiliary device.

Primary device acts as a load balancer and forwards the traffic to the auxiliary device for processing. Auxiliary device can process traffic only if cluster is operating in the Active-Active mode.

If configured in Active-Passive mode, the primary device processes the entire traffic. Auxiliary device waits in a ready mode to operate as primary device, in case the primary device or any of the monitored links fail.

Auxiliary device monitors the primary device through the dedicated HA link and if it does not receive any communication within the pre-configured time, the primary device is considered to have failed. In this case, the auxiliary device takes ownership of the virtual MAC address from the primary device, and becomes the primary device temporarily. Primary device automatically takes over from the auxiliary device once it starts functioning.

HA terminology

1. HA Cluster

Group of two devices instructed to work as a single entity. Every HA cluster has one primary device and one auxiliary device. The primary device controls how the cluster operates. The roles that the primary and auxiliary devices play in the cluster depend on the configuration mode.

2. HA Configuration Modes

Active-Active

A configuration of HA cluster consists of a primary

Device and an auxiliary device. In this mode, both primary device and auxiliary device process traffic while the primary unit is in charge of balancing the traffic. Decision of load balancing is taken by the primary device. The auxiliary device can take over only in case of a primary unit failure.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 278

Active-Passive

A configuration of HA cluster which consists of a primary device and an auxiliary device. In this mode, only the primary device processes traffic while the auxiliary device remains in stand-by mode, ready to take over if a primary device failure occurs.

3. Primary Device

The primary device also tracks the status of all cluster devices. In an Active-Active cluster, the primary device receives the entire network traffic and acts as load balancer to redirect traffic to the auxiliary device. In an Active-

Passive cluster, the primary device processes the network traffic while the auxiliary device does not process any traffic but remains ready to take over if the primary device fails.

4. Auxiliary Device

Auxiliary device always waits to become the primary device.

In an Active-Active cluster, the auxiliary device processes the network traffic assigned to it by the primary device.

In case the primary device fails, the auxiliary device becomes the primary device. In an Active-Passive cluster, the auxiliary device does not process network traffic and is in stand-by. It becomes active only when the primary device is not available to process the traffic.

5. Dedicated HA Link Port

Dedicated HA link is a direct physical link between the devices participating in HA cluster.

6. Load Balancing

The ability of HA cluster of balancing the traffic between nodes in the HA cluster.

7. Monitored Interface

Set of interfaces that are selected to be monitored. Each device monitors its own selected interface(s) and if any of them goes down, the device removes itself from the cluster and a failover occurs.

8. Virtual MAC

It is a MAC address associated with the HA cluster. This address is sent in response when any of the machines make an ARP request to HA cluster. It is not the actual MAC address and is not assigned to any interface of any unit in the cluster.

The primary device owns the MAC address and is used for routing network traffic. All external clients use this address to communicate with the HA cluster. In case of failover, the new primary device will have the same MAC address as the failed primary device. The cluster device which has a virtual MAC address acts as a primary device.

9. Primary State

In Active-Active mode, the device that is in charge of receiving all the traffic and load balancing is said to be in

“primary” state. A device can be in “primary” state only when the other device is in “auxiliary” state.

In Active-Passive mode, the device in charge of processing all the traffic is said to be in the “primary” state. A device can be in “primary” state only when the other device is in “auxiliary” state.

10. Auxiliary State

In Active-Active mode, the device that receives the traffic to be processed by it from the primary device is called to be in “auxiliary” state. A device can be in “auxiliary” state only when the other device is in “primary” state

In Active-Passive mode, the device which is not processing the traffic is called to be in “auxiliary” state. A device can be in “auxiliary” state only when the other device is in “primary” state.

11. Standalone State

A device is called to be in standalone state when it can still process network traffic and when the other device is not in position to process network traffic (i.e. in “fault” state or shut down).

12. Fault State

A device is in fault state when it cannot process network traffic if a device or link fails.

13. Peer

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 279

Once the HA cluster is configured, cluster devices are termed as peers i.e. for the primary device, the auxiliary device is its peer device and vice versa.

14. Synchronization

The process of sharing the various cluster configuration, between cluster devices (HA peers). Reports generated are not synchronized.

15. Device failover

If an device does not receive any communication within the predetermined period of time from the HA peer, the peer device is considered to have failed. This process is termed as device failover as when this occurs, the peer device is taken over.

16. Link failover

Both the device in an HA cluster continuously monitor the dedicated HA link and the interfaces configured to be monitored. If any of them fails it is called link failure.

17. Session failover

Whether it is a device or link failover, session failover occurs for forwarded TCP traffic except for the virus scanned sessions that are in progress, VPN sessions, UDP, ICMP, multicast, and broadcast sessions and proxy traffic.

Device normally maintains session information for TCP traffic which is not passing through proxy service. Hence, in case of failover, the device which takes over will take care of all the sessions (TCP session not passing through proxy application). The entire process is transparent for the end users.

Configure HA

Points to be noted

• WWAN, WLAN - High Availability (HA) cluster cannot be configured if WWAN or WLAN is configured.

• DHCP, PPPoE - High Availability (HA) cluster cannot be configured in Active-Active mode if any of the interfaces are dynamically configured using DHCP or PPPoE protocols.

• You cannot configure interfaces using DHCP/PPPoE protocols when HA cluster is configured in Active-Active mode.

• Masqueraded Connections - In case of the manual synchronization events from any of the HA cluster devices, all the masqueraded connections will be dropped.

• HA can be disabled from either of the devices. If disabled from the primary device, HA will be disabled on both the devices. If disabled from the auxiliary device, HA will not be disabled on the primary device and will act as stand-alone device.

• After disabling HA, primary device IP schema will not change.

• After disabling HA, for the auxiliary device, all the ports except the dedicated HA link port and peer administration port will be disabled. The peer HA link IP will be the assigned IP address assigned to the dedicated

HA link port while the peer administration IP will be the assigned IP address assigned to the peer administration port.

• If HA is disabled from a stand-alone machine, IP schema will not change.

• Super Administrator privileges are required to access the auxiliary device Admin console and therefore it can be accessed by “admin” user only and Live users/DHCP leases/IPsec live connections pages will not be displayed.

• After disabling HA, for the auxiliary device, for LAN zone all the administrative service – HTTPS, Telnet, SSH are allowed while for DMZ zone only HTTPS and SSH are allowed.

• For the auxiliary device, Deployment Wizard will not be accessible.

• Dedicated HA link port should be from any of the DMZ zone interface only. Make sure that the IP address of the

HA link port of primary and auxiliary devices are in the same subnet.

• After enabling HA if backup without HA configuration is restored then HA will be disabled and the primary device will be accessible as per the backup configuration while auxiliary device will be accessible with the

Auxiliary Admin IP Address.

• In Active-Active mode, mails will be quarantined separately on both the devices as SMTP proxy traffic is load balanced in round robin manner.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 280

• In Active-Passive mode, mails will be quarantined on the primary device only.

• If quarantine digest is configured, both the devices in the cluster will send quarantine digests.

• Administrator can release quarantined mails of all the users from both the devices.

• User can release quarantined mails from the User Portal. The User Portal displays mails quarantined only on the primary device. Also, the user can release them from the quarantine digest mailed from the primary device.

Note:

• Not available in models CR15i, CR15wi, CR25wi, CR35wi, CR15wiNG, CR25wiNG/6P, CR25wiNG/6P and on all WiFi models of SG series devices.

• HA will get disabled if you run the Deployment Wizard.

• You must register the device to configure HA.

Session failover

• Session failover is possible for Forwarded TCP traffic under Route Mode, Bridge Mode, Mixed Mode and

Multiport Bridge Mode.

• Session Failover is not possible for the following types of traffic under Route Mode, Bridge Mode, Mixed Mode and Multiport Bridge Mode:

• Proxy Subsystem (Transparent/Direct/Parent proxy)

• VPN Traffic

• IPv4 and IPv6 forwarded traffic like UDP, ICMP, multicast, broadcast etc.

• System generated traffic

• AV Scanned sessions

• Parent proxy traffic

Load Balancing

• Active-Active HA Cluster will successfully balance the load of following types of traffic under Route Mode,

Bridge Mode, Mixed Mode and Multiport Bridge Mode:

• TCP traffic passing through the proxy subsystem (Transparent/Direct/Parent)

• Forwarded TCP Traffic

• NATed (SNAT and Virtual Host) forwarded TCP traffic

• HTTPS connection

• VLAN traffic

• Active-Active HA Cluster does not load balance the following types of traffic under Route Mode, Bridge Mode,

Mixed Mode and Multiport Bridge Mode:

• VPN sessions

• Traffic other than TCP (UDP, ICMP, multicast, broadcast etc.)

• System generated traffic

• Scanned FTP Traffic

• Traffic coming through wireless RED devices and Access Points.

• TCP Traffic for User Portal, Admin Console or Telnet Console

• H323 Traffic sessions

• Control traffic for all modules

Before configuring HA

Before attempting to configure two devices as an HA pair for Hardware failover, check the following requirements:

• Both devices in the HA cluster i.e. primary and auxiliary device must be registered and have the same number of interfaces. Both member devices should be of the same model.

• Both devices in the HA cluster must have the same firmware version installed on it.

• Active-Active: Two separate licenses are required, one for the primary device and other for the auxiliary device.

On both the devices, the same subscription modules should be enabled.

• Active-Passive: One license is required for the primary device. No license is needed for the auxiliary device.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 281

• Cables to all the monitored ports on both the devices must be connected. Connect dedicated HA link port of both the devices with crossover cable.

• Dedicated HA link port should be from the DMZ zone interface only and must have a unique IP address on both the devices. SSH should be enabled for both the devices on the DMZ zone.

• WWAN and WLAN configuration must be disabled before HA configuration.

• DHCP/PPPoE configuration must be disabled before configuring HA in Active-Active mode.

Before enabling HA

Before enabling HA, you need to provide the Passphrase and Dedicated HA Link Port details on the auxiliary device by selecting Auxiliary for Initial HA Device State. If the details are not configured on the auxiliary device then the primary device will not be able to connect to the auxiliary device.

Configure Primary Device

1. Go to Configure > System Services > High Availability.

2. Enter High Availability details.

Serial Number

Displays serial number.

Peer Serial Number

Displays peer’s serial number.

For the primary device, it displays the auxiliary device’s serial number.

For the auxiliary device, it displays the primary device’s serial number.

HA Configuration Mode

Select HA configuration mode for the cluster.

Active-Active

Active-Passive

Select to configure a cluster for load balancing and failover HA. In Active-Active mode both, the primary device and the auxiliary device processes the traffic and monitors the status of the other cluster device. The primary device controls load balancing among both the cluster devices.

Select to configure a cluster for failover HA.

In Active-Passive mode the primary device processes all connections. The auxiliary device passively monitors the cluster status and remains synchronized with the primary device.

Initial HA Device State

Select to set initial device state from the available options.

Available Options:

Primary Auxiliary

Passphrase

Passphrase - Specify a passphrase for communication.

Confirm Passphrase - Confirm the specified passphrase.

Note: To configure HA, both devices in the cluster must have the same passphrase.

Dedicated HA Link Port

Specify HA link port.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 282

HA peers are physically connected using a crossover cable through this port. The same port must also be used as an HA link port on the peer device.

For example, if port E is configured as HA link port on the primary device then use port E only as HA link port on the auxiliary device. Make sure that the IP address of the HA link port for both, the primary device and auxiliary devices are in same subnet. Cluster devices use this link to communicate cluster information and to synchronize with each other.

Check

Before Configuring HA

before attempting to configure two devices as an HA pair.

Peer HA link IPv4

Specify the IP address configured on the HA link port of the peer device.

Peer Administration Port

Specify an administration port for the auxiliary device. This port can be used for administration purpose.

Peer Administration IP

Specify an administration IPv4/IPv6 address for the auxiliary device.

With this IP address, the Admin console of the auxiliary device can be accessed. Any user accessing the Admin console of the auxiliary device will be logged -in with an HA profile and have read-only rights.

Select Ports to be Monitored

Select the ports to be monitored.

Both devices will monitor their own ports and if any of the monitored port goes down, the device will leave the cluster and failover will occur.

Note: This feature is not supported in virtual security devices.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 283

Figure 213: Configure HA

3. Click Enable HA to enable HA.

Note: The device from which HA is enabled, acts as a Primary Device while the peer device acts as

Auxiliary Device.

If everything is cabled and configured properly and HA is enabled successfully:

• Both devices will have the same configuration except the HA link port IP address.

• Additional options will be made available:

Primary Device

• Put on Standby (for Active-Passive mode)

•

Disable HA

• Sync Auxiliary (used to synchronize auxiliary device and primary device configurations)

Auxiliary Device

•

Disable HA

• Sync with Primary (used to synchronize auxiliary device and primary device configurations)

• By default, both the devices will synchronize automatically.

• As soon as Active-Active is configured, traffic load balancing is enabled. If required, it can be disabled from CLI console using the “system ha load-balancing on/off” command.

Disable HA

This page allows you to disable HA.

Go to Configure > System Services > High Availability and click Disable HA.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 284

Note:

• After disabling HA, the primary device IP schema will not change.

• If HA is disabled from a stand-alone machine, the IP schema will not change.

After disabling HA, the auxiliary device will reboot, all the ports except the dedicated HA link port and peer administration port will be disabled. The dedicated HA link port will be assigned to the peer HA link IP address and the peer administration port will be assigned to the peer administration IP address.

Switch Device to Standby Mode

Standby mode for the device can be configured only if the cluster is operating in Active-Passive mode. The auxiliary device takes over as primary device.

Synchronize HA Peers

Under normal conditions, the auxiliary device is always synchronized with the primary device. However, if required, the auxiliary device can also be forcefully synchronized with the primary device.

Manual synchronization process can be initiated from either of the peers. If synchronized from the primary device, the primary device will push updates and if synchronized from the auxiliary device, the auxiliary device will pull the updates from the primary device.

Go to Configure > System Services > High Availability and click Sync Auxiliary to manually synchronize the auxiliary device with the primary device.

The matrix illustrates the HA state transitions from which synchronization is possible between HA peers. For example, synchronization is possible when the device in Primary state goes in Fault state but not when it goes in

Auxiliary state.

From/To

Standalone

Primary

Auxiliary**

Fault

Standalone

Yes

Primary

Yes

Auxiliary**

Yes*

Yes

Fault

Yes

*Possible when dedicated link goes down and comes back again

**When device transits into Backup mode, it will soft boot

Manual synchronization gets the data and configuration updates except reports from the primary device.

Services Support

All the services except below listed services will not running on auxiliary device.

• Routing service

• VPN service

• Network service

• Logon server

Traffic Shaping Settings

This page allows you to configure default Traffic Shaping settings. All the bandwidth-related data are displayed only in KBps (1000 bytes per second).

The settings are as follows:

Total Available WAN Bandwidth

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 285

Specify maximum bandwidth limit in KBps. It is generally a sum of all WAN links’ maximum limits.

Default: 100000 KBps

Acceptable Range (KBps): 1 to 2560000

Optimize for Real-Time (VoIP)

Enable to give priority to real-time traffic like VOIP over all other traffic.

If disabled, priority will be applicable only for excess bandwidth i.e. bandwidth remaining after guaranteed bandwidth allocation.

Enforce Guaranteed Bandwidth

The Administrator can enforce the handling of all internet-bound traffic by any Traffic Shaping

Policy applied to it. If there is no policy applied to the traffic, it will be handled by the Default

Policy.

Enable to enforce bandwidth restriction on the traffic to which the Traffic Shaping Policy is not applied.

Disable if you do not want to enforce bandwidth restriction on the traffic to which the Traffic

Shaping Policy is not applied. It will only handle traffic on which the Traffic Shaping Policy is applied.

Default Policy

The Default Policy will be applicable to the traffic which does not have any Traffic Shaping Policy applied.

Guarantee

Specify bandwidth which is the minimum guaranteed bandwidth that the user can use.

Default: 1 KBps

Acceptable Range (KBps): 1 to 2560000

Limit

Priority

Specify bandwidth which is the maximum bandwidth that the user can use, if available.

Default: 100000 KBps

Acceptable Range (KBps): 1 to 2560000

Set the bandwidth priority. Priority can be set from 1 (highest) to 7 (lowest) depending on the traffic required to be shaped.

Available Options:

1 – Business Critical2 to 5 – Normal6 – Bulky -

FTP7 – Best Effort – e.g. P2P

Show Bandwidth Usage

Click to view Bandwidth Usage.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 286

Figure 214: Traffic Shaping Settings

Related information

How to setup application filter

RED

This page describes how to enable RED.

RED is short for Remote Ethernet Device and is a means to connect remote sites, e.g., branch offices, to your main office as if the remote site was part of your local network.

The setup consists of the Sophos XG Firewall in your main office and a Remote Ethernet Device (RED) in your remote office. Establishing a connection between the two is utmost easy as the RED device itself does not need to be configured at all. As soon as the RED device is connected to your device it behaves like any other Ethernet device on your device. All traffic of your branch office is safely routed via your device which means that your branch office is as secure as your local network.

These types of RED devices are currently available:

• RED 10: RED solution for small remote offices

• RED 15: RED solution for medium remote offices

• RED 15w: RED solution for small remote offices, including WiFi.

• RED 50: RED solution for bigger remote offices which comes with two uplink interfaces.

Additionally, you have the choice to establish a RED Site-to-Site tunnel between two SF devices which are connected through the RED technology on Layer 2. One device acts as server while the other is the client. For more information,

see chapter

Configure RED Site-to-Site Tunnel

Each RED device or SF device that is configured here is able to establish a connection to your SF device.

Note: For RED devices to be able to connect, you need to enable RED support on the Configure > System

Services > RED page first.

RED setup example

Related tasks

on page 119

This page allows you to configure a Remote Ethernet Device (RED) at a remote office.

Configure RED

This page describes how to configure RED.

1. Go to Configure > System Services > RED and enable RED.

2. Specify the following:

Organization Name

Specify the name of the organization.

City

Specify the city where the organization is located.

Country

Select the country where the organization is located.

Email

Specify an email address.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 287

Figure 215: Enable RED

3. Click Apply.

Note: If the message “Registering with RED service failed. Please make sure that this device can connect to the Internet on port 3400” appears, some kind of network problem is indicated. You should first check if you can reach red.astaro.com through port 3400 (via console command telnet red.astaro.com 3400). If so, the error might be due to a high network load. Retry to connect later.

The RED status is now activated. Sophos XG Firewall is now registered at the RED Provisioning Service (RPS) of

Sophos to act as a RED hub. You can now continue by adding one or more RED devices at System > Network >

Interfaces.

You can enable the Automatic Device Deauthorization.

Related tasks

1. To access the Log Viewer page, go to

on page 119

This page allows you to configure a Remote Ethernet Device (RED) at a remote office.

Force TLS 1.2

This page describes how to force TLS 1.2.

For security reasons it is recommended to force the RED device to use only TLS 1.2. This option is disabled by default to ensure that new RED devices can connect to the Firewall and first have a firmware updgrade to support

TLS 1.2.

Note: If you want to add new RED devices, first disable TLS to ensure that the RED devices are able to connect to the Firewall.

1. Ensure that RED is enabled.

2. In the Force TLS 1.2 area select Enable.

3. Click Apply.

Automatic Device Deauthorization

This page describes how to deauthorize a RED device.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 288

When RED is enabled, you can specify if disconnected RED devices should automatically be deauthorized after a certain time span. With this feature, you can prevent stolen RED devices from connecting to Sophos XG Firewall.

Note: The Automatic Device Deauthorization does not work for a RED tunnel between 2 Sophos XG

Firewall devices.

1. Ensure that RED is activated.

2. Select Enable next to Automatic Device Deauthorization.

3. Enter a time span for Deauthorize After.

4. Click Apply.

Automatic Device Deauthorization will now be successfully configured.

When a RED device reconnects after being disconnected for a time span longer than the defined time span, it will automatically be disabled.

Disable RED

This page describes how to disable RED.

Disabling RED will not cause the deletion of the REDs. If you disable the RED functionality, RED devices will be deactivated and lose their connection. If you re-enable the RED functionality, the REDs will be activated again.

1. Click the toggle switch of the RED Status.

2. Confirm deactivation by clicking on the Confirm removal of RED configuration button.

RED is now deactivated. All RED devices will be disconnected.

Log Settings

Device provides extensive logging capabilities for traffic, system and network protection functions. Detailed log information and reports provide historical as well as current analysis of network activity to help identify security issues and reduce network abuse. To view logs, relevant modules must be subscribed.

Device can log many different network activities and traffic including:

• Firewall Rules log

• Anti Virus infection and blocking

• Web filtering, URL and HTTP content blocking

• Signature and anomaly attack and prevention

• Spam filtering

• Administrator logs

• User Authentication logs

• SSL VPN logs

• Web Server Protection logs

• Advanced Threat Protection logs

• Heartbeat logs

Device can either store logs locally or send logs to external syslog servers for storage and archival purposes. Traffic

Discovery logs can be stored locally only.

Syslog is an industry standard protocol/method for collecting and forwarding Logs from devices to a server running a syslog daemon usually via UDP Port 514. Logging to a central syslog server helps in aggregation of logs and alerts.

If configured, device sends a detailed log to an external syslog server in addition to the standard event log. Device

Syslog support requires an external server running a syslog daemon on any of the UDP Port. When configuring logging to a syslog server, one needs to configure the facility, severity and log file format. One can also specify logging location if multiple syslog servers are defined.

Device logs all activity and includes every connection source and destination IP Address (IPv4 / IPv6), IP service, and number of bytes transferred.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 289

A Syslog service simply accepts messages, and store them in files or prints. This form of logging is the best as it provides a central logging facility and a protected long-term storage for logs. This is useful both in routine troubleshooting and in incident handling.

Use this page to configure below settings:

• Syslog Servers - Configure Syslog server for logs storage and archival purposes.

• Log Settings - Configure logs to be sent to the Syslog server.

Syslog Servers

The Syslog Servers section displays list of configured syslog servers. You can sort the list based on server name. The page also provides option to add, update, or delete the server.

Log Settings

After configuring syslog server, configure logs to be sent to the syslog server by selecting checkbox against the log under Syslog. If multiple syslog servers are configured, you can send various logs on different servers.

To record logs you must enable the respective log and specify logging location. Administrator can choose between

On-Device (local) logging or Syslog logging. Administrator can also disable logging temporarily. Below are the different log types with their description:

Firewall

Firewall Log records following events:

• Firewall Rules

Log records the entire traffic for Firewall.

• Invalid Traffic

Log records the dropped traffic that does not follow the protocol standards, invalid fragmented traffic and the traffic whose packets or device is not able to relate to any connection.

• Local ACLs

Log records the entire (allowed and dropped) incoming traffic.

• DoS Attack

The DoS Attack Log records attacks detected and prevented by the device i.e. dropped TCP, UDP and ICMP packets.

To generate logs, go to System > System Services > DoS & Spoof Protection and click Apply Flag against SYN

Flood, UDP Flood, TCP Flood, and ICMP/ICMPv6 Flood individually.

• Dropped ICMP Redirected Packet

Log records all the dropped ICMP redirect packets.

To generate log, go to System > System Services > DoS & Spoof Protection and click Apply Flag against

Disable ICMP/ICMPv6 Redirect Packet.

• Dropped Source Routed Packet

Log records all the dropped source routed packets.

To generate log, go to System > System Services > DoS & Spoof Protection and click Apply Flag against Drop

Source Routed Packets.

• Dropped Fragmented Traffic

Log records the dropped fragmented traffic.

• MAC Filtering

Log records the dropped packets when filtering is enabled from Spoof prevention.

• IP-MAC Pair Filtering

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 290

Log records the dropped packets when filtering is enabled from Spoof prevention.

• IP Spoof Prevention

Log records the dropped packets when filtering is enabled from Spoof prevention.

• SSL VPN Tunnel

Log records of SSL VPN traffic.

• Protected Application Server

Log records of protected application server traffic.

• Heartbeat

Log records of Heartbeat traffic.

• ICMP Error Message

Log records of ICMP error messages such as network/host/port unreachable, destination network/host unknown and so on.

Figure 216: Firewall Rule

IPS

Records detected and dropped attacks based on unknown or suspicious patterns (anomaly) and signatures.

Figure 217: IPS

Anti Virus

Virus detected in HTTP, SMTP, FTP, POP3, IMAP4, HTTPS, SMTPS, IMAPS and POPS traffic.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 291

Figure 218: Anti-Virus

Anti Spam

SMTP, POP3, IMAP4, SMTPS, POPS, IMAPS spam and probable spam mails.

Figure 219: Anti-Spam

Content Filtering

Web filtering and Application Filtering logs.

Log records of the name of applications/URLs accessed and their categories.

Note:

To view the logs:

• Web Filter and Application Filter Policies should be applied in Firewall Rule.

• Log Firewall Traffic under Firewall page should be enabled.

Figure 220: Content Filtering

Events

Admin Events: Log records of configurations done through Admin Console.

Authentication Events: Log records of all authentication related events.

System Events: Log records of all system related events like Gateway Up/Down, Anti Virus updates etc.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 292

Figure 221: Events

Web Server Protection

Web Server Protection Events.

Note: Web Server Protection logs are not available in CR10iNG, CR15i, CR15wi, CR15iNG, CR15wiNG,

CR25ia, CR25wi, CR35ia and CR35wi Sophos Devices.

Figure 222: Web Server Protection

Advanced Threat Protection

ATP Events: Log records of drop or alert event.

Figure 223: Advanced Threat Protection

Wireless

Access Points & SSID: Log records of the connected APs and SSID.

Figure 224: Wireless

Heartbeat

Endpoint Status: Log records of the health status of the endpoint.

Figure 225: Heartbeat

System Health

Usage: Log records of CPU usage, memory usage, no. of live users, interface and disk partition information.

Figure 226: System Health

Sandstorm

Sandstorm Event: Log records of all Sandstorm events.

Figure 227: Sandstorm

Add Syslog Server

This page describes how to add a syslog server.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 293

1. Go to Configure > System Services > Log Settingsand click Add under the Syslog Servers section.

2. Enter server details.

Name

Enter a unique name for the syslog server.

IP Address / Domain

Specify the IP address (IPv4 / IPv6) or domain name of the syslog server. Logs from the device will be sent to the server.

Port

Specify the port number for communication with the syslog server. The device will send logs using the configured port.

Facility

Select syslog facility for logs to be sent to the syslog server.

Facility indicates to the syslog server the source of a log such as operating system, the process or an application. It is defined by the syslog protocol.

The device supports several syslog facilities for received log.

Available Options:DAEMON

Daemon logs (information of services running in device as daemon).

KERNEL

Kernel log

LOCAL0 - LOCAL7

Log level information.

USER

Logging based on users who are connected to the server.

Severity Level

Specify severity levels of logs.

Severity level is the severity of the log that has been generated.

The device logs all the messages at and above the logging severity level you select. For example, select ERROR to log all messages tagged as ERROR, as well as any messages tagged with

CRITICAL, ALERT and EMERGENCY and select DEBUG to log all messages.

The device supports following severity levels:EMERGENCY - System is not usableALERT

- Action must be taken immediatelyCRITCAL - Critical conditionERROR - Error conditionWARNING - Warning conditionNOTIFICATION - Normal but significant conditionINFORMATION - InformationalDEBUG - Debug level messages.

Format

The device produces logs in the specified format. The device currently produces logs in device standard format.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 294

Figure 228: Add Syslog Server

Note: You can configure maximum five syslog servers.

3. Click Save.

Once you add the server, go to the System > System Services > Log Settings page and enable all those logs, which are to be sent to the syslog server in the section Log Settings.

Data Anonymization

This page allows you to enable/disable data anonymization and select authorizer administrators, also to de-anonymize all the user identities - Username, IP Address, MAC Address and Email Address in all logs /activities / reports.

View the report from Configure > System Services > Data Anonymization.

Once Data Anonymization is enabled, the Device anonymizes all the user identities. It means user identities in all the logs and reports are displayed in encrypted form.

To view the actual details, IT Administrator has to de-anonymize the same. To de-anonymize, approval from one of the authorizers configured on the Configure > System Services > Data Anonymization page is required.

Data Anonymization Setting

Enable data anonymization for the IT administrator to view or download user-specific activities, logs or reports. Apart from the IT administrator, at least one independent authorizer with the administrative privileges is required.

Once enabled:

1. All the user identities - username, IP address (IPv4 / IPv6), MAC address and email address in all logs /activities / reports are anonymized.

2. If an IT administrator wants to de-anonymize above mentioned user details, approval is required from at least one of the Authorizers.

3. Similarly, to disable data anonymization, approval from at least one of the Authorizers is required.

Note: To enable/disable data anonymization if you are logged in as one of the Authorizers, approval from at least one of the other Authorizers is required.

This section provides the following options:

Enable Data Anonymization

Click to enable Data Anonymization.

Select Authorizer

• Administrator List displays all the administrators.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 295

• Click the check-box given under Select Authorizer menu to select the administrator. All the selected administrators are displayed under Selected Authorizer list.

Exceptions

This section allows to de-anonymize all the user identities - Username, IP Address, MAC Address and Email Address in all logs /activities / reports.

Depending on whether you want to de-anonymize the user identities in all logs /activities / reports or in particular log /activity / report, there are two ways to de-anonymize the user identities:

• From Data Anonymization page

• From Log Viewer page or Reports module

Follow the steps below to de-anonymize all the user identities - Username, IP Address, MAC Address and Email

Address in all logs /activities / reports:

1. Select Username(s) to be de-anonymized from user(s) listed under the User parameter.

2. Specify IP Address(s) (IPv4 / IPv6) to be de-anonymized.

3. If required, specify MAC Address(s) and Email Address(s) to be de-anonymized from Advanced Settings section.

4. Click Apply. An Authorization Window shall pop-up. Given below are the parameters and their description:

a. User Name: Select the Authorizer configured from Configure > System Services > Data Anonymization page.

b. Password: Specify password for the selected Authorizer and click OK.

5. Once approved, user identities in all logs and reports are decrypted and displayed with the actual user details.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 296

Figure 229: Exceptions

From Log Viewer page or Reports module

Follow the steps below to de-anonymize a particular user identity in a particular log /activity / report:

Log Viewer

. Else, you can view a report containing anonymized (encrypted) user identities from the Reports module.

2. Click the icon against an anonymized (encrypted) string. A new window titled De-Anonymize shall pop up.

Given below are the parameters and their description:

a. Anonymized String: Displayed the encrypted string. This is the string you want to decrypt.

b. De-Anonymized String: Displays the decrypted user identity i.e. actual user identity detail.

Note: This field is displayed blank until you specify password for the selected Authorised Username and click OK. Once approved, user identity in the log / report is decrypted and displayed with the actual user detail.

c. Authorised Username: Displays the Authorizer list configured from Configure > System Services > Data

Anonymization page. Select the desired Authorizer from the drop-down list.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 297

Note: If you are logged in as one of the Authorizers, the drop-down list does not display your

Username. Else, all the Authorizers are displayed.

d. Password: Specify password for the selected Authorizer.

e. De-Anonymize: Select the desired option:

• For this Search: Select to de-anonymize the user identity from the anonymized (encrypted) string selected in step 2, for this particular search only.

• Session: Select to de-anonymize the user identity from the anonymized (encrypted) string selected in step

2, until you log out of the Admin Console.

• Permanently: Select to permanently de-anonymize the user identity from the anonymized (encrypted) string selected in step 2.

Note: This is similar to the first method i.e. De-Anonymizing the user identities from the De-

Anonymize page, where all the user identities in all logs and reports are decrypted and displayed with the actual user details.

f. Type: The drop-down list displays the type of user identity. Possible options are:

• Username

• IP Address

• MAC Address

• Email Address

Note: By default, it displays the user identity associated with the anonymized (encrypted) string, selected in step 2. For example, if the anonymized string is a Host, the type would be displayed as

IP Address.

3. Click Save. The De-Anonymized String should now display the decrypted user identity i.e. actual user identity detail.

4. Click Cancel to close the De-Anonymize window. Now the selected log / report should display the decrypted user identity in place of the Anonymized String.

Traffic Shaping

The Traffic Shaping tab displays a list of predefined and custom policies and provides the option to create a new traffic shaping policy, schedule traffic shaping policies, update parameters or delete policies.

You can also clone a policy. Select an existing policy and click the icon to create a copy of the selected policy.

You can edit the cloned policy as per your requirements.

Create New Traffic Shaping Policy

This page describes how to quickly configure a new traffic shaping policy. All the bandwidth-related data are displayed only in KBps (1000 bytes per second).

1. Go to System > Profiles > Traffic Shaping and click Add.

2. Specify the Traffic Shaping Policy details.

Name

Specify a unique name for the Policy.

Policy Association

Select an option to specify for whom the policy is to be created.

Available Options:Users: Restricts the bandwidth for a particular user or for a user group.Rules:

Restricts the bandwidth of any entry to which the firewall rule is applied.Web Categories: Restricts the bandwidth for the URL categorized under the web categories.Applications: Restricts the bandwidth for the applications categorized under the application categories.

Rule Type

Select the type of policy.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 298

Available Options:Limit: In this type of policy, the user cannot exceed the defined bandwidth limit.Guarantee: In this type of policy, the user is allocated the guaranteed amount of bandwidth and can draw the bandwidth up to the defined Limit, if available.

It enables to assign fixed minimum and maximum amounts of bandwidth to the users. By borrowing excess bandwidth when available, users are able to burst above guaranteed minimum limits, up to the defined Limit. Guaranteed rates also assure minimum bandwidth to critical users to receive constant levels of bandwidth during peak and non-peak traffic periods.

Guarantee represents the minimum guaranteed bandwidth and Limit represents the maximum bandwidth that the user can use, if available.

Limit Upload/Download Separately

Select from the available options.

Available Options:

Disable: Limits total (upload + download) bandwidth.

Enable: Limits upload and download bandwidth separately.

Priority

Set the bandwidth priority. Priority can be set from 0 (highest) to 7 (lowest) depending on the traffic required to be shaped.

0 - Real Time for example, VOIP 1 - Business Critical 2 to 5 - Normal 6 - Bulky - FTP 7 - Best

Effort for Example, P2P

By default, priority is given to the real time traffic.

Note: However, if you do not want this preference, the feature can be disabled from

Configure > System Services > Traffic Shaping Settings page.

If Optimize for Real-Time (VoIP), under Configure > System Services > Traffic Shaping

Settings page is disabled the priority will be applicable only for excess bandwidth i.e. bandwidth remaining after guaranteed bandwidth allocation.

If Optimize for Real-Time (VoIP), under Configure > System Services > Traffic Shaping

Settings page is enabled the real-time traffic (Traffic Shaping policy with priority 0) like VOIP will be given precedence over all other traffic.

As priority is given to the real time traffic, it is possible that some non real-time traffic will not get their minimum guaranteed bandwidth. Specifically, if sum of Limit (max allowed) of all Traffic

Shaping policies (real-time and non real-time) is greater than total max-limit then guaranteed bandwidth of the real-time policies will be fulfilled but non real-time might not get the minimum guaranteed bandwidth.

Limit (in KBps) (only if Rule Type is Limit and Limit Upload/Download Separately is disabled)

Specify the allowed total bandwidth.

Total bandwidth range: 2 – 2560000 KBps

Limit bandwidth should be greater than or equal to guaranteed bandwidth.

Upload Bandwidth (in KBps) (only if Rule Type is Limit and Limit Upload/Download Separately is

enabled)

Specify the upload bandwidth.

Total bandwidth range: 2 – 2560000 KBps

Download Bandwidth (in KBps) (only if Rule Type is Limit and Limit Upload/Download Separately is

enabled)

Specify the download bandwidth.

Total bandwidth range: 2 - 2560000 KBps

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 299

Guarantee - Limit (in KBps) (only if Rule Type is Guarantee and Limit Upload/Download Separately is

disabled)

Specify the range for guaranteed bandwidth limit.

Total bandwidth range: 2 – 2560000 KBps

Guarantee - Limit Upload (in KBps) (only if Rule Type is Guarantee and Limit Upload/Download

Separately is enabled)

Specify the range for guaranteed upload bandwidth.

Total bandwidth range: 2 – 2560000 KBps

Guarantee - Limit Download (in KBps) (only if Rule Type is Guarantee and Limit Upload/Download

Separately is enabled)

Specify the range for guaranteed download bandwidth.

Total bandwidth range: 2 - 2560000 KBps

Bandwidth Usage Type

Select the type of bandwidth usage.

Available Options:Individual: Allocated bandwidth is for the particular User/Rule/Web Category/

Application only.Shared: Allocated bandwidth is shared among all the Users/Rules/Web

Categories/Applications who have been assigned this policy.

Description

Specify a description for the policy.

Figure 230: Add Traffic Shaping (QoS) Policy

3. Click Add under Add Schedule wise Traffic Shaping Policy Details to override default Traffic Shaping

Policy Details to Add Schedule wise Traffic Shaping Policy Details to override default Traffic Shaping Policy

Details. Refer

Schedule Traffic Shaping Policy

for details.

4. Click Save.

Schedule Traffic Shaping Policy

This page describes how to schedule a traffic shaping policy. All the bandwidth-related data are displayed only in

KBps (1000 bytes per second).

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 300

The page allows you to add a schedule-wise traffic shaping policy to override default traffic shaping policy details.

1. Go to System > Profiles > Traffic Shaping.

Click on the icon of the requested policy.

3. Click Add.

4. Specify the Traffic Shaping Policy details.

Name

Displays the policy name.

Rule Type

Displays the default policy type set at the time of creation of policy. Modify if required.

Note: The configured policy type will override the default policy and will be applicable only for the selected scheduled time interval.

Limit Upload/Download Separately

Displays the default implementation strategy set at the time of creation of the policy. Modify if required.

Note: The configured policy type will override the default policy and will be applicable only for the selected scheduled time interval.

Limit (in KBps) (only if Rule Type is Limit and Limit Upload/Download Separately is disabled)

Displays the allocated total bandwidth. Modify if required.

Note: The modified bandwidth restriction is applicable only for the selected time interval.

Upload Bandwidth (in KBps) (only if Rule Type is Limit and Limit Upload/Download Separately is

enabled)

Displays the allocated individual upload bandwidth. Modify if required.

Note: The modified bandwidth restriction is applicable only for the selected time interval.

Download Bandwidth (in KBps) (only if Rule Type is Limit and Limit Upload/Download Separately is

enabled)

Displays the allocated individual download bandwidth. Modify if required.

Note: The modified bandwidth restriction is applicable only for the selected time interval.

Guarantee - Limit (in KBps) (only if Rule Type is Guarantee and Limit Upload/Download Separately is

disabled)

Displays the range for the total guaranteed bandwidth. Modify if required.

Total bandwidth range: 2 – 2560000 KBps

Guarantee - (only if Rule Type is Guarantee and Limit Upload/Download Separately is enabled)

Displays the range for the guaranteed upload bandwidth. Modify if required.

Total bandwidth range: 2 – 2560000 KBps

Guarantee - Limit Download (in KBps) (only if Rule Type is Guarantee and Limit Upload/Download

Separately is enabled)

Displays the range for the guaranteed download bandwidth. Modify if required.

Total bandwidth range: 2 - 2560000 KBps

Schedule

Select a schedule from the available list during which the traffic shaping policy will be applied.

Only recurring schedule can be applied.

If you are not sure about the schedule details, check

Schedule

to view the details.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 301

Figure 231: Add Traffic Shaping (QoS) Policy Detail

5. Click Save.

Services

Services page allows you to view and manage the status of configured services.

You can view the current status and manage all the configured services:

• Anti-Spam

• Anti-Spam Center Connectivity

• Anti-Virus

• Authentication

• DNS Server

• IPS

• Web Proxy

• WAF

• DHCP Server

• DHCPv6 Server

• Router Advertisement Service

• Hotspot

Parameters

Services

Name of the configured service.

Status

Current status of the service.

Manage

Click to start or stop or restart the respective service.

Actions

Start

Start the service whose status is Stopped.

Stop Button

Stop the service whose status is Running.

Restart Button

Restart service: Only for authentication service and web proxy service.

Sophos XG Firewall | Configure | 302

Status

No Web Server configured

Indicates that no web server is configured.

Note: The Start button is disabled in this case.

Connected

Displayed when Internet connectivity is available for the gateway.

Running

Indicates that service has successfully started.

Disconnected

Displayed when Internet connectivity is unavailable for the gateway.

Stopped

Displayed when a service is stopped or when the respective subscription module is not subscribed.

Figure 232: Services

Related concepts

Authentication Policies

on page 170

This page allows you to configure authentication for firewall, VPN and admin traffic.

IPS Policies

on page 374

This page displays the list of all the pre-defined and custom IPS policies.

on page 494

The Authentication Policies menu allows you to configure policies for direct authentication.

IPv6 Router Advertisement

on page 147

Hotspots

on page 419

The Hotspots menu allows you to enable the Hotspots feature and define users who are allowed to view and distribute hotspot access information.

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 303

Protect

Firewall

Firewall rules are security rule-sets to implement control over users, applications or network objects in an organization. Using the firewall rule, you can create blanket or specialized traffic transit rules based on the requirement. This page provides centralized management for the entire set of device firewall rules. Sophos XG

Firewall implements a single pane of management to secure all enterprise applications using configuration templates for various rule types.

Following sections provide more information on the Firewall section.

•

Introduction

•

Managing Firewall Rules

•

Default Firewall Rules

•

Understanding Icons

•

Understanding List of Firewall Rules

Introduction

Firewall rules are based on the following configurable templates:

Business Application Rule

User/Network Rule

Managing Firewall Rules

You can see the entire list of added firewall rules from the Firewall page. Using the same page, you can update existing firewall rules or add new firewall rules. To change the processing order, you can re-order firewall rules by drag and drop action.

Note: All custom firewall rules can be re-ordered. The order of processing is top to bottom.

On the Firewall page, the following action buttons can be found.

• IPv4: Select to filter only IPv4 rules

• IPv6: Select to filter only IPv6 rules

• Enable Filter: Select to open filter view and apply the following filters for IPv4 or IPv6 rules:

1. Rule Type - Select to filter rules based on Business, User or Network

2. Source Zone - Select to filter rules based on LAN, WAN, DMZ, LOCAL, VPN or WiFi

3. Destination Zone - Select to filter rules based on LAN, WAN, DMZ, LOCAL, VPN or WiFi

4. State - Select to filter rules based on Unused, Disabled, Changed, New

5. Rule ID - Specify Rule ID to see the specific rule.

• Reset Filter (Available if filter is enabled) - Select to reset all filters

• Disable Filter (Available if filter is enabled) - Select to close filter view

• + Add Firewall Rule - Select to add a new rule among Business Application Rule, or User/Network Rule.

Testing Firewall Rules

You can test and troubleshoot firewall rules using the policy tester. Click Log Viewer and then click the Policy Test tab.

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 304

Default Firewall Rules

At the time of deployment, Network Configuration Wizard provides an option to enable User/Network Rule for LAN to WAN traffic and automatically creates default firewall rule Default_Network_Policy. You can apply

Web filter, App filter and IPS policy through this default policy from the Wizard itself or from Web Admin console whenever required.

Understanding Icons

There are various action icons as well as symbolic icons on the Firewall page. Color codes, meanings and associated actions of icons are shown below.

Icons Meaning

Business Application Rule Enabled

Business Application Rule Disabled

User Rule Disabled + Action - Accept

User Rule Disabled + Action - Drop/Reject

User Rule Enabled + Action - Drop/Reject

User Rule Enabled

Network Rule Enabled

Network Rule Disabled + Action - Accept

Network Rule Disabled + Action - Drop/Reject

Network Rule Enabled + Action - Drop/Reject

Anti-Virus Scanning Disable

Anti-Virus Scanning Enable

Application Control Disable

Application Control Allow All

Application Control Deny All

Application Control Drop

Icons Meaning

Security Heartbeat Disable / No Restriction

Security Heartbeat Enable - Green

Security Heartbeat Enable - Yellow

Security Heartbeat - No Restriction + No Heartbeat.

Security Heartbeat - No Restriction + Green

Security Heartbeat - No Restriction + Yellow

Intrusion Prevention Disable

Intrusion Prevention Enable

NAT Disable

NAT Enable

Traffic Shaping Policy Disabled

Traffic Shaping Policy Enabled

Web Policy Disable

Web Policy Allow

Web Policy Deny

Web Policy Drop

Routing Enabled

Routing Disabled

Firewall Rule enabled. Click to disable the rule.

Firewall Rule disabled. Click to enable the rule.

Expand the rule for more information.

Collapse Rule

Edit Rule

Delete Rule (not applicable for default rules)

Dragger

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 305

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 306

Icons

Color Codes

Red

Green

Yellow

Blue

Grey

Meaning

Reject/Drop

Accept/Allow

Drop (In case of policies)

On/Enable

Off/Disable

Understanding the List of Firewall Rules

All added rules are available in the form of a list. Each rule in the list presents a quick snapshot of the rule.

Details of the rule:

• Rule Name: Name of the rule

• In/Out: Amount of traffic (in bytes) coming in or going out using the particular rule

• Firewall Rule Features: Status of schedule, Heartbeat, IPS, and traffic shaping

• Source: Source zone

• Destination: Destination zone

• What: Displays protected domains/services

• Action: Status of protected servers, status of web and application protection for user

• ID: Rule ID

• User’s Policy Applied: Status of application filter, web policy, AV and AS scanning, NAT policy and route through gateway, if configured

To view details of the Source, Destination, What (type of service) and Features, hover over the Features.

•

Click for the following options to appear:

• Clone Above

• Clone Below

• Add Above Network Rule

• Add Above Business Rule

• Add Below Network Rule

• Add Below Business Rule

• Add to Group: List of existing groups is displayed. You can edit the groups or create a new group.

• Delete

• Detach: To detach a firewall rule from a group.

User / Network Rule

User/Network Rule is used to define access rights and protection to the network objects/hosts. In a nutshell, if you want to control traffic by source, service, destination, zone, then use a Network Rule. Additionally, the administrator has the option to attach user identity to a rule in order to customize access of assorted hosts/servers. Such an identity based rule is considered a User Rule.

You can view or add a User/Network Rule for IPv4 and IPv6 traffic.

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 307

Add User / Network Rule (IPv4)

Add User / Network Rule (IPv6)

Add User/Network Rule (IPv4)

This page allows you to create firewall rules to control traffic that uses the IPv4 protocol. The firewall rules control traffic between internal and external networks and protect the network from unauthorized access. The device determines the rule to be applied based on the source and destination zone you configure in the firewall rule. Use this page to create identity-based firewall rules by applying them to users.

1. Go to Protect > Firewall and select IPv4. using the filter switch.

2. Click +Add Firewall Rule and User/Network Rule.

3. Enter the rule introduction details.

Rule Name

Enter a name for the rule.

Description

Enter a description for the rule.

Rule Position

Specify the position of the rule from the available options.

Available Options:

Top Bottom

Action

Specify an action for the rule traffic from the available options. Accept – Allow accessDrop –

Silently discardReject – Deny access (“ICMP port unreachable” message is sent to the source)

When sending a response it might be possible that the response is sent using a different interface than the one on which the request was received. This may happen depending on the routing configuration done on the device.

For example: If the request is received on the LAN port using a spoofed IP address (public IP address or the IP address not in the LAN zone network) and no specific route is defined, the device will send a response to these hosts using the default route. Hence, the response will be sent through the WAN port.

Figure 233: About This Rule

4. Enter the Source details.

Source Zones

Select the source zones allowed to the user.

A new zone can be created directly from this page itself or from Configure > Network > Zones page.

Source Networks and Devices

Select the source networks/devices allowed to the user.

A new network host can be created directly from this page itself or from System > Hosts and

Services.

During Scheduled Time

Select the schedule allowed to the user.

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 308

A new schedule can be created directly from this page itself or from the System > Profiles >

Schedule page.

Figure 234: Source

5. Enter the Destination and Services details.

Destination Zones

Select the destination zones allowed to the user.

Destination Networks

Select the destination networks allowed to the user.

A new network host can be created directly from this page itself or from System > Hosts and

Services.

Services

Select the services allowed to the user.

A new service can be created directly from this page itself or from the System > Hosts and

Services > Services page.

Figure 235: Destination

6. Enter Identity details. Follow this step if you want to configure a User Rule.

Match known users

Select to enable a rule based on the user identity.

Show captive portal to unknown users (available only if Match known users is selected)

Select the check box to accept traffic from unknown users. Captive portal page is displayed to the user where the user can login to access the Internet.

Clear the check box to drop traffic from unknown users.

User or Groups(available only if Match known users is selected)

Select the user(s) or group(s) from the list of available options.

Exclude this user activity from data accounting. (only available if Match known users is selected)

Select to exclude user traffic activity from data accounting. In other words, the traffic allowed through this rule will not be accounted towards data transfer for the user.

By default, user’s network traffic is considered in data accounting.

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 309

Figure 236: Identity

7. Enter Web Malware and Content Scanning details (available only if Action selected for the traffic is Accept).

Scan HTTP

Enable HTTP traffic scanning.

Decrypt & Scan HTTPS

Enable HTTPS traffic decryption and scanning.

Detect zero-day threats with Sandstorm

Send files downloaded using HTTP or HTTPS for analysis by Sandstorm. Sandstorm protects your network against unknown and unpublished threats (“zero-day” threats).

Scan FTP for Malware

Enable FTP traffic scanning.

8. Enter Advanced settings details (available only if Action selected for the traffic is Accept).

a) Specify policies for User Applications.

Intrusion Prevention

Select an IPS policy for the rule. A new IPS policy can be created directly from this page itself or from Protect > Intrusion Prevention > IPS Policies page.

Traffic Shaping Policy

User’s traffic shaping policy will be applied automatically if Match known users is selected.

You need to select traffic shaping policy for the rule if Match known users is not selected.

Web Policy

Select a web policy for the rule.

A new web policy can be created directly from this page itself or from the Protect > Web > Policies page.

Apply Web Category based Traffic Shaping Policy

Click to restrict bandwidth for the URLs categorized under the Web category.

A three step configuration is required as follows:

1. Create a traffic shaping policy from the System > Profiles > Traffic Shaping page. Here, specify the Policy Association as Web Categories.

2. Now, on this page assign the created policy to Web Policy.

3. Select Apply Web Category based Traffic Shaping Policy to apply the rule.

Application Control

Select an application filter policy for the rule. A new application filter policy can be created directly from this page itself or from the Protect > Applications > Application Filter page.

Apply Application-based Traffic Shaping Policy

Click to restrict bandwidth for the applications categorized under the Application category.

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 310

A three step configuration is required as follows:

1. Create a traffic shaping policy from the System > Profiles > Traffic Shaping page. Here, specify the Policy Association as Applications.

2. Now, on this page assign the created policy to Application Control.

3. Select Apply Application-based Traffic Shaping Policy to apply the rule.

Figure 237: User Applications

b) Configure Synchronized Security settings.

Minimum Source HB Permitted

Select a minimum health status that a source device must have to conform to this rule. Health status can be either Green, Yellow or No Restriction. If the health criterion is not met, access and privileges defined in this rule will not be granted to the user.

Block clients with no heartbeat

Heartbeat-capable devices can be required to send information on their health status in defined intervals - this is called a heartbeat.

Based on that information, you can restrict a source device’s access to certain services and networks.

Enable/disable the option to require the sending of heartbeats.

Minimum Destination HB Permitted (not available if the only Destination Zone selected is WAN)

Select a minimum health status that a destination device must have to conform to this rule. Health status can be either Green, Yellow or No Restriction. If the health criterion is not met, access and privileges defined in this rule will not be granted to the user.

Note: You can use the option if you have selected multiple zones along with WAN.

Block request to destination with no heartbeat (not available if the only Destination Zone selected is

WAN)

Heartbeat-capable devices can be required to send information on their health status in defined intervals - this is called a heartbeat.

Based on that information, you can block requests to destinations not sending heartbeat.

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 311

Enable/disable the option to require the sending of heartbeats.

Note: You can use the option if you have selected multiple zones along with WAN.

Figure 238: Synchronized Security

c) Enter NAT and Routing details.

Rewrite source address (Masquerading)

Select if you want to re-write the source address or specify a NAT policy.

Default: Disabled

Use Gateway Specific Default NAT Policy (available only if Masquerading is selected)

Select to override the default NAT policy with a gateway specific policy.

Override default NAT policy for specific Gateway (available only if Use Gateway Specific Default

NAT Policy is selected)

Select to specify gateway and corresponding NAT policy. Multiple gateways and NAT policies can be added.

Use Outbound Address (available only if Rewrite source address is selected)

Select the NAT policy to be applied from the list of available NAT policies.

A new NAT policy can be created directly from this page itself or from the System > Profiles >

Network Address Translation page.

Default: MASQ.

MASQ (Interface Default IP)

• IP Address of the Destination Zone as configured in Configure > Network > Interfaces will be displayed instead of (Interface Default IP) when single Destination Zone is selected.

• (Interface Default IP) will be displayed when multiple Destination Zones are selected.

Primary Gateway

Specify the Primary Gateway. This is applicable only if more than one gateway is defined.

Note: On deletion of the gateway, Primary Gateway will display WAN Link Load

Balance for WAN Destination Zone and None for other zones. In such case, firewall rule will not make routing decisions.

Backup Gateway

Specify the Backup Gateway. This is applicable only if more than one gateway is defined.

Note: On deletion of the gateway, Backup Gateway will display None.

DSCP Marking

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 312

Select the DSCP Marking.

DSCP (DiffServ Code Point) classifies flow of packets as they enter the local network depending upon QoS. Flow is defined by 5 elements; source IP address, destination IP address, source port, destination port and the transport protocol.

For available options, refer to

DSCP Values

Figure 239: NAT & Routing

9. Define logging option for the user application traffic.

Log Firewall Traffic

Select to enable logging of permitted and denied traffic.

Figure 240: Log Traffic

10. Click Save.

Add User / Network Rule (IPv6)

This page allows you to create firewall rules to control traffic that uses the IPv6 protocol. The firewall rules control traffic between internal and external networks and protect the network from unauthorized access. The device determines the rule to be applied based on the source and destination zone you configure in the firewall rule. Use this page to create identity-based firewall rules by applying them to users.

1. Go to Protect > Firewall and select IPv6. using the filter switch.

2. Click +Add Firewall Rule and User/Network Rule.

3. Specify the policy introduction details.

Rule Name

Enter a name for the rule.

Description

Specify a description for the rule.

Rule Position

Specify the position of the rule from the available options.

Available Options:

Top Bottom

Action

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 313

Specify an action for the rule traffic from the available options. Accept – Allow accessDrop –

Silently discardReject – Deny access (“ICMP port unreachable” message is sent to the source)

Figure 241: About This Rule

4. Specify Source details.

Source Zones

Select the source zones allowed to the user.

Source Networks and Devices

Select the source networks/devices allowed to the user.

A new network host can be created directly from this page itself by clicking Create new or from

System > Hosts and Services.

During Scheduled Time

Select the schedule allowed to the user.

A new schedule can be created directly from this page itself or from the System > Profiles >

Schedule page.

Figure 242: Source

5. Specify Destination and Services details.

Destination Zones

Select the destination zones allowed to the user.

Destination Networks

Select the destination networks allowed to the user.

A new network host can be created directly from this page itself by clicking Create new or from

System > Hosts and Services.

Services

Select the services(s) allowed to the user.

A new service can be created directly from this page itself or from the System > Hosts and

Services > Services page.

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 314

Figure 243: Destination

6. Specify Identity details.

Match known users

Select to enable a rule based on the user identity.

Show Captive Portal to unknown users

Select the check box to accept traffic from unknown users. Captive portal page is displayed to the user where the user can login to access the Internet.

Clear the check box to drop traffic from unknown users.

User or Groups(available only if Match known users is selected)

Select the user(s) or group(s) from the list of available options.

Exclude this user activity from data accounting (only available if Match known users is selected)

Select to enable/disable user traffic activity from data accounting.

By default, user’s network traffic is considered in data accounting. Select to exclude certain traffic user data accounting. The traffic allowed through this rule will not be accounted towards data transfer for the user.

Figure 244: Identity

7. Specify Web Malware and Content Scanning details. (available only if Action for the traffic is Accept)

Scan HTTP

Enable HTTP traffic scanning.

Decrypt & Scan HTTPS

Enable HTTPS traffic decryption and scanning.

Detect zero-day threats with Sandstorm

Send files downloaded using HTTP or HTTPS for analysis by Sandstorm. Sandstorm protects your network against unknown and unpublished threats (“zero-day” threats).

8. Specify Advanced settings details (available only if Action for the traffic is Accept) a) Specify policies for user applications.

Intrusion Prevention (IPS)

Select an IPS policy for the rule. A new IPS policy can be created directly from this page itself or from Protect > Intrusion Prevention > IPS Policies page.

Traffic Shaping Policy

User’s traffic shaping policy will be applied automatically if Match known users is selected.

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 315

You need to select traffic shaping policy for the rule if Match known users is not selected.

Web Policy

Select a web policy for the rule.

A new web policy can be created directly from this page itself or from the Protect > Web > Policies page.

Apply Web Category based Traffic Shaping Policy

Click to restrict bandwidth for the URLs categorized under the Web category.

A three step configuration is required as follows:

1. Create a traffic shaping policy on the System > Profiles > Traffic Shapingpage. Here, specify the Policy Association as Web Categories.

2. Now, on this page assign the created policy to Web Policy .

3. Select Apply Web Category based Traffic Shaping Policy to apply the policy.

Application Control

Apply Application-based Traffic Shaping Policy

Click to restrict bandwidth for the applications categorized under the Application category.

A three step configuration is required as follows:

1. Create a traffic shaping policy from the System > Profiles > Traffic Shaping page. Here, specify the Policy Association as Applications.

2. Now, on this page assign the created policy to Application Control.

3. Select Apply Web based Traffic Shaping Policy to apply the policy.

Figure 245: User Applications

b) Specify Routing details.

Rewrite source address (Masquerading)

Disable if you do not want to re-write the source address or specify a NAT policy.

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 316

Default - Enabled

Use Gateway Specific Default NAT Policy (only if Masquerading is selected)

Click to override the default NAT policy with a gateway specific policy.

Override default NAT policy for specific Gateway (only if Use Gateway Specific Default NAT Policy

is selected )

Enable to specify gateway and corresponding NAT policy. Multiple gateways and NAT policies can be added.

Use Outbound Address (only if Rewrite source address is selected)

Select the NAT policy to be applied from the list of available NAT policies.

A new NAT policy can be created directly from this page itself or from the System > Profiles >

Network Address Translation page.

Default: MASQ.

MASQ (Interface Default IP)

• IP Address of the Destination Zone as configured in Configure > Network > Interfaces will be displayed instead of (Interface Default IP) when single Destination Zone is selected.

• (Interface Default IP) will be displayed when multiple Destination Zones are selected.

Primary Gateway

Specify the primary gateway. This is applicable only if more than one gateway is defined.

Note: On deletion of the gateway, Primary Gateway will display WAN Link Load

Balance for WAN Destination Zone and None for other zones. In such case, firewall rule will not make routing decisions.

Backup Gateway

Specify the backup gateway. This is applicable only if more than one gateway is defined.

Note: On deletion of the gateway, Backup Gateway will display None.

DSCP Marking

Select the DSCP Marking.

DSCP (DiffServ Code Point) classifies flow of packets as they enter the local network depending upon QoS. Flow is defined by 5 elements; Source IP Address, Destination IP Address, Source port,

Destination port and the transport protocol.

For available options, refer to

DSCP Values

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 317

Figure 246: NAT & Routing

9. Define logging option for the user application traffic.

Log Firewall Traffic

Click to enable logging of permitted and denied traffic.

Figure 247: Log Traffic

10. Click Save.

DSCP Value

DiffServ Code Point (DSCP) uses the 6 bits, thereby giving 2^6 = 64 different values (0 to 63). describes the standard

DSCP values. Remaining DSCP values can be customized as per the QoS requirement.

Decimal

DSCP

AF23

CS3

AF31

AF32

AF33

CS4

Default

CS1

AF11

AF12

AF13

CS2

AF21

AF22

Description

Best Effort

Class 1 (CS1)

Class 1, Gold (AF11)

Class 1, Silver (AF12)

Class 1, Bronze (AF13)

Class 2 (CS2)

Class 2, Gold (AF21)

Class 2, Silver (AF22)

Class 2, Bronze (AF23)

Class 3 (CS3)

Class 3, Gold (AF31)

Class 3, Silver (AF32)

Class 3, Bronze (AF33)

Class 4 (CS4)

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 318

Decimal

DSCP

AF41

AF42

AF43

CS5

CS6

CS7

Description

Class 4, Gold (AF41)

Class 4, Silver (AF42)

Class 4, Bronze (AF43)

Class 5 (CS5)

Expedited Forwarding (EF)

Control (CS6)

Control (CS7)

Business Application Rule

Business Application Rule is used to protect internally or publicly hosted business applications or servers like

SalesForce, Sharepoint etc.

Using Business Application Rule, the administrator can configure protection of the http and non-http web servers from unauthorized access over the Internet. You can also control access of protected server or services through a

Business Application Rule.

Several templates are available that cover protection configuration for a variety of different types of http and non-http web servers and application. A list of these application templates appear on the Business Application Rule page.

Adding a Business Application Rule

Go to Protect > Firewall and select IPv4. using the filter switch. Now, click on +Add Firewall Rule and select

Business Application Rule. You can then select the Application Template from the list of available templates.

The application template allows you to choose the rule which suits the configuration of the required business application. Once you select the template, you can see the configuration page with few fields pre-populated. The prepopulated values eliminate the need to manually specify the configuration for securing your business application, but you may customize the settings according to your network setup or other requirements.

DNAT/Full NAT/Load Balancing rule

- It is used to protect Non-Web servers, like mail or other servers hosted

inside the network (LAN or DMZ). Using this template, you can define access rights of such servers to users who require access over the WAN or Internet. Additionally, you can use the following Non-web application template:

Email Server (SMTP)

: Email Server (SMTP) rule is used to protect mail servers which are hosted internally in a

network and require protection.

Email Clients (POP & IMAP)

- Email Clients (POP and IMAP) rule is used to protect mail servers which are

hosted publicly (WAN) and require protection.

Note:

If you delete Email Clients rule, the Emails which are under process by this rule will be queued but will not be delivered.

We recommend to follow below given steps so that you do not lose all the emails processed by this rule:

1. Before deleting this rule, clone this rule by choosing Clone Above option and change the Action to

Drop. This cloned rule will hold all the incoming emails.

2. Go to Email > Mail Spool and check if spool is empty.

3. Once the spool is empty, delete both the firewall rules.

Application Protection Templates for common HTTP-based Applications

SF-OS offers several pre-configured templates to create a protection rule for commonly used HTTP-based applications. You can use a pre-configured template to create a rule for the web application that is close to your configuration, then modify it to fit your needs.

Pre-configured templates for common HTTP applications include:

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 319

Web Server Protection (WAF)

- Web Server Protection is used to protect HTTP or generic web application servers

hosted in the network. This template is essentially WAF implementation but with additional benefit of defining

WAF objects, rules, exceptions from the same page.

Exchange Autodiscover

Exchange Outlook Anywhere

Exchange General

Microsoft Lync

Microsoft Remote Desktop Gateway 2008 and R2

Microsoft Remote Desktop Web 2008 and R2

Microsoft Sharepoint 2010 and 2013

Add Web Server Protection (WAF) Rule

This page allows you to control HTTP traffic flowing to and from a web application. Use this page to create a Web

Server Protection (WAF) rule for traffic that uses the IPv4 protocol.

1. Go to Protect > Firewall and make sure that IPv4 is selected.

2. Click +Add Firewall Rule and Business Application Rule.

3. Enter the general rule details.

Application Template

Select Web Server Protection (WAF) to define an application filter policy for HTTP-based applications.

Rule Name

Enter a name for the rule.

Description

Enter a description for the rule.

Rule Position

Specify the position of the rule.

Available Options:

• Top

• Bottom

Figure 248: About this Rule

4. Enter the Hosted Server details.

Hosted Address

Select the interface of the hosted server to which the rule applies. It is the public IP address through which Internet users access the internal server/host.

Note: When a client establishes a connection and accesses the web server, the web server does not obtain the client’s real IP address. The server obtains the address of the interface used by the Web Application Firewall (WAF) since the connection is made through the WAF. The client’s real IP address is available in the HTTP header

Listening Port

Enter a port number on which the hosted web server can be reached externally over the Internet.

Default is port 80 for plaintext communication (HTTP) and port 443 for encrypted communication

(HTTPS).

HTTPS

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 320

Select to enable or disable scanning of HTTPS traffic.

HTTPS Certificate (available only if HTTPS is selected)

Select the HTTPS certificate to be used.

Redirect HTTP (available only if HTTPS is selected)

Select to redirect HTTP requests. Thus, users entering the URL without “https://” will be redirected automatically to the hosted server.

Note: An HTTP request requires a host header if Redirect HTTP is enabled.

Domains

Enter the FQDN of domains for which the web server is responsible. Wildcards are not allowed.

Examples:

• example.com

• www.example.com

• subdomain.example.com

(If HTTPS is enabled): Domains that are part of the selected HTTPS certificate are automatically available in the Domains box.

Figure 249: Hosted Server

5. Specify the Protected Server(s) details.

Path-specific routing

You can enable path-specific routing to define (a path) to which web servers incoming requests are forwarded.

You can define that all URLs with a specific path, for example, /products/, are sent to a specific web server. On the other hand you can allow more than one web server for a specific request but add rules how to distribute the requests among the servers. Additionally, you can define that each session is bound to one web server throughout its lifetime (sticky session). This may be necessary if you host an online shop and want to make sure that a user sticks to one server during the shopping session. You can also configure to send all requests to one web server and use the others only as a backup.

For each hosted web server, one default site path route (with path /) is created automatically. The device automatically applies the site path routes in the most reasonable way: starting with the strictest, i.e., longest paths and ending with the default path route which is only used if no other more specific site path route matches the incoming request. The order of the site path route list is not relevant. If no route matches an incoming request, (in case the default route was deleted), the request will be denied.

Add New Path (available only if Path-specific routing is selected)

Click Add Path to define a new path.

Note: Add New Path will only be active after at least one web server and one hosted web server have been created.

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 321

Web Server (not available if Path-specific routing is selected)

With this option, you select the web servers that are to be protected. Select a web server from Web

Server list. The selected web server is displayed on the right side of the table under Selected Web

Server(s).

A new web server can be created on the Protect > Web Server > Web Servers page.

Figure 250: Protected Server(s)

6. Specify Access Permission details (not available if Path-specific routing is selected).

Allowed Client Networks

Select or add the allowed networks that should be able to connect to the hosted web server.

Blocked Client Networks

Select or add the denied networks that should be blocked to your hosted web server.

Authentication

Select a web app authentication profile or click Create new to create a new authentication profile.

You can also create an authentication profile from the Protect > Web Server > Authentication

Policies page.

Figure 251: Access Permission

7. Add path Exceptions for the web servers.

Click Add New Exception to specify a new exception.

Figure 252: Exceptions

8. Specify Advanced settings.

a) Specify Policies for Business Applications.

Protection

Select an application protection policy for the server or create a new one. A new application protection policy can be created directly from this page or from the Protect > Web Server >

Protection Policies page. You can also choose to have None application protection.

Intrusion Prevention

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 322

Select an Intrusion Prevention policy for the rule or create a new one. A new IPS policy can be created directly from this page or from the Protect > Intrusion Prevention > IPS Policies page.

You can also choose to have None intrusion prevention.

Traffic Shaping

The traffic shaping policy allocates & limits the maximum bandwidth usage of the user.

Select a traffic shaping policy for the rule or create a new one. A new traffic shaping policy can be created directly from this page or from the System > System Services > Traffic Shaping page. You can also choose to have None traffic shaping.

Figure 253: Policies for Business Applications

b) Specify Additional Options for the added server.

Disable Compression Support

By default, this check box is disabled and the content is sent compressed when the client requests compressed data. Compression increases transmission speed and reduces page load time. However, if websites are displayed incorrectly or users experience content-encoding errors when accessing your web servers, it may be necessary to disable compression. When the check box is enabled, the

WAF will request uncompressed data from the web servers of this hosted web server and will send it uncompressed to the client, independent of the HTTP request’s encoding parameter.

Rewrite HTML

Select this option to have the device rewrite links of the returned webpages in order for the links to stay valid. Example: One of your web server instances has the hostname yourcompany.local but the hosted web server’s hostname on the device is yourcompany.com. Thus, absolute links like

[a href="http://yourcompany.local/"] will be broken if the link is not rewritten to [a href="http:// yourcompany.com/"] before delivery to the client. However, you do not need to enable this option if either yourcompany.com is configured on your web server or if internal links on your webpages are always realized as relative links. It is recommended to use the option with Microsoft’s Outlook web access and/or SharePoint portal server.

Note: HTML rewriting affects all files with a HTTP content type of text/* or *xml*, where * is a wildcard. Make sure that other file types, e.g. binary files, have the correct HTTP content type, otherwise they may get corrupted by the HTML rewriting process.

Rewrite cookies (available only if Rewrite HTML is selected)

Select this option to have the device rewrite cookies of the returned web pages.

Pass Host Header

When you select this option, the host header as requested by the client will be preserved and forwarded along with the web request to the web server. Whether passing the host header is necessary in your environment depends on the configuration of your web server.

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 323

Figure 254: Advanced

9. Click Save.

Note: As soon as a new HTTP based rule configuration has been created and saved or an existing HTTP based rule configuration has been altered and saved, all HTTP based business rules will be restarted. Any underlying client connection using a HTTP based business rule will get lost and has to be re-established.

The business application rule has been created and appears on the Firewall page when the IPv4 filter is set.

Related tasks

Add Authentication Policy

on page 352

(only available for the HTTP based business application rules) This page describes how to define a path to which real web servers incoming requests are forwarded.

on page 494

This page describes how to add a web app authentication policy.

on page 353

(only available for the HTTP based business application rules) This page describes how to specify path exceptions for the web servers.

Add Rule for Exchange Autodiscover

(Only available for IPv4 policy) This page describes how to configure a rule for Exchange Autodiscover.

1. Go to Protect > Firewall and select IPv4. using the filter switch.

2. Click +Add Firewall Rule and Business Application Rule.

3. Specify the general rule details.

Application Template

Select Exchange Autodiscover to configure a policy for an Exchange Autodiscover environment.

Description

Enter a description for the rule.

Rule Position

Specify the position of the rule.

Available Options:

• Top

• Bottom

Rule Name

Specify a name for the rule.

Figure 255: About This Rule

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 324

4. Specify Hosted Server details.

Hosted Address

Specify the address of the hosted server to which the rule applies. It is the public IP address through which Internet users access an internal server/host.

Listening Port

Enter a port number on which the hosted web server can be reached externally over the Internet.

Default is port 80 for plaintext communication (HTTP) and port 443 for encrypted communication

(HTTPS).

HTTPS

Select this option to enable or disable HTTPS traffic.

HTTPS Certificate (available only if HTTPS is selected)

Select the HTTPS certificate to be used.

Redirect HTTP (available only if HTTPS is selected)

Select this option to redirect HTTP requests.

Domains

Use FQDN when you enter the domains the web server is responsible for, for example, shop.example.com.

Figure 256: Hosted Server

5. Specify Protected Server(s) details.

Path-specific routing

You can enable path-specific routing to define (the path) to which web servers incoming requests are forwarded.

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 325 not relevant. If no route matches an incoming request, (in case the default route was deleted), the request will be denied.

Default: Enabled

Add New Path (available only if Path-specific routing is selected)

Click Add New Path to define a new path.

Note: Add New Path will only be active only after at least one web server and one hosted web server have been created.

Default: /autodiscover, /Autodiscover, /AutoDiscover

Web Server (not available if Path-specific routing is selected)

Web servers are the application servers to be protected. Select a web server from the list of web servers or enter a web server and click Create to add a web server.

A new web server can be created directly from this page or from the Protect > Web Server > Web

Servers page.

Figure 257: Protected Server(s)

6. Specify Access Permission details (not available if Path-specific routing is selected).

Allowed Client Networks

Select the allowed host(s)/network(s).

Blocked Client Networks

Select the blocked host(s)/network(s).

Authentication

Select the web application authentication profile from the list of available profiles.

You can also create a new authentication profile on this page or on the Protect > Web Server >

Authentication Policies page.

Figure 258: Access Permission

7. Add path Exceptions for the web servers.

Click Add New Exception to specify new exception.

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 326

Default: /autodiscover/*,/Autodiscover/*

Figure 259: Exceptions

8. Specify Advanced settings.

a) Specify Policies for Business Applications.

Protection

Select an application protection policy for the server or create a new one. A new application protection policy can be created directly from this page or from the Protect > Web Server >

Protection Policies page. You can also choose to have None application protection.

Intrusion Prevention

You can also choose to have None intrusion prevention.

Traffic Shaping

The traffic shaping policy allocates & limits the maximum bandwidth usage of the user.

Figure 260: Policies for Business Applications

b) Specify Additional Options for the added server.

Disable Compression Support

WAF will request uncompressed data from the web servers of this hosted web server and will send it uncompressed to the client, independent of the HTTP request’s encoding parameter.

Rewrite HTML

Select this option to have the device rewrite links of the returned webpages in order for the links to stay valid. Example: One of your web server instances has the hostname yourcompany.local but

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 327 the hosted web server’s hostname on the device is yourcompany.com. Thus, absolute links like

Rewrite cookies (available only if Rewrite HTML is selected)

Select this option to have the device rewrite cookies of the returned web pages.

Pass Host Header

Figure 261: Advanced

9. Click Save.

Note: As soon as a new HTTP based policy configuration has been created and saved or an existing

HTTP based rule configuration has been altered and saved, all HTTP based business rules will be restarted. Any underlying client connection using a HTTP based business rule will get lost and has to be re-established.

The firewall rule for Microsoft Remote Desktop Gateway 2008 and R2 has been created and appears on the Firewall page when the IPv4 filter is set.

Add Rule for Exchange Outlook Anywhere

(only available for IPv4 policy) This page describes how to configure a rule for Exchange Outlook Anywhere.

1. Go to Protect > Firewall and select IPv4. using the filter switch.

2. Click +Add Firewall Rule and Business Application Rule.

3. Specify the general policy details.

Application Template

Select Exchange Outlook Anywhere to configure rule for Exchange Outlook Anywhere.

Description

Enter a description for the rule.

Rule Position

Specify the position of the rule.

Available Options: TopBottom

Rule Name

Specify a name for the rule.

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 328

Figure 262: About This Rule

4. Specify Hosted Server details.

Hosted Address

Specify the address of the hosted server to which the rule applies. It is the public IP address through which Internet users access an internal server/host.

Listening Port

Enter a port number on which the hosted web server can be reached externally over the Internet.

Default is port 80 for plaintext communication (HTTP) and port 443 for encrypted communication

(HTTPS).

HTTPS

Select to enable or disable of HTTPS traffic.

HTTPS Certificate (available only if HTTPS is selected)

Select the HTTPS certificate to be used.

Redirect HTTP (available only if HTTPS is selected)

Select to redirect HTTP requests.

Domains

Use FQDN when you enter the domains the web server is responsible for, for example, shop.example.com.

Figure 263: Hosted Server

5. Specify Protected Server(s) details.

Path-specific routing

You can enable path-specific routing to define (path) to which web servers incoming requests are forwarded.

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 329 session. You can also configure to send all requests to one web server and use the others only as a backup.

Add New Path (available only if Path-specific routing is selected)

Click Add New Path to define a new path.

Note: Add New Path will only be active after at least one web server and one hosted web server have been created.

Default: /rpc, /RPC

Web Server (not available if Path-specific routing is selected)

Web servers are the application servers that are to be protected. Select a web server from the list of web servers or click Add New Item to add a web server.

A new web server can be created directly from this page or from the Protect > Web Server > Web

Servers page.

Figure 264: Protected Server(s)

6. Specify Access Permission details. (not available if Path-specific routing is selected).

Allowed Client Networks

Select the allowed host(s)/network(s).

Blocked Client Networks

Select the blocked host(s)/network(s).

Authentication

Select the web application authentication profile from the list of available profiles. You can also create a new authentication profile from this page or from the Protect > Web Server >

Authentication Policies page.

Figure 265: Access Permission

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 330

7. Add path Exceptions for the web servers.

Click Add New Exception to specify new exception.

Default: /rpc/*,/RPC/*.

Figure 266: Exceptions

8. Specify Advanced settings.

a) Specify Policies for Business Applications.

Protection

Select an application protection policy for the server or create a new one. A new application protection policy can be created directly from this page or from the Protect > Web Server >

Protection Policies page. You can also choose to have None application protection.

Intrusion Prevention

You can also choose to have None intrusion prevention.

Traffic Shaping

The traffic shaping policy allocates & limits the maximum bandwidth usage of the user.

Figure 267: Policies for Business Applications

b) Specify Additional Options for the added server.

Disable Compression Support

WAF will request uncompressed data from the web servers of this hosted web server and will send it uncompressed to the client, independent of the HTTP request’s encoding parameter.

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 331

Rewrite HTML

Rewrite cookies (available only if Rewrite HTML is selected)

Select this option to have the device rewrite cookies of the returned web pages.

Pass Host Header

Figure 268: Advanced

9. Click Save.

The Exchange Outlook Anywhere rule has been created and appears on the Firewall page when the IPv4 filter is set.

Add Rule for Exchange General

(only available for IPv4 policy) This page describes how to configure a rule for Exchange General.

1. Go to Protect > Firewall and select IPv4. using the filter switch.

2. Click +Add Firewall Rule and Business Application Rule.

3. Specify the general policy details.

Application Template

Select Exchange General to configure a rule for Exchange General.

Description

Enter a description for the rule.

Rule Position

Specify the position of the rule.

Available Options: TopBottom

Rule Name

Specify a name for the rule.

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 332

Figure 269: About This Rule

4. Specify Hosted Server details.

Hosted Address

Specify the address of the hosted server to which the rule applies. It is the public IP address through which Internet users access an internal server/host.

Listening Port

Enter a port number on which the hosted web server can be reached externally over the Internet.

Default is port 80 for plaintext communication (HTTP) and port 443 for encrypted communication

(HTTPS).

HTTPS

Select to enable or disable of HTTPS traffic.

HTTPS Certificate (available only if HTTPS is selected)

Select the HTTPS certificate to be used.

Redirect HTTP (available only if HTTPS is selected)

Select to redirect HTTP requests.

Domains

Use FQDN when you enter the domains the web server is responsible for, for example, shop.example.com.

Figure 270: Hosted Server

5. Specify Protected Server(s) details.

Path-specific routing

You can enable path-specific routing to define (path) to which web servers incoming requests are forwarded.

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 333 session. You can also configure to send all requests to one web server and use the others only as a backup.

Add New Path (available only if Path-specific routing is selected)

Click Add New Path to define a new path.

Note: Add New Path will only be active after at least one web server and one hosted web server have been created.

Default: /owa, /OWA, /ecp, /ECP, /oab, /OAB, /ews, /EWS, /oma, /OMA, /Microsoft-Server-

ActiveSync

Web Servers (not available if Path-specific routing is selected)

Web servers are the application servers that are to be protected. Select a web server from the list of web servers or click Add New Item to add a web server.

A new web server can be created directly from this page or from the Protect > Web Server > Web

Servers page.

Figure 271: Protected Server(s)

6. Specify Access Permission details. (not available if Path-specific routing is selected)

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 334

Allowed Client Networks

Select the allowed host(s)/network(s).

Blocked Client Networks

Select the blocked host(s)/network(s).

Authentication

Select the web application authentication profile from the list of available profiles. You can also create new authentication profile on this page or on the Protect > Web Server > Authentication

Policies page.

Figure 272: Access Permission

7. Add path Exceptions for the web servers.

Click Add New Exception to specify a new exception.

Default: /owa/*,/OWA/*,/ews/*,/EWS/*,/ecp/*,/ECP/*,/oab/*,/OAB/*,/oma/*,/OMA/*,/Microsoft-Server-

ActiveSync?*, /owa/ev.owa*

Figure 273: Exceptions

8. Specify Advanced settings.

a) Specify Policies for Business Applications.

Protection

Select an application protection policy for the server or create a new one. A new application protection policy can be created directly from this page or from the Protect > Web Server >

Protection Policies page. You can also choose to have None application protection.

Intrusion Prevention

You can also choose to have None intrusion prevention.

Traffic Shaping

The traffic shaping policy allocates & limits the maximum bandwidth usage of the user.

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 335

Figure 274: Policies for Business Applications

b) Specify Additional Options for the added server.

Disable Compression Support

WAF will request uncompressed data from the web servers of this hosted web server and will send it uncompressed to the client, independent of the HTTP request’s encoding parameter.

Rewrite HTML

Rewrite cookies (available only if Rewrite HTML is selected)

Select this option to have the device rewrite cookies of the returned web pages.

Pass Host Header

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 336

Figure 275: Advanced

9. Click Save.

The Exchange General rule has been created and appears on the Firewall page when the IPv4 filter is set.

Add Rule for Microsoft Lync

(only available for IPv4 policy) This page describes how to configure a rule for Microsoft Lync.

1. Go to Protect > Firewall and select IPv4. using the filter switch.

2. Click +Add Firewall Rule and Business Application Rule.

3. Specify the general rule details.

Application Template

Select Microsoft Lync to define Application filter policy for HTTP based applications.

Description

Enter a description for the rule.

Rule Position

Specify the position of the rule.

Available Options:

• Top

• Bottom

Rule Name

Specify a name to identify the rule.

Figure 276: About This Rule

4. Specify Hosted Server details.

Hosted Address

Specify the address of the hosted server to which the rule applies. It is the public IP address through which Internet users access internal server/host.

Listening Port

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 337

Enter a port number on which the hosted web server can be reached externally over the Internet.

Default is port 80 for plaintext communication (HTTP) and port 443 for encrypted communication

(HTTPS).

HTTPS

Click to enable or disable of HTTPS traffic.

HTTPS Certificate (available if HTTPS is enabled)

Select the HTTPS certificate to be used.

Redirect HTTP (available if HTTPS is enabled)

Click to redirect HTTP requests.

Domains

Use FQDN when you enter the domains the web server is responsible for, for example, shop.example.com.

Figure 277: Hosted Server

5. Specify Protected Server(s) details.

Path-specific routing

You can enable path-specific routing to define (the path) to which web servers incoming requests are forwarded.

Add New Path (available if Path-specific routing is enabled)

Click Add Path to define a new path.

Note: Add New Path will only be active after at least one web server and one hosted web server have been created.

Web Server (available if Path-specific routing is disabled)

Hosts are the web servers that are to be protected. Select a web server from the list of web servers or click Add New Item to add a web server.

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 338

A new web server can be created directly from this page or from the Protect > Web Server > Web

Servers page.

Figure 278: Protected Application Server(s)

6. Specify Access Permission details (not available if Path-specific routing is selected).

Allowed Client Networks

Select the allowed host(s)/network(s).

Blocked Client Networks

Select the blocked host(s)/network(s).

Authentication

Select the web application authentication profile from the list of available profiles.

You can also create a new authentication profile on this page or on the Protect > Web Server >

Authentication Policies page.

Figure 279: Access Permission

7. Specify path Exceptions for the web servers.

Click Add New Exception to specify a new exception.

Figure 280: Exceptions

8. Specify Advanced settings.

a) Specify Policies for Business Applications.

Protection

Select an application protection policy for the server or create a new one. A new application protection policy can be created directly from this page or from the Protect > Web Server >

Protection Policies page. You can also choose to have None application protection.

Intrusion Prevention

You can also choose to have None intrusion prevention.

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 339

Traffic Shaping

The traffic shaping policy allocates & limits the maximum bandwidth usage of the user.

Figure 281: Policies for Business Applications

b) Specify Additional Options for the added server.

Disable Compression Support

WAF will request uncompressed data from the web servers of this hosted web server and will send it uncompressed to the client, independent of the HTTP request’s encoding parameter.

Rewrite HTML

Rewrite cookies (available only if Rewrite HTML is selected)

Select this option to have the device rewrite cookies of the returned web pages.

Pass Host Header

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 340

Figure 282: Advanced

9. Click Save.

The Microsoft Lync rule has been created and appears on the Firewall page when the IPv4 filter is set.

Add Rule for Microsoft Remote Desktop Gateway 2008 and R2

(only available for IPv4 policy) This page describes how to configure a rule for Microsoft Remote Desktop Gateway

2008 and R2.

1. Go to Protect > Firewall and select IPv4. using the filter switch.

2. Click +Add Firewall Rule and Business Application Rule.

3. Specify the general rule details.

Application Template

Select Microsoft Remote Desktop Gateway 2008 and R2 to configure a rule for Microsoft

Remote Desktop Gateway 2008 and R2.

Description

Enter a description for the rule.

Rule Position

Specify the position of the rule.

Available Options:

• Top

• Bottom

Rule Name

Specify a name to identify the rule.

Figure 283: About This Rule

4. Specify Hosted Server details.

Hosted Address

Specify the address of the hosted server to which the rule applies. It is the public IP address through which Internet users access an internal server/host.

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 341

Listening Port

Enter a port number on which the hosted web server can be reached externally, over the Internet.

Default is port 80 for plaintext communication (HTTP) and port 443 for encrypted communication

(HTTPS).

HTTPS

Click to enable or disable of HTTPS traffic.

HTTPS Certificate (available if HTTPS is enabled)

Select the HTTPS certificate to be used.

Redirect HTTP (available if HTTPS is enabled)

Click to redirect HTTP requests.

Domains

Use FQDN when you enter the domains the web server is responsible for, for example, shop.example.com.

Figure 284: Hosted Server

5. Specify Protected Server(s) details.

Path-specific routing

You can enable path-specific routing to define (a path) to which web servers incoming requests are forwarded.

Add New Path (available if Path-specific routing is enabled)

Click Add New Path to define a new path.

Note: Add New Path will only be active after at least one web server and one hosted web server have been created.

Web Server (available if Path-specific routing is disabled)

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 342

Web servers are the application servers that are to be protected. Select from the list of web servers or click Add New Item to add a web server.

A new web server can be created directly from this page or from the Protect > Web Server > Web

Servers page.

Figure 285: Protected Server(s)

6. Specify access permission details. (Available if Path-specific routing is disabled)

Allowed Client Networks

Select the allowed host(s)/network(s).

Blocked Client Networks

Select the blocked host(s)/network(s).

Authentication

Select the web application authentication profile from the list of available profiles. You can also create a new authentication profile from this page or from the Protect > Web Server >

Authentication Policies page.

Figure 286: Access Permission

7. Specify path Exceptions for the web servers.

Click Add New Exception to specify new exception.

Figure 287: Exceptions

8. Specify Advanced settings.

a) Specify Policies for Business Applications.

Protection

Select an application protection policy for the server or create a new one. A new application protection policy can be created directly from this page or from the Protect > Web Server >

Protection Policies page. You can also choose to have None application protection.

Intrusion Prevention

You can also choose to have None intrusion prevention.

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 343

Traffic Shaping

The traffic shaping policy allocates & limits the maximum bandwidth usage of the user.

Figure 288: Policies for Business Applications

b) Specify Additional Options for the added server.

Disable Compression Support

WAF will request uncompressed data from the web servers of this hosted web server and will send it uncompressed to the client, independent of the HTTP request’s encoding parameter.

Rewrite HTML

Rewrite cookies (available only if Rewrite HTML is selected)

Select this option to have the device rewrite cookies of the returned web pages.

Pass Host Header

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 344

Figure 289: Advanced

9. Click Save.

The rule for Microsoft Remote Desktop Gateway 2008 and R2 has been created and appears on the Firewall page when the IPv4 filter is set.

Add Rule for Microsoft Remote Desktop Web 2008 and R2

(only available for IPv4 policy) This page describes how to configure a rule for Microsoft Remote Desktop Web 2008 and R2.

1. Go to Protect > Firewall and select IPv4. using the filter switch.

2. Click +Add Firewall Rule and Business Application Rule.

3. Specify the general rule details.

Application Template

Select Microsoft Remote Desktop Web 2008 and R2 to configure a rule for Microsoft Remote

Desktop Web 2008 and R2.

Description

Enter a description for the rule.

Rule Position

Specify the position of the rule.

Available Options: TopBottom

Rule Name

Specify a name to identify the rule.

Figure 290: About This Rule

4. Specify Hosted Server details.

Hosted Address

Specify the address of the hosted server to which the rule applies. It is the public IP address through which Internet users access an internal server/host.

Listening Port

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 345

Enter a port number on which the hosted web server can be reached externally over the Internet.

Default is port 80 for plaintext communication (HTTP) and port 443 for encrypted communication

(HTTPS).

HTTPS

Click to enable or disable of HTTPS traffic.

HTTPS Certificate (available if HTTPS is enabled)

Select the HTTPS certificate to be used.

Redirect HTTP (available if HTTPS is enabled)

Click to redirect HTTP requests.

Domains

Use FQDN when you enter the domains the web server is responsible for, for example, shop.example.com.

Figure 291: Hosted Server

5. Specify Protected Server(s) details.

Path-specific routing

You can enable path-specific routing to define (the path) to which web servers incoming requests are forwarded.

Add New Path (available if Path-specific routing is enabled)

Click Add New Path to define a new path.

Note: Add New Path will only be active after at least one web server and one hosted web server have been created.

Web Server (available if Path-specific routing is disabled)

Web servers are the application servers that are to be protected. Select a web server from the list of web servers or click Add New Item to add a web server.

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 346

A new web server can be created directly on this page or on the Protect > Web Server > Web

Servers page.

Figure 292: Protected Server(s)

6. Specify Access Permission details (available if Path-specific routing is disabled).

Allowed Client Networks

Select the allowed host(s)/network(s).

Blocked Client Networks

Select the blocked host(s)/network(s).

Authentication

Select the web application authentication profile from the list of available profiles.

You can also create new authentication profile on this page or on the Protect > Web Server >

Authentication Policies page.

Figure 293: Access Permission

7. Add path Exceptions for the web servers.

Click Add New Exception to specify new exception.

Figure 294: Exceptions

8. Specify Advanced settings.

a) Specify Policies for Business Applications.

Protection

Select an application protection policy for the server or create a new one. A new application protection policy can be created directly from this page or from the Protect > Web Server >

Protection Policies page. You can also choose to have None application protection.

Intrusion Prevention

You can also choose to have None intrusion prevention.

Traffic Shaping

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 347

The traffic shaping policy allocates & limits the maximum bandwidth usage of the user.

Figure 295: Policies for Business Applications

b) Specify Additional Options for the added server.

Disable Compression Support

WAF will request uncompressed data from the web servers of this hosted web server and will send it uncompressed to the client, independent of the HTTP request’s encoding parameter.

Rewrite HTML

Rewrite cookies (available only if Rewrite HTML is selected)

Select this option to have the device rewrite cookies of the returned web pages.

Pass Host Header

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 348

Figure 296: Advanced

9. Click Save.

The rule for Microsoft Remote Desktop Web 2008 and R2 has been created and appears on the Firewall page when the IPv4 filter is set.

Add Rule for Microsoft Sharepoint 2010 and 2013

(only available for IPv4 policy) This page describes how to configure a rule for Microsoft SharePoint 2010 and 2013.

1. Go to Protect > Firewall and select IPv4. using the filter switch.

2. Click +Add Firewall Rule and Business Application Rule.

3. Specify the general rule details.

Application Template

Select Microsoft Sharepoint 2010 and 2013 to configure a rule for Microsoft Sharepoint 2010 and

2013.

Description

Enter a description for the rule.

Rule Position

Specify the position of the rule.

Available Options:

• Top

• Bottom

Rule Name

Specify a name to identify the rule.

Figure 297: About This Rule

4. Specify Hosted Server details.

Hosted Address

Specify the address of the hosted server to which the rule applies. It is the public IP address through which Internet users access an internal server/host.

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 349

Listening Port

Enter a port number on which the hosted web server can be reached externally over the Internet.

Default is port 80 for plaintext communication (HTTP) and port 443 for encrypted communication

(HTTPS).

HTTPS

Click to enable or disable of HTTPS traffic.

HTTPS Certificate (available if HTTPS is enabled)

Select the HTTPS certificate to be used.

Redirect HTTP (available if HTTPS is enabled)

Click to redirect HTTP requests.

Domains

Use FQDN when you enter the domains the web server is responsible for, for example, shop.example.com.

Figure 298: Hosted Server

5. Specify Protected Server(s) details.

Path-specific routing

You can enable path-specific routing to define (a path) to which web servers incoming requests are forwarded.

Add New Path (available if Path-specific routing is enabled)

Click Add New Path to define a new path.

Note: Add New Path will only be active after at least one web server and one hosted web server have been created.

Web Server (available if Path-specific routing is disabled)

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 350

Web servers are the application servers that are to be protected. Select a web server from the list of web servers or click Add New Item to add a web server.

A new web server can be created directly from this page or from the Protect > Web Server > Web

Servers page.

Figure 299: Protected Application Server(s)

6. Specify Access Permission details (available if Path-specific routing is disabled).

Allowed Client Networks

Select the allowed host(s)/network(s).

Blocked Client Networks

Select the blocked host(s)/network(s).

Authentication

Select the web application authentication profile from the list of available profiles.

You can also create new authentication profile from this page or from the Protect > Web Server >

Authentication Policies page.

Figure 300: Access Permission

7. Add path Exceptions for the web servers.

Click Add New Exception to specify new exception.

Add Authentication Policy

Figure 301: Exceptions

8. Specify Advanced settings.

a) Specify Policies for Business Applications.

Protection

Select an application protection policy for the server or create a new one. A new application protection policy can be created directly from this page or from the Protect > Web Server >

Protection Policies page. You can also choose to have None application protection.

Intrusion Prevention

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 351

You can also choose to have None intrusion prevention.

Traffic Shaping

The traffic shaping policy allocates & limits the maximum bandwidth usage of the user.

Figure 302: Policies for Business Applications

b) Specify Additional Options for the added server.

Disable Compression Support

WAF will request uncompressed data from the web servers of this hosted web server and will send it uncompressed to the client, independent of the HTTP request’s encoding parameter.

Rewrite HTML

Rewrite cookies (available only if Rewrite HTML is selected)

Select this option to have the device rewrite cookies of the returned web pages.

Pass Host Header

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 352

Figure 303: Advanced

9. Click Save.

The rule for Microsoft Sharepoint 2010 and 2013 has been created and appears on the Firewall page when the IPv4 filter is set.

Add Path

(only available for the HTTP based business application rules) This page describes how to define a path to which real web servers incoming requests are forwarded.

1. Enable path-specific routing and click Add New Path.

2. Specify the path details.

Path

Enter the path for which you want to create the site path route.

Example: /products/.

Web Server

Select the web servers which are to be used for the specified path.

Authentication

Select the web app authentication profile. Select Create new to create a new authentication profile.

You can also create an authentication profile from the Protect > Web Server > Authentication

Policies page.

on page 494

Allowed Client Networks

Select or add the allowed networks that should be able to connect to the hosted web server.

Blocked Client Networks

Select or add the denied networks that should be blocked to your hosted web server.

Sticky session cookie

Ensures that each session is bound to one web server. If enabled, a cookie is passed to the user’s browser, which causes Sophos XG Firewall to route all requests from this browser to the same real web server. If the server is not available, the cookie will be updated, and the session will switch to another web server.

Hot-standby mode

Enable if you want to send all requests to the first selected web server, and use the other web servers only as a backup. The backup servers are only used in case the main server fails.

As soon as the main server starts functioning, the sessions will switch back - unless you have selected the Sticky session cookie option.

WebSocket passthrough

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 353

If enabled, applications hosted on the defined site path are allowed to use the WebSocket protocol.

WebSocket traffic will be just passed through, it will not be protected in any way.

Figure 304: Add New Path

3. Click Save.

Add Exception

(only available for the HTTP based business application rules) This page describes how to specify path exceptions for the web servers.

1. Click Add New Exception.

2. Specify exception details.

Path

Specify the path which you want to exclude.

Operation

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 354

Select the operation among AND or OR for Path and Source.

Source

Specify the source networks where the client request comes from and which are to be exempted from the selected check(s).

Skip these Checks

Cookie Signing

Click to skip cookie signing. Cookie signing protects a web server against manipulated cookies.

When the web server sets a cookie, a second cookie is added to the first cookie containing a hash built of the primary cookie’s name, its value and a secret, where the secret is only known by the WAF. Thus, if a request cannot provide a correct cookie pair, there has been some sort of manipulation and the cookie will be dropped.

Static URL Hardening

Protects against URL rewriting. When a client requests a website, all static URLs of the website are signed. The signing uses a similar procedure as with cookie signing. Additionally the response from the web server is analyzed in respect to the links that can be validly requested next.

Form Hardening

Click to skip form hardening. Form hardening protects against web form rewriting. Form hardening saves the original structure of a web form and signs it. Therefore, if the structure of a form has changed when it is submitted the WAF rejects the request.

Anti-virus

Select this option to protect a web server against viruses.

Block clients with bad reputation

Based on GeoIPClosed and RBLClosed information you can block clients which have a bad reputation according to their classification.

Skip these categories

Protocol Violations

Enforces adherence to the RFC standard specification of the HTTP protocol. Violating these standards usually indicates malicious intent.

Protocol Anomalies

Searches for common usage patterns. Lack of such patterns often indicates malicious requests.

These patterns include, among other things, HTTP headers like ‘Host’ and ‘User-Agent’.

Request Limits

Enforces reasonable limits on the amount and ranges of request arguments. Overloading request arguments is a typical attack vector.

HTTP Policy

Narrows down the allowed usage of the HTTP protocol. Web browsers typically use only a limited subset of all possible HTTP options. Disallowing the rarely used options protects against attackers aiming at these often less well supported options.

Bad Robots

Checks for usage patterns characteristic of bots and crawlers. By denying them access, possible vulnerabilities on your web servers are less likely to be discovered.

Generic Attacks

Searches for attempted command executions common to most attacks. After having breached a web server, an attacker usually tries to execute commands on the server like expanding privileges or manipulating data stores. By searching for these post-breach execution attempts, attacks can be detected that might otherwise have gone unnoticed, for example because they targeted a vulnerable service by the means of legitimate access.

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 355

SQL Injection Attacks

Checks for embedded SQL commands and escape characters in request arguments. Most attacks on web servers target input fields that can be used to direct embedded SQL commands to the database.

XSS Attacks

Checks for embedded script tags and code in request arguments. Typical cross-site scripting attacks aim at injecting script code into input fields on a target web server, often in a legitimate way.

Tight Security

Performs tight security checks on requests, like checking for prohibited path traversal attempts.

Trojans

Checks for usage patterns characteristic of trojans, thus searching for requests indicating trojan activity. It does not, however, prevent the installation of such trojans as this is covered by the antivirus scanners.

Outbound

Prevents web servers from leaking information to the client. This includes, among other things, error messages sent by servers which attackers can use to gather sensitive information or detect specific vulnerabilities.

Advanced

Never change HTML during static URL hardening or form hardening

If selected, no data matching the defined exception settings will be modified by the WAF engine.

With this option, e.g., binary data wrongly supplied with a text/html content type by the web server will not be corrupted. On the other hand, web requests may be blocked due to activated URL hardening, HTML rewriting, or form hardening. Those three features use an HTML parser and therefore to some extent depend on the modification of web page content. To prevent undesired blocking, skip URL hardening and/or form hardening for requests affected by blocking; you might need to do this in another/new exception to reflect dependencies between web servers and/or web pages.

Accept unhardened form data

Even though having an exception for form hardening, it is possible that form data will not be accepted if the form hardening signature is missing. With this option, unhardened form data will be accepted anyway.

Figure 305: Add New Exception

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 356

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 357

3. Click Save.

Application Protection Templates for common non-HTTP Applications

SF-OS offers several pre-configured templates to create a protection rule for commonly used non-HTTP applications and services. You can use these templates to create a rule for the web application, that is close to your configuration, then modify it to fit your needs.

Pre-defined templates include:

DNAT/Full NAT/Load Balancing

Mail Servers (SMTP)

Add DNAT/Full NAT/Load Balancing Rule

A DNAT/Full NAT/Load Balancing based rule is used to protect non-web servers, like mail or other servers hosted inside the network (LAN or DMZ). Using this rule, you can define access rights of such servers to users who require access over the WAN or Internet.

1. Go to Protect > Firewall and select between IPv4 or IPv6 using the default filter.

2. Now, click +Add Firewall Rule and select Business Application Rule.

3. Specify the general rule details.

Application Template

Select DNAT/Full NAT/Load Balancing to configure a rule for generic Non-Web based applications.

Description

Enter a description for the rule.

Rule Position

Specify the position of the rule.

Available Options: TopBottom

Rule Name

Specify a name to identify the rule.

Figure 306: About This Rule

4. Specify Source details.

Source Zones

Select a source zone or click Add New Item to define a new LAN or DMZ zone.

Allowed Client Networks

Select the allowed host(s) or add a new one by clicking Add New Item.

Blocked Client Networks

Select the blocked host(s)/network(s).

Figure 307: Source

5. Specify Destination & Service details.

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 358

Destination Host/Network

Select the destination host/network to apply rule. It is the public IP address through which users access an internal server/host over the Internet.

Available Options: IP Address: Specified IP address is mapped to a corresponding mapped single

IP address or a range of IP addresses. If a single IP address is mapped to a range of IP addresses, the device uses a sticky IP algorithm to load balance the requests.IP Range : Specified IP address range is mapped to a corresponding range of mapped IP addresses. The IP range defines the start and end of an address range. The start of the range must be lower than the end of the IP. Select when any of the device port, alias or virtual LAN (VLAN) sub-interface is required to be mapped to the destination host or network.

Services

Select the services allowed to the user. You can directly add a new service here.

Add new item

Name: Enter a name to identify the service.

Type: Select a protocol for the service.

Available Options:TCP/UDP: Enter Source and Destination port. You can enter multiple ports for the same service. The number of source and destination ports must not exceed 16.IP: Select

Protocol Number for the service. You can select multiple ports for the same service.ICMP: Select

ICMP Type and Code. You can enter multiple types and codes for the same service. Use Add icon and Remove icon to add and delete the parameters respectively. ICMPv6: Select ICMPv6

Type and Code. You can enter multiple types and codes for the same service. Use Add and

Remove to add and delete the parameters.

Figure 308: Add Service

Figure 309: Destination and Service

6. Specify Forward To details.

Protected Server(s)

From the available options, select the application servers on which the web server is to be hosted.

Available options: IP Address: External IP address is mapped to the specified IP address.IP Range:

External IP address range is mapped to the specified IP address range.IP List: External IP address is mapped to the specified IP list.FQDN(available only for IPv4 virtual hosts): External IP address is mapped to the specified FQDN. Internal mapped server can be accessed by FQDN.

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 359

Note: For IP Range and IP List, you can also use a single external IP address. The device will then use load balancing for handling the requests.

Mapped Port (available only if Change Destination Port(s) is selected)

Specify the mapped port number on the destination network to which the public port number is mapped. Mapped port must have the same number of ports as specified in the public service, or at least have one port. Mapped Port is disabled if:

• No TCP/UDP service is selected.

• Multiple services are selected.

• Service group is selected.

• Selected service is with TCP/UDP combination.

Protected Zone

Select the zone to apply web server rule.

Change Destination Port(s)

Select the check box to specify different mapped port. Clear the check box to use the same Service

Port(s) Forwarded as mapped port.

Figure 310: Forward To

7. Specify Load balancing details.

Load Balancing (available only if selected Protected Server is IP Range or IP List or selected Destination

Host/Network is IP Address)

Select the method for load balancing from the available options.

Available Options:Round Robin: In this method, requests are served in a sequential manner where the first request is forwarded to the first server, second request to the second server and so on. When a request is received, the device checks to see which was the last server that was assigned a request.

It then assigns this new request to the next available server. This method can be used when equal distribution of traffic is required and there is no need for session-persistence.First Alive: In this method, all incoming requests are served by the first server (the first IP address that is configured in the IP range). This server is considered as the primary server and all others are considered as backup. Only when the first server fails, the requests are forwarded to the next server in line. This method is used for failover scenarios. Random: In this method, the requests are forwarded to the servers randomly. Nevertheless, the device makes sure that all configured servers receive equally distributed load. Hence, this method is also called uniform random distribution. This method can be used when equal distribution of traffic is required and there is no need for session-persistence or order of distribution.Sticky IP: In this method, along with the Round Robin distribution of traffic, the device forwards incoming traffic according to the combination of source and destination IP address. All traffic from a particular source is forwarded only to its mapped server. This means that all requests for a given source IP are sent to the same application server instance. This method is useful in cases where all requests or sessions are required to be processed by the same server. For example: banking websites, E-Commerce websites.

Health Check (available only if Load Balancing is enabled)

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 360

Click to enable a health check for failover and specify the parameters based on the description shown below.

Port (available only if selected Health Check Method is TCP Probe)

Specify the port number on the server health is monitored.

Acceptable range: 1 to 65535

Interval

Specify the time interval in seconds after which the health will be monitored.

Acceptable range: 5 to 65535 seconds

Default: 60

Probe Method

Select the probe method to check the health of the server from the available options.

Available Options:ICMP TCP

Timeout

Specify the time interval in seconds within which the server must respond.

Acceptable range: 1 to 10 seconds

Default: 2

Retries

Specify the number of tries to probe the health of the server, after which the server will be declared unreachable.

Acceptable range: 1 to 10

Default: 3

Figure 311: Load Balancing

8. Specify Identity details.

Match known users

Match rule based on user identity allows you to check whether the specified user/user group from the selected zone is allowed to access the selected service or not.

Click to attach the user identity.

Enable check identity to apply the following policies per user.

Show Captive Portal to unknown users

Select the check box to accept traffic from unknown users. Captive portal page is displayed to the user where the user can login to access the Internet.

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 361

Clear the check box to drop traffic from unknown users.

User or Groups (available if Match known users is selected)

Select the user(s) or group(s) from the list of available options.

Exclude this user activity from data accounting (available if Match known users is selected)

Click to enable/disable user traffic activity from data accounting.

By default, user’s network traffic is considered in data accounting. Select to exclude certain traffic from user data accounting. The traffic allowed through this firewall rule will not be accounted towards data transfer for the user.

Figure 312: Identity

9. Specify Advanced settings details.

a) Specify Polices for Business Applications.

Intrusion Prevention

Select the required IPS policy. If Match rule based on user identity is enabled, user’s IPS policy will be applied automatically, but will not be effective till the respective module is subscribed. A new IPS policy can be created directly from this page or from the Protect > Intrusion Prevention >

IPS Policies page.

Traffic Shaping Policy

Select the required traffic shaping policy. If Match rule based on user identity is enabled, user’s traffic shaping policy will be applied automatically.

You need to select traffic shaping policy for the rule if Match known users is not selected.

A new traffic shaping policy can be created directly from this page or from the System > Profiles >

Traffic Shaping page.

Figure 313: Policies for Business Applications

b) Specify Security Heartbeat details (available only if IPv4 is selected).

Minimum Source HB Permitted

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 362

Block clients with no heartbeat

Heartbeat-capable devices can be required to send information on their health status in defined intervals - this is called a heartbeat.

Based on that information, you can restrict a source device’s access to certain services and networks.

Enable the option to require the sending of heartbeats.

Block request to destination with no heartbeat (not available if Protected Zone selected is WAN)

Heartbeat-capable devices can be required to send information on their health status in defined intervals - this is called a heartbeat.

Based on that information, you can block requests to destinations not sending heartbeat.

Enable/disable the option to require the sending of heartbeats.

Figure 314: Synchronized Security

c) Specify Routing details.

Rewrite source address (Masquerading)

Enable/disable to re-write the source address or specify a NAT policy.

Use Outbound Address (available only if Rewrite source address is enabled)

Select the NAT policy to be applied from the list of available NAT policies.

A new NAT policy can be created directly from this page or from the System > Profiles > Network

Address Translation page.

The default NAT policy is Masquerade.

MASQ (Interface Default IP): IP Address of the selected Protected Zone as configured in

Configure > Network > Interfaces will be displayed instead of (Interface Default IP).

Create Reflexive Rule

Enable to automatically create a reflexive firewall rule for the protected host.

A reflexive rule has the same policies as those rules configured for the hosted server but instead of source zone to destination zone, this rule is applicable on traffic from destination zone to source zone.

By default, the reflexive rule is not created.

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 363

Figure 315: Routing

10. Specify the logging option for the user application traffic.

Log Firewall Traffic

Click to enable logging of permitted and denied traffic.

Figure 316: Log Traffic

11. Click Save.

The non-web based rule has been created and appears on the Firewall page when the appropriate filter is set.

Add Rule for Email Clients (POP and IMAP)

Email Clients (POP and IMAP) rule is used to protect mail servers which are hosted publicly (WAN). This page describes how to configure a protection rule and control access of mail servers using application template - Email

Clients .

Note:

If you delete Email Clients rule, the Emails which are under process by this rule will be queued but will not be delivered.

We recommend to follow below given steps so that you do not lose all the emails processed by this rule:

1. Before deleting this rule, clone this rule by choosing Clone Above option and change the Action to Drop.

This cloned rule will hold all the incoming emails.

2. Go to Email > Mail Spool and check if spool is empty.

3. Once the spool is empty, delete both the firewall rules.

1. Go to Protect > Firewall and select between IPv4 or IPv6 using the default filter.

2. Now, click +Add Firewall Rule and select Business Application Rule.

3. Specify the general rule details.

Application Template

Select Email Clients (POP & IMAP) to define a application filter policy for POP and IMAP based email clients.

Description

Specify the rule description.

Rule Position

Specify the position of the rule.

Available Options:TopBottom

Rule Name

Specify a name to identify the rule.

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 364

Figure 317: About This Rule

4. Specify Source details.

Zone

Select the allowed source zone(s).

Networks

Select the allowed source network(s) . A new network host can be created directly from this page or from the System > Hosts and Services > IP Host page.

Figure 318: Source

5. Specify Destination details.

Zone

Select the zone to which the rule applies.

Networks

Select the network(s) to be protected.

A new network host can be created directly from this page or from the System > Hosts and

Services > IP Host page.

Figure 319: Destination

6. Specify Identity details.

Match rule based on user identity

Click to enable a rule based on the user identity.

Show Captive Portal to unknown users

Select the check box to accept traffic from unknown users. Captive portal page is displayed to the user where the user can login to access the Internet.

Clear the check box to drop traffic from unknown users.

User or Groups (available only if Match rule based on user identity is enabled)

Select the user(s) or group(s) from the list of available options.

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 365

Exclude this user activity from data accounting (only available if Match rule based on user identity is

enabled)

Click to enable/disable user traffic activity from data accounting.

By default, user’s network traffic is considered in data accounting. Select to exclude certain traffic from user data accounting. The traffic allowed through this rule will not be accounted towards data transfer for the user.

Figure 320: Identity

7. Specify Malware Scanning details.

Scan IMAP/IMAPS/POP3/POP3S/SMTP/SMTPS

Click to enable/disable scanning of IMAP/IMAPS/POP3/POP3S/SMTP/SMTPS traffic.

Figure 321: Malware Scanning

8. Specify Advanced settings.

a) Specify Policies for Business Applications.

Intrusion Prevention

Select an IPS policy for the rule. A new IPS policy can be created directly from this page itself or from the Protect > Intrusion Prevention > IPS Policies page.

Traffic Shaping (Not available if Match rule based on user identity is selected)

Select a traffic shaping policy for the rule.

A traffic shaping policy allocates & limits the maximum bandwidth usage of the user.

A new traffic shaping policy can be created directly from this page or from the System > Profiles >

Traffic Shaping page.

Figure 322: Policies for Business Applications

b) SpecifySecurity Heartbeat settings (available only if IPv4 is selected).

Minimum Source HB Permitted

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 366

Block clients with no heartbeat

Heartbeat-capable devices can be required to send information on their health status in defined intervals - this is called a heartbeat.

Based on that information, you can restrict a source device’s access to certain services and networks.

Enable/disable the option to require the sending of heartbeats.

Minimum Destination HB Permitted (Not available if the only Destination Zone selected is WAN)

Note: You can use the option if you have selected multiple zones along with WAN.

Block request to destination with no heartbeat (Not available if the only Destination Zone selected is WAN)

Heartbeat-capable devices can be required to send information on their health status in defined intervals - this is called a heartbeat.

Based on that information, you can block requests to destinations not sending heartbeat.

Enable/disable the option to require the sending of heartbeats.

Note: You can use the option if you have selected multiple zones along with WAN.

Figure 323: Security Heartbeat

c) Specify Routing details.

Rewrite source address (Masquerading)

Enable/disable to re-write the source address or specify a NAT policy.

Use Gateway Specific Default NAT Policy (only if Masquerading is selected)

Select to override the default NAT policy with a gateway specific policy.

Override default NAT policy for specific Gateway (only if Use Gateway Specific Default NAT Policy

is selected )

Select to specify gateway and corresponding NAT policy. Multiple gateways and NAT policies can be added.

Use Outbound Address (available only if Rewrite source address is enabled and Use Gateway

Specific Default NAT Policy is disabled )

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 367

Select the NAT policy to be applied the list or available NAT policies.

A new NAT policy can be created directly from this page or from the System > Profiles > Network

Address Translation page.

The default NAT policy is Masquerade.

MASQ (Interface Default IP)

• IP Address of the Destination Zone as configured in Configure > Network > Interfaces will be displayed instead of (Interface Default IP) when single Destination Zone is selected.

• (Interface Default IP) will be displayed when multiple Destination Zones are selected.

Primary Gateway

Select the primary gateway to route the request. You can create new gateway from this page itself or from Configure > Routing > Gateways.

Note: On deletion of the gateway, Primary Gateway will display WAN Link Load

Balance for WAN Destination Zone and None for other zones. In such case, firewall rule will not make routing decisions.

Backup Gateway

Select the backup gateway to route the request. You can create new gateway from this page itself or from Configure > Routing > Gateways.

Note: On deletion of the gateway, Backup Gateway will display None.

Figure 324: Routing

9. Specify logging option for the user application traffic.

Log Firewall Traffic

Click to enable logging of permitted and denied traffic.

Figure 325: Log Traffic

Add Rule for Email Servers (SMTP)

This page describes how to configure a rule for email servers (SMTP).

1. Go to Protect > Firewall and select between IPv4 or IPv6 using the default filter.

2. Now, click +Add Firewall Rule and select Business Application Rule.

3. Specify the general rule details.

Application Template

Select Email Servers (SMTP) to configure a rule for SMTP based email applications.

Description

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 368

Specify the policy description.

Rule Position

Specify the position of the rule.

Available Options: TopBottom

Rule Name

Specify a name to identify the policy.

Figure 326: About This Rule

4. Specify Source details.

Source Zones

Click to select the source zone. Click Add New Item to define a new LAN or DMZ zone.

Allowed Client Networks

Select the allowed host(s) or add a new one by clicking Add New Item.

Blocked Client Networks

Select the blocked host(s)/network(s).

Figure 327: Source

5. Specify Destination & Service details.

Destination Host/Network

Select the destination host/network to apply rule. It is the public IP address through which users access internal server/host over the Internet.

Available Options:IP Address – Specified IP address is mapped to a corresponding mapped single or range of IP addresses. If a single IP address is mapped to a range of IP addresses, the device uses a sticky IP algorithm to load balance the requests.IP Range – Specified IP address range is mapped to a corresponding range of mapped IP addresses. The IP range defines the start and end of an address range. The start of the range must be lower than the end of the range.Interface IP (only

available for IPv4) – Select when any of the device port, alias or virtual LAN (VLAN) sub interface is required to be mapped to the destination host or network.

Services

Select the services allowed to the user. A new service can be directly created from this page.

Add new item

Name: Enter a name to identify the service.

Type: Select a protocol for the service.

Available Options:TCP/UDP: Enter Source and Destination port. You can enter multiple ports for the same service. The number of source and destination ports must not exceed 16.IP: Select

Protocol Number for the service. You can select multiple ports for the same service.ICMP: Select

ICMP Type and Code. You can enter multiple types and codes for the same service. Use Add icon and Remove icon to add and delete the parameters respectively. ICMPv6: Select ICMPv6

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 369

Type and Code. You can enter multiple types and codes for the same service. Use Add and

Remove to add and delete the parameters.

Figure 328: Add Service

Figure 329: Destination and Service

6. Specify Forward To details.

Protected Server(s)

Select from the available options on which the email server is to be hosted.

Available options: IP Address – External IP address is mapped to the specified IP address.IP

Range – External IP address range is mapped to the specified IP address range.IP List – External IP address is mapped to the specified IP list.FQDN (available only for IPv4 virtual hosts) – External

IP address is mapped to the specified FQDN. Internal mapped server can be accessed by FQDN.

Note: For IP Range and IP List, you can also use a single external IP address. The device will then use load balancing for handling the requests.

Mapped Port (available only if Change Destination Port(s) is selected)

Specify mapped port number on the destination network to which the public port number is mapped.

Mapped port must have the same number of ports as specified in the public service, or at least have one port. Mapped Port is disabled if:

• No TCP/UDP service is selected.

• Multiple services are selected.

• Service group is selected.

• Selected service is with TCP/UDP combination.

Protected Zone

Select the zone to which the email server rule applies.

Change Destination Port(s)

Select the check box to specify different mapped port. Clear the check box to use the same Service

Port(s) Forwarded as mapped port.

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 370

Figure 330: Forward To

7. Specify Load balancing details.

Load Balancing (available only if selected Protected Server is IP Range or IP List and selected

Destination Host/Network is IP Address)

Select the method for load balancing from the available options.

Available Options:Round Robin - In this method, requests are served in a sequential manner where the first request is forwarded to the first server, second request to the second server and so on. When a request is received, the device checks to see which the last server that was assigned a request was.

It then assigns this new request to the next available server. This method is can be used when equal distribution of traffic is required and there is no need for session-persistence.First Alive - In this method, all incoming requests are served by the first server (the first IP address that is configured in the IP range). This server is considered as the primary server and all others are considered as backup. Only when the first server fails, the requests are forwarded to the next server in line. This method is used for failover scenarios. Random -In this method, the requests are forwarded to the servers randomly. Although, the device makes sure that all configured servers receive equally distributed load. Hence, this method is also called uniform random distribution. This method can be used when equal distribution of traffic is required and there is no need for session-persistence or order of distribution.Sticky IP - In this method, along with Round Robin distribution of traffic, the device forwards incoming traffic according to the combination of source and destination IP address. All traffic from a particular source is forwarded only to its mapped server. This means that all requests for a given source IP are sent to the same application server instance. This method is useful in cases where all requests or sessions are required to be processed by the same server. For example: Banking websites, E-Commerce websites.

Health Check (available only if Load Balancing is enabled)

Click to enable health check for failover and specify the parameters based on the description shown below.

Port (available only if selected health check method is TCP Probe)

Specify the port number on the server health is monitored.

Acceptable range: 1 to 65535

Interval

Specify the time interval in seconds after which the health will be monitored.

Acceptable range: 5 to 65535 seconds

Default: 60

Probe Method

Select the probe method to check the health of the server from the available options.

Available Options:ICMP TCP

Timeout

Specify the time interval in seconds within which the server must respond.

Acceptable range: 1 to 10 seconds

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 371

Default: 2

Retries

Specify the number of tries to probe the health of the server, after which the server will be declared unreachable

Acceptable range: 1 to 10

Default: 3

Figure 331: Load Balancing

8. Specify Identity details.

Match known users

Match known users allows you to check whether the specified user/user group from the selected zone is allowed to access the selected service or not.

Click to attach the user identity.

Show Captive Portal to unknown users

Select the check box to accept traffic from unknown users. Captive portal page is displayed to the user where the user can login to access the Internet.

Clear the check box to drop traffic from unknown users.

User or Groups (available only if Match known users is enabled)

Select the user(s) or group(s) from the list of available options.

Exclude this user activity from data accounting (available only if Match known users is enabled)

Click to enable/disable user traffic activity from data accounting.

Figure 332: Identity

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 372

9. Specify Scanning details.

Scan SMTP

Click to enable/disable scanning of SMTP traffic.

Scan SMTPS

Click to enable/disable scanning of SMTPS traffic.

Figure 333: Scanning

10. Specify Advanced settings details.

a) Specify Polices for Business Applications.

Intrusion Prevention

A new IPS policy can be created directly from this page or from the Protect > Intrusion

Prevention > IPS Policies page.

Traffic Shaping Policy (not available if Match known users is selected)

Select the required IPS policy. If Match rule based on user identity is enabled, user’s QoS policy will be applied automatically.

A new traffic shaping policy can be created directly from this page or from the System > Profiles >

Traffic Shaping page.

Figure 334: Policies for Business Applications

b) Specify Security Heartbeat settings (available only if IPv4 is selected).

Minimum Source HB Permitted

Block clients with no heartbeat

Heartbeat-capable devices can be required to send information on their health status in defined intervals - this is called a heartbeat.

Based on that information, you can restrict a source device’s access to certain services and networks.

Enable/disable the option to require the sending of heartbeats.

Minimum Destination HB Permitted (not available if Protected Zone selected is WAN)

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 373

Block request to destination with no heartbeat (not available if Protected Zone selected is WAN)

Heartbeat-capable devices can be required to send information on their health status in defined intervals - this is called a heartbeat.

Based on that information, you can block requests to destinations not sending heartbeat.

Enable/disable the option to require the sending of heartbeats.

Figure 335: Security Heartbeat

c) Specify Routing details.

Rewrite source address (Masquerading)

Enable/disable to re-write the source address or specify a NAT policy.

Use Outbound Address (available only if Rewrite source address is enabled)

Select the NAT policy to be applied from the list of available NAT policies.

A new NAT policy can be created directly from this page or from the System > Profiles > Network

Address Translation page.

The default NAT policy is Masquerade.

MASQ (Interface Default IP): IP Address of the selected Protected Zone as configured in

Configure > Network > Interfaces will be displayed instead of (Interface Default IP).

Create Reflexive Rule

Select ON to automatically create a reflexive firewall rule for the protected host.

The reflexive rule has the same policies as those configured for the hosted server but instead of source zone to destination zone, this rule is applicable on traffic from destination zone to source zone.

By default, the reflexive rule is not created.

Figure 336: Routing

11. Specify the logging option for the user application traffic.

Log Firewall Traffic

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 374

Click to enable logging of permitted and denied traffic.

Figure 337: Log Traffic

Related information

Protect Internal Email Server - Legacy Mode

Intrusion Prevention

This section covers the following topics:

•

DoS Attacks

: Provides information about DoS attacks.

•

IPS Policies

: Allows you to configure IPS policies.

•

Custom IPS Signatures

: Allows you to add custom IPS signatures.

•

DoS & Spoof Protection

: Allows you to configure DoS settings to identify DoS attacks.

DoS Attacks

The page provides information about DoS attacks. The list shows:

Attack Type

Displays the attack type: SYN Flood, UDP Flood, TCP Flood, ICMP Flood and IP Flood.

Source

Displays whether source packet control is applied or not. If applied, it indicates the number of packets dropped.

Destination

Displays whether destination packet control is applied or not. If applied, it indicates the number of packets dropped.

Click the name of the attack type you want to view to get real time updates on flooding.

Figure 338: DoS Attacks

IPS Policies

This page displays the list of all the pre-defined and custom IPS policies.

The device is a real time Intrusion Prevention System (IPS) system that protects your network from known and unknown attacks by worms and viruses, hackers and other Internet risks.

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 375

The device at the perimeter of your network analyzes entire traffic and prevents attacks from reaching your network.

Whether it is a worm, a suspicious web request, a hacker targeting your mail server or any other attack - it simply does not get through.

Note: Intrusion Prevention System module is a subscription module that needs to be subscribed before use.

Note: You can also view and manage the IPS status on the Monitor & Analyze > Diagnostics > Services page.

IPS consists of a signature engine with a predefined set of signatures. Signatures are the patterns that are known to be harmful. IPS compares traffic to these signatures and responds at a high rate of speed if it finds a match. Signatures included within the device are not editable.

As per your network requirements, device allows you to define multiple policies instead of one global policy, to decrease packet latency and reduce the false positives.

IPS policy allows you to view predefined signatures and customize the intrusion prevention configuration at the category as well as individual signature level. Categories are signatures grouped together based on the application and protocol vulnerabilities.

The device instead of providing only a single policy (global) for managing multiple networks/hosts, allows to tailor policy per network/host i.e. allows to define multiple policies for managing multiple networks/hosts.

To enable the Intrusion Prevention System, apply IPS policy from Security Policies. You can create rule to apply:

• single policy for all the users/networks

• different policies for different users/networks or hosts

As Security Policies control all traffic passing through the device and decide whether to allow or drop the connection,

IPS rule will be applied to only that traffic/packet which passes through Firewall.

Category

Signatures are organized in categories such as DNS, Finger, P2P, DDOS, and others. These signature categories are listed in the policy. You can configure these categories to change the prevention and/or detection settings. To perform

Intrusion Prevention, you need to enable IPS services for each category i.e. you will be able to configure attack threats for individual signature only if an IPS service for the category is “Enabled”.

Each IPS policy contains a set of signatures that device searches for, logs, blocks and allows to:

• Enable or disable category from IPS protection.

• Enable or disable individual signature in a category to tailor IPS protection based on your network environment.

• Define an action to be taken when the matching traffic pattern is found. Device can either detect or drop the connection. In either of the case, device generates the log and alerts the Network Administrator.

IPS provides six actions for managing attack threats: (action if signature matches)

• Allow Packet - Allows the packet to its intended destination.

• Drop Packet - Drops packets if detects any traffic that matches the signature.

• Disable - Disables the signature, if it detects any traffic that matches the signature.

• Drop Session - Drops the entire session if detects any traffic that matches the signature.

• Reset - Resets entire session if detects any traffic that matches the signature.

• Bypass Session - Allows the entire session if detects any traffic that matches the signature.

In packet-based actions, the device checks each packet before taking an action while for session-based action, only the first packet is checked and an action is taken. In case of Reset, TCP reset packet is sent to the originator. In all the cases, the device generates the log and alerts the Network Administrator.

To save resources and avoid latency, set action as “Bypass Session” as in this, if the initial packets match the signature then the rest of the session packets will not be scanned at all.

To avoid getting high number of Alerts and save resources, set action as “Drop session” as in this, if the device identifies attack in the initial packets then it will terminate the entire session instead of scanning all the session packets.

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 376

The page provides option to add a new policy, configure the handling of signatures by category or on a signature-bysignature basis, or delete the policy.

The device provides following pre-defined policies. You can directly use policies 1 to 6 without any modifications while policies 7 to 10 can either be used directly or, can be modified as per your requirements:

1. DMZ TO LAN

2. DMZ TO WAN

3. LAN TO DMZ

4. LAN TO WAN

5. WAN TO DMZ

6. WAN TO LAN

7. generalpolicy

8. lantowan strict policy

9. lantowan general policy

10. dmzpolicy

Create IPS Policy

This page describes how to quickly configure a new IPS policy.

1. Go to Protect > Intrusion Prevention > IPS Policies and click Add.

2. Enter a unique name for the IPS policy.

3. Enter a description for the IPS policy.

4. Select the IPS policy to be used as a template from the list.

Figure 339: Details

5. Click Save.

Once the policy is created, policy rules can be added to take appropriate action for signatures in the policy. Define a rule to configure an action to be taken when the matching traffic pattern is found. If the rules are already added, a list of rules is displayed along with its details like signature filtering criteria, action.

IPS Policy Rules

1. Go to Protect > Intrusion Prevention > IPS Policies .

Click on the icon under the Manage column for the IPS policy for which you want to add the policy rule.

3. Click Add.

4. Enter a unique name for the IPS policy rule.

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 377

Figure 340: Rule Detail

5. Enter the Signature Criteria.

Default

Select to view a list of default signatures.

Custom Signature

Select to view a list of custom signatures.

Category

Select IPS signature category from the list of available categories.

Severity

Severity is the level of threat posed by the attack. Select the type of severity from the available options.

Available Options:

• Select All

• 1 - Critical

• 2 - Major

• 3 - Moderate

• 4 - Minor

• 5 - Warning

Platform

Platform is the OS affected by the attack. Select the platform from the available options:

Available Options:

• Select All

• Windows

• Linux

• Unix

• MAC

• Solaris

• BSD

• Other

Target

Target is the type of device targeted by the attack. Select the target from available options:

Available Options:

• Select All

• Client

• Server

Smart Filter (available only if Select All is selected)

Enter the partial or full signature name to filter by name.

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 378

Figure 341: Signature Criteria

6. Manage the list of Matching Signatures.

Select All

Select to choose all the signatures listed for the selected criteria.

Based on the signature criteria the signatures are made available.

Select Individual Signature

Select to customize the choice of signatures list for the selected criteria.

Based on the signature criteria the signatures are made available.

Note: You can filter the list based on Name and SID, only if you have selected the option Select

Individual Signature.

Figure 342: List of Matching Signatures

7. Specify the Action details.

Action

Select an action to be taken from the available options:

Available Options:Recommended: This action means that you want the OS to handle this alert level according to best-fit recommendations.Allow Packet: Allows the packet to its intended destination.Drop Packet: Drops packets if it detects any traffic that matches the signature. Disable:

Disables the signature, if it detects any traffic that matches the signature. Drop Session: Drops the entire session if detects any traffic that matches the signature. Reset: Resets entire session if detects any traffic that matches the signature.Bypass Session: Allows the entire session if detects any traffic that matches the signature.

Figure 343: Action

8. Click Save.

Custom IPS Signatures

This page displays the list of all the custom IPS patterns.

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 379

Custom IPS Patterns provide the flexibility to customize IPS for diverse network environments. Predefined IPS patterns included in the device cover common attacks while Custom IPS Patterns protect your network from uncommon attacks that are due to the use of proprietary server, custom protocol, or specialized applications used in the corporate network.

Note: Administrator can create Custom IPS Pattern and configure policies using them. However, the IPS scanning will be effective only if Network Protection module is subscribed.

Add IPS Pattern

1. Go to Protect > Intrusion Prevention > Custom IPS Signatures and click Add.

2. Enter the IPS Signature details.

Name

Enter a name to identify the Custom IPS Signature.

Protocol

Select IPS protocol from the list.

Available Options:TCPUDPICMPALL

Custom Rule

Specify IPS Signature definition.

Signature definition must begin with a keyword followed by the value enclosed between the double quotes and must end with semicolon (;)

Format: Keyword: “value”;

For example, content: “USER JOHN”;

If traffic with the content USER JOHN is detected, action defined in the policy will be taken.

Refer to Appendix B – IPS - Custom IPS Pattern Syntax for more details on creating IPS Pattern.

Severity

Select the level of severity from the available options.CriticalMajorModerateMinorWarning

Recommended Action

Specify action to be taken on the selected policy when matching pattern is found.

Available Actions:

Allow Packet - Check each packet before taking action. Drop Packet - Drop packets. Drop Session

- Terminate entire session instead of scanning all the session packets to save resources and avoid getting high number of alerts. Reset - Send TCP reset packet to the originator. Bypass Session -

Scan initial packets only. If the initial packets match the pattern then the rest of the session packets are not scanned and the traffic is allowed to pass.

In all the cases, device generates the log and alerts the Network Administrator.

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 380

Figure 344: Add Custom IPS Signature

3. Click Save.

DoS & Spoof Prevention

The device provides several security options that cannot be defined by the security policies. This includes protection from several kinds of “Denial of Service attacks”. These attacks disable computers and circumvent security.

A Denial of Service (DoS) attack is a method that hackers use to prevent or deny legitimate users access to a service.

DoS attacks are typically executed by sending many request packets to a targeted server (usually Web, FTP, or Mail server), which floods the server’s resources, making the system unusable. Their goal is not to steal the information but disable or deprive a device or network so that users no longer have access to the network services/resources.

All servers can handle a traffic volume up to a maximum, beyond which they become disabled. Hence, attackers send a very high volume of redundant traffic to a system so it cannot examine and allow permitted network traffic. Best way to protect against the DoS attack is to identify and block such redundant traffic. Below are some DoS settings which can be used for identifying DoS attack:

Packet rate per Source

Total number of connections or packets allowed to a particular user.

Burst rate per Source

Maximum number of packets allowed to a particular user at a given time.

Packet rate per Destination

Total number of connections or packets allowed from a particular user.

Burst rate per Destination

Maximum of packets allowed from a particular user at a given time.

How it works

When the burst rate is crossed, the device considers it as an attack. The device provides DoS attack protection by dropping all the excess packets from the particular source/destination. The device will continue to drop the packets till the attack subsides. Because the device applies threshold value per IP address, traffic from the particular source/ destination will only be dropped while the rest of the network traffic will not be dropped at all.

Time taken to re-allow traffic from the blocked source/destination = time taken to subside the attack + 30 seconds

For example:

Packet rate per source: 100 packets per second

Burst rate per source: 200 packets per second

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 381

When the user starts sending requests, initially he will be able to send 200 packets per second but once the 200 packets are received, in the next phase the user will only be able to send 100 packets per second. So in the next phase, if the user sends 150 packets per second, the device will consider it as an attack and drop 50 (150 -100) packets. The device will then only accept traffic from the user 30 seconds after having dropped the packets.

Threshold values

The device uses packet rate and burst rate values as a threshold value to detect DoS attacks. These values depend on various factors like:

• Network bandwidth

• Nature of traffic

• Capacity of servers in the network

These values are applicable to the individual source or destination requests per user/IP address and not globally to the entire network traffic. For example, if the source rate is 2500 packets/minute and the network consists of 100 users then each user is allowed a packet rate of 2500 packets per minute

Configuring high values will degrade the performance and too low values will block the regular requests. Hence it is very important to configure appropriate values for both source and destination IP address.

Spoof Protection General Settings

You can configure a MAC and/or IP address pair entry in the IP-MAC trusted list to improve the security of your network. Using MAC address filtering makes it more difficult for a hacker to guess and use a random MAC address or spoof a MAC address to gain access to your network as the traffic does not even reach your firewall.

Similarly, it is also possible to filter packets based on the IP-MAC pair. It prevents hosts which try to violate trusted

IP-MAC. To make the restriction more granular, you can enable restriction on the zones.

Enable Spoof Prevention

If enabled, the device provides 3 ways to prevent spoofing using an IP-MAC trusted list:

• IP Spoofing – Packets will be dropped if a matching route entry is not available.

• MAC Filter – Packets will be dropped if the MAC addresses are not configured as trusted

MAC.

• IP-MAC Pair Filter – Packets will be dropped if either IP or MAC address does not match with any entry in the IP-MAC trusted list. Packets will be allowed if both IP and MAC address are not defined as an entry in the IP-MAC trusted list.

Restrict Unknown IP on Trusted MAC (Only applicable if Spoof Prevention is enabled)

Enable the option, if you want to drop traffic from any IP address not in the trusted list for the trusted MAC address.

By default, it is disabled. When disabled, traffic from any IP address not in the trusted list will be allowed even if it is coming for the trusted MAC address.

Zone

IP Spoofing

LAN

Yes

Enable at least for one zone.

The device will reverse lookup for the route of the source network and, if not available, packets will be dropped and logged.

Default: disabled for all zones

WAN

DMZ

Yes

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 382

WiFi

Yes

Zone LAN

MAC Filter

Note: To enable

MAC

Filtering, you need to

add

a trusted

MAC address.

it is

If enabled, to be enabled for at least one zone.

Default: disabled for all zones

Yes all the requests from the

MAC address not configured in the trusted list, please make sure

It restricts the access of your network to the external hosts.

As the device will drop to include

MAC addresses of all your internal devices.

WAN

Yes

DMZ

Yes

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 383

WiFi

Yes

Zone

IP-MAC

Pair Filter

LAN

Yes

• MAC address differs for the trusted

IP address and

• IP address differs for the trusted

MAC address

The device will drop the request considering it as a spoofed request if: it is

If enabled, to be enabled for at least one zone.

Default: disabled for all zones

IP-

MAC pair does not exist in the trusted list.

in the list.

Request is dropped if the

But, the request will be allowed if

IP or

MAC address does not exist at all

WAN

DMZ

Yes

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 384

WiFi

Yes

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 385

Figure 345: Spoof Protection General Settings

Spoof Protection Trusted MAC

You can enable MAC address and/or IP address pair filtering to improve security. By enabling filtering, you define the devices that can access your network. It is also possible to import the trusted MAC list through a CSV (Comma

Separated Value) file. When a user attempts to access the network, the device checks the MAC address and/or IP address from the list. User gets access to the network only if the MAC address and/or IP address are in the trusted

MAC list, else the request is rejected.

The Spoof Prevention Trusted MAC section displays a list of all the MAC addresses configured as trusted MAC.

The page also provides options to

add

a new MAC address, update the existing addresses, and

import

the list of addresses.

DoS Settings

Attack definition can be defined both for source and destination.

SYN Flood

SYN Flood is the attack in which large numbers of connections are sent so that the backlog queue overflows. The connection is created when the victim host receives a connection request and allocates some memory resources to it. A SYN flood attack creates so many half-open connections that the system becomes overwhelmed and cannot handle incoming requests any more.

Configure packet rate (packets/minute) and burst rate (packets/second) for source and destination.

Select Apply Flag check box to apply the SYN flood definition and control the allowed number of packets.

Source Traffic Dropped displays number of source packets dropped in case source packet rate control is applied.

Destination Traffic Dropped displays the number of packets dropped in case destination packet rate control is applied

Click on the link Click Here to view DoS attacks status. You will be redirected to Protect >

Intrusion Prevention > DoS Attacks. Then click SYN Flood to view the real-time updates on flooding. It displays the source IP address - which was used for flooding and IP address which was targeted.

UDP Flood

User Datagram Protocol (UDP) Flood links two systems. It hooks up one system’s UDP charactergenerating service, with another system’s UDP echo service. Once the link is made, the two systems are tied up exchanging a flood of meaningless data.

Configure packet rate (packets/minute) and burst rate (packets/second) for source and destination.

Select Apply Flag check box to apply the UDP flood definition and control the allowed number of packets.

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 386

Source Traffic Dropped displays the number of source packets dropped in case source packet rate control is applied.

Destination Traffic Dropped displays the number of packets dropped in case destination packet rate control is applied

Click on the link Click Here to view DoS attacks status. It will redirect you to Protect > Intrusion

Prevention > DoS Attacks and Click UDP Flood to view the real-time updates on flooding. It displays the source IP address - which was used for flooding and IP address which was targeted.

TCP Flood

TCP attack sends huge amount of TCP packets so that the host/victim computer cannot handle, thereby denying service to legitimate TCP users.

Configure packet rate (packets/minute) and burst rate (packets/second) for source and destination.

Select Apply Flag check box to apply the TCP flood definition and control the allowed number of packets.

Source Traffic Dropped displays the number of source packets dropped in case source packet rate control is applied.

Destination Traffic Dropped displays the number of packets dropped in case destination packet rate control is applied

ICMP/ICMPv6 Flood

ICMP/ICMPv6 attack sends huge amounts of packet/traffic so that the protocol implementation of the host/victim computer cannot handle, thereby preventing legitimate packets from getting through to their destination.

Configure packet rate (packets/minute) and burst rate (packets/second) for source and destination.

Select Apply Flag check box to apply the ICMP flood definition and control the allowed number of packets.

Source Traffic Dropped displays the number of source packets dropped in case source packet rate control is applied.

Destination Traffic Dropped displays the number of packets dropped in case destination packet rate control is applied

Click on the link Click Here to view DoS attacks status. It will redirect you to Protect > Intrusion

Prevention > DoS Attacks and Click ICMP/ICMPv6 Flood to view the real-time updates on flooding. It displays the source IP address - which was used for flooding and IP address which was targeted.

Dropped Source Routed Packets

Select Apply Flag check box to enable. This will block any source routed connections and prevent any packets with an internal address from entering your network.

Disable ICMP/ICMPv6 Redirect Packet

An ICMP redirect packet is used by routers to inform the hosts what the correct route should be. If an attacker is able to forge ICMP redirect packets, he or she can alter the routing tables on the host and possibly weaken the security of the host by causing traffic to flow via another path.

Disable the option to prevent the attacker from forging ICMP redirect packets.

Default: enabled

ARP Hardening

If enabled, the device will send an ARP reply only if the destination IP address is a local address configured on the incoming interface and both the sender and destination IP address are in the same subnet.

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 387

Figure 346: DoS Settings

DoS Bypass Rule

The device allows to bypass the DoS rule in case you are sure that the specified source will not be used for flooding or the device ignores flooding coming from the specified source. By default, VPN zone traffic is also subjected to

DoS inspection. You can also bypass DoS inspection of the traffic coming from certain hosts of the VPN zone.

The DoS Bypass Rule section displays a list of all the bypass rule.

Add Trusted MAC Address

1. Go to Protect > Intrusion Prevention > DoS & Spoof Protectionand click Add under the Spoof Protection

Trusted MAC section.

2. Enter trusted MAC address details.

MAC Address

Specify a MAC address to be added to the Trusted MAC list.

IPv4 Address

Specify an IPv4 address that is to be bound to the MAC address. Packets will be rejected if either

MAC or IPv4 address does not match.

Available Options:Static – Specify an IP Address to be bound to the MAC address. Packets will be rejected if either MAC or IP address does not match. Multiple IP addresses separated by comma can be provided.DHCP – MAC address will be bound to the IP address leased by the device DHCP server as and when the IP is leased. Entry will be updated automatically when the leased IP address is updated.

To unbind the IPv4 address, select None.

IPv6 Address

Specify an IPv6 address that is to be bound to the MAC address. Packets will be rejected if either

MAC or IPv6 address does not match.

To unbind the IPv6 address, select None.

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 388

Figure 347: Add Trusted MAC

3. Click Save.

Import Trusted MAC Addresses

Instead of adding the trusted entries individually, the device provides a facility to import the trusted list from a CSV

(Comma Separated Value) file.

The format for the CSV file should be as follows:

1. First row of the CSV file has to be the header row: MAC Address,IP Association,IP Address.

2. The rest of the rows are values corresponding to the header fields .

3. Blank rows will be ignored.

4. An error message is displayed only for invalid rows.

5. Format of values:

• Compulsory fields: MAC address and IP association.

• Optional fields: IP address.

• IP association must be Static or DHCP/DHCPv6 or None.

• For Static IP association, IP address must be available.

• For None/DHCP type of IP association, IP address is not required.

• For invalid MAC/IP address or IP association entry will be discarded.

• Use comma to insert multiple static IP addresses.

1. Go to Protect > Intrusion Prevention > DoS & Spoof Protectionand click Import under the Spoof Protection

Trusted MAC section to import a CSV file.

2. Browse trusted MAC address file.

Trusted MAC Address File

To choose a CSV file, click the file selection button against Trusted MAC Address File.

3. Click Upload File to upload CSV file.

Figure 348: Import Trusted MAC Address CSV File

Create DoS Bypass Rule

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 389

1. Go to Protect > Intrusion Prevention > DoS & Spoof Protection and click Add under the DoS Bypass Rule section.

2. Enter bypass rule details.

IP Family

Select the IP family of the traffic to be bypassed.

Source IP/Netmask (available only if selected IP Family is IPv4)

Specify the source IP/Netmask.

Specify * if you want to bypass entire network.

Destination IP/Netmask (available only if selected IP Family is IPv4)

Specify the destination IP/Netmask.

Specify * if you want to bypass entire network.

Source IP/Prefix (available only if selected IP Family is IPv6)

Specify the source IP/prefix.

Specify * if you want to bypass entire network.

Destination IP/Prefix (available only if selected IP Family is IPv6)

Specify the destination IP/prefix.

Specify * if you want to bypass entire network.

Protocol

Select the protocol whose traffic is to be bypassed if generated from the specified source to destination.

Available Options:TCPUDPICMPAll Protocols

For example, if you select TCP protocol then DoS rules will not be applied on the TCP traffic from the specified source to destination.

Source Port

Specify port number for the source.

Specify * if you want to bypass entire network.

Destination Port

Specify port number for the destination.

Specify * if you want to bypass entire network.

Figure 349: Add DoS Bypass Rule

3. Click Save.

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 390

Web

Use the web protection settings to identify and block the latest web threats. These settings let you control traffic and protect against threats and inappropriate web usage. Exceptions let you override settings as required for your business needs.

Policies

With policies, you can control traffic using rules and advanced settings. The default set of policies describes some common restrictions.

To test and troubleshoot policies, click Policy Test.

Figure 350: Policies

Rules

Rules specify the following criteria:

• Users to whom the rule applies. These include groups and individual users.

• Activities that describe the type of usage to restrict. These include user activities, categories, URL groups, file types, and dynamic categories.

• Content filters to restrict web content that contains any terms in the lists specified.

• An action to take when the firewall encounters traffic that matches the rule criteria.

The firewall evaluates rules from highest to lowest. For example, a rule that allows all traffic that precedes a rule that restricts a specific type of traffic takes precedence and the subsequent rule is ignored.

Figure 351: Rules

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 391

Migrating Policies from Previous Releases

This release supports up to 128 rules in a single policy. If you are migrating policies from a previous release that contain more than 128 rules, only the first 128 rules will be used.

Web policy rules now support combined activities. These include user activities, categories, URL groups, file types, and dynamic categories.To maintain the overall functionality of the policy, replace blocks of adjacent rules for different activities with a single rule that contains a group of activities. Please delete or consolidate rules as required.

Add Policy

1. Go to Protect > Web > Policies and click Add Policy.

2. Type a name.

3. Click Add Rule.

Tip: To use an existing rule as a template, click the Clone button ( ).

The firewall creates a default rule that blocks all web traffic for all users. The default rule is disabled.

Figure 352: Add Rule

4. Specify users.

a) In the new rule, move the pointer over the users field, click the user (“Anybody”), and then click Add New

Item.

b) Clear the Anybody check box.

c) Select users.

Tip: You can filter the type of users to display by clicking Show Only and selecting a user type.

d) Click Apply selected items.

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 392

Figure 353: Select Users

5. Specify activities and content filters.

a) Move the pointer over the activities field, click the activity (“AllWebTraffic”), and then click Add New Item.

b) In the Activities tab, clear the All Web Traffic check box.

c) Select activities.

Tip: You can filter the type of activities to display by clicking Show Only and selecting an activity type.

d) Click Apply selected items.

e) Click the Content Filters tab and enable the and with content check box.

f) Click Add New Item and select filters.

g) Click Apply selected items.

6. In the Action field, specify an action to take when the firewall encounters HTTP traffic that matches the selected criteria .

Select from the following options:

Options

Allow Warn Block Log

7. (Optional) Specify an action to take when the firewall encounters HTTPS traffic that matches the selected criteria.

Note: Follow these steps only if you want to specify an action for HTTPS traffic that is different from the one you specified for HTTP.

a) Move the pointer to the right of the Action list.

The firewall displays the HTTPS Use Action list.

Figure 354: HTTPS Use Action

b) Select an option.

HTTPS Use Action

Use Action: Select this option to use the same action that is currently in effect for HTTP traffic. If you specify a different HTTP action at a later time, HTTPS action will also use that action. Allow:

Always allow HTTPS traffic that matches the selected criteria. Warn: Always display a warning message when encountering HTTPS traffic that matches the selected criteria. Block: Always block

HTTPS traffic that matches the selected criteria.

8. Move the pointer over the Constraints field and select a schedule.

Tip: You can create a new schedule by clicking Create new and specifying criteria.

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 393

9. Click the On/Off switch to enable the rule.

Figure 355: Enable Rule

10. Click and drag the rule handle to position the rule in the hierarchy.

Figure 356: Position Rule

11. Click Advanced Settings and specify settings for the policy.

Enable logging and reporting

Include this policy in logs and reports.

Prevent downloading of large files

Prevent downloading files greater than the size specified.

Restrict login domains for Google Apps

Restrict logging in to Google Apps only on the domains specified.

For your policies to take effect, add them to a firewall rule.

User Activities

User activities combine web categories, file types, and URL groups in one container. For example, you can create a user activity to associate spyware and malware with a list of URLs. You can include user activities in web policies to control access to websites or files that match any of the specified criteria.

Add User Activity

1. Go to Protect > Web > User Activities and click Add.

2. Type a name.

3. Click Add New Item and select categories.

Select from the following:

• Web categories

• File types

• URL groups

Note: Categories are evaluated using ‘OR’. Only one category must return true in order to match traffic.

Tip: You can filter the type of categories to display by clicking Show: All and selecting a category type.

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 394

Figure 357: Add User Activity

URL Groups

URL groups contain one or more URLs that you can use in web policies to block or allow access to websites.

Add URL Group

1. Go to Protect > Web > URL Groups and click Add.

2. Type a name.

Type a URL in the Search/Add text box and click the Add button ( ).

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 396

Figure 360: Add URL Group

Exceptions

With exceptions, you can override protection settings for web traffic that matches the specified criteria. For example, you can create an exception to skip HTTPS decryption for sites that contain confidential data. The default set of exceptions specifies some common override behaviors.

Override behaviors now include Sandstorm.

Note: Existing exceptions that skip malware scanning now also skip Sandstorm analysis.

Add Exception

1. Go to Protect > Web > Exceptions and click Add Exception.

2. Type a name.

3. Specify web traffic criteria.

Note: The firewall evaluates all types of criteria specified using the “AND” operator. For example, if you specify URL patterns and website categories, both types must return true in order to match traffic.

However, within each category, criteria are evaluated using “OR”.

URL pattern matches

Match web traffic according to the specified URL or pattern, for example, example.com. Regular expressions are allowed here. For example, ^([A-Za-z0-9.-]*\.)?example\.com/ matches all subdomains of example.com.

Note: You must specify pattern matches using ASCII characters. For information about converting non-ASCII characters, refer to

RFC 3490, Internationalizing

Domain Names in Applications

Website categories

Match web traffic according to the specified web categories.

Source IP addresses

Match web traffic that originates from the specified IP addresses.

Destination IP addresses

Match web traffic going to the specified IP addresses.

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 397

Figure 361: Add Exception

4. Specify an action to skip when the firewall encounters traffic that matches the criteria.

HTTPS Decryption

Do not decrypt HTTPS for traffic that meets the specified criteria.

Note: If you disable HTTPS decryption, the firewall will not perform any other check that relies on decrypted traffic, such as malware scanning. However, the firewall will continue to scan HTTP traffic that matches the exception.

Malware and Content Scanning

Do not scan traffic that meets the specified criteria for malware or content as specified in a content filter.

Sandstorm

Do not send files that are downloaded using the specified criteria to Sandstorm for analysis.

Policy Checks

Do not check policies for traffic that meets the specified criteria.

File Types

A file type is a classification that is determined by file extension and MIME header. You can include file types in web policies to control access to files that match the specified criteria. The default file types contain some common criteria and you can create additional types.

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 398

Using File Types with Policy Rules

You can create file types to control access to files on a more granular level. For example, you may want to allow access to SQL files but deny access to all other database files. In this case, you would create a file type for SQL files and a policy that specifies the following rules in the following order:

1. Allow access to SQL files

2. Block access to all database files

Add File Type

1. Go to Protect > Web > File Type and click Add.

2. Type a name.

3. (Optional) Select a template.

You can select from predefined or custom file types. If you do not wish to use a template, choose Blank.

4. Specify the file extension and MIME header.

Figure 362: Add File Type

Surfing Quotas

Surfing quota policy allows you to assign the duration of Internet surfing time to users and groups.

• Duration of Internet access can be cyclic or non-cyclic.

• You can apply the surfing quota policy to users.

The device is shipped with the following predefined policies. Predefined policies can be applied straight away to users and groups.

• Unlimited Internet Access

• 1 Month Unlimited Access

• 1 Month 100 hours

• Monthly 100 hours Cyclic

• Daily 1 hour Cyclic

• Weekly 7 hours Cyclic

Note:

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 399

1. Users generally belong to a group. If the surfing quota policy applied to the user differs from the one applied to the user’s group, the user’s policy takes priority.

2. For details of policies and rules to which the surfing quota policy can be applied, view the following diagram.

Add Surfing Quota

Groups).

The Add Surfing Quota Policy page allows you to create a surfing quota policy.

1. Go to Protect > Web > Surfing Quotas or System > Profiles > Surfing Quotas and click Add on the upper right side.

2. Enter the details.

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 400

Name

Enter a unique name to identify the policy.

Description

Enter a description for the surfing quota policy.

Cycle Type

Select the cycle type.

Available Options:Cyclic: Duration of Internet access recurs for each cycle.Non-Cyclic: When the specified time limit ends, the user is disconnected.

Cycle Hours (available only if Cycle Type is Cyclic)

Specify the cycle hours in hours and minutes. Select the cycle from the drop-down list. Cycle hours define the upper limit of surfing hours for daily, weekly, monthly or yearly cycles.

At the end of each cycle, cycle hours are reset to zero.

Example: If cycle hours specified are 7 hours 30 minutes for a daily cycle, they are reset to zero at the end of each day whether cycle hours are fully or partially used or remain unused.

Validity

Select Unlimited if you do not want to restrict the validity period. Clear the check box to specify the validity period of Internet access.

Maximum Hours

Example: Cyclic Policy

Cycle Hours: 5 hours per day

Validity: 5 days

Maximum Hours: 20 hours

If the user accesses Internet for 5 hours each day, the user will have used 20 hours of Internet access by the end of the fourth day and hence will be disconnected.

Example: Non-Cyclic Policy

Validity: 10 days

Maximum Hours: 10 hours

The user is disconnected at the end of 10 hours even if the validity period does not expire.

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 401

Figure 363: Add Surfing Quota Policy

3. Click Save.

User Notifications

The firewall displays notifications to users when a web policy is set to block access or warn before connecting. Use these settings to create and preview notifications.

To specify an image to display on notification pages, enable the Use custom images check box and choose images.

To create a block notification, enable the Use custom block message check box and type a message.

To create a warning notification, enable the Use custom warn message check box and type a message.

You can preview current messages by clicking the preview links.

Applications

This section provides facilities to control and manage the applications shipped with the device.

The following pages are accessible:

•

Application List

on page 401: Displays all applications available for use.

•

Application Filter

on page 402: Enables you to control access to the applications.

•

Traffic Shaping Default

: Apply traffic shaping policy to the application category or to the individual application within the category.

Application List

This page displays all the applications available for use.

The device can identify and control applications that use standard ports, non-standard ports, or port hopping, or that tunnel through encrypted SSL traffic. This feature enables prioritization of applications based on user identity, time, and bandwidth, allowing great flexibility, visibility, and control. The device also provides implementation of application-based bandwidth management, accelerating critical applications while blocking malware-laden sites through web filtering. Organizations can group applications as per their requirements into business-critical, entertainment, communication, or collaboration, and can control access through security policies.

Note: You need a subscription to Web Protection before you can use this feature. Check its features by taking a free trial. (See System > Administration > Licensing)

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 402

The device is shipped with a set of predefined applications. These applications are classified based on their risk level, characteristics and technology, offering more granular controls.

The total number of application signatures included depends on the Application Signatures Database used by the device.

The application list can be filtered based on name of the application, category of the application, risk, characteristics, and technology.

Application Filter

This page displays a list of all the predefined and custom policies.

An Application Filter Policy controls a user’s application access. It specifies which user has access to which applications and allows you to define powerful security policies based on almost limitless policy parameters like:

• Individual users

• Groups of users

• Time of day

The device is shipped with the following predefined policies for application filters to address common use cases:

• Allow All: By default, allows access to all the categories except the specified categories. Access to the specified categories depends on the strategy defined for each category.

• Deny All: By default, denies access to all the categories except the specified categories. Access to the specified categories depends on the strategy defined for each category.

• Block filter avoidance apps: Drops traffic from applications that tunnel other applications, proxy and tunnel applications, and from applications that can bypass firewall policy. These applications allow users to anonymously browse the Internet by connecting to servers on the Internet via encrypted SSL tunnels. This, in turn, enables users to bypass network security measures.

• Block generally unwanted apps: Drops generally unwanted application traffic. This includes applications such as file transfer, proxy & tunnel, risk prone, peer to peer networking (P2P) and applications that cause loss of productivity.

• Block high risk (Risk Level 4 and 5) apps: Drops traffic from applications that are classified under ‘high risk’ applications (Risk Level- 4 and 5).

• Block peer to peer (P2P) networking apps: Drops traffic from applications that are categorized as P2P applications. P2P could be a mechanism for distributing Bots, Spywares, Adware, Trojans, Rootkits, Worms and other types of malwares. It is generally advised to have P2P applications blocked in your network.

• Block very high risk (Risk Level 5) apps: Drops traffic from applications that are classified under ‘very high risk’ applications (Risk Level- 5).

These predefined policies are immediately available for use. You can also define custom policies to specify different levels of access for different users to meet your organization’s requirements.

The page also provides options to add a new policy, update the parameters of an existing policy, delete a policy, add a filtering rule to a policy, or delete a filtering rule attached to a policy.

Note: You cannot edit/delete Allow All and Deny All predefined policies.

In application filter policies, web proxy detects applications that use HTTPS.

Add Application Filter Policy

This page lets you configure custom policies to define different levels of access for different users to meet your organization’s requirements.

1. Go to Protect > Applications > Application Filter and click Add.

2. Enter the Application Filter Policy details.

Name

Enter a name to identify the Application Filter Policy.

Description

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 403

Enter description for the Application Filter Policy.

Template

Select template for the Application Filter Policy.

Figure 364: Application Filter

3. Click Save.

4. Once the policy is added, next step is to add a rule for configuring filtering criteria.

Note: Rules can be added for custom policies only.

Add Application Filter Policy Rules

Use the Add Application Filter Policy Rules page to configure a new rule for Application Filter Policy.

The Add Application Filter Policy Rules page allows you to manually configure a new rule.

Go to Protect > Applications > Application Filter and click .

2. Click Add under Application Filter Policy.

3. Enter the application filter details.

Category

Select Application Category from the list of available categories.

Risk

Select the level of risk from the available options.Select All1 - VERY LOW 2 - LOW3 - MEDIUM

4 - HIGH5 - VERY HIGH

Characteristics

Select the characteristics from the available options.Select AllExcessive BandwidthProne to misuseTransfer filesTunnels other appsVulnerabilities Widely usedLoss of productivityCan bypass firewall policy

Technology

Select the technology from the available options.Select AllBrowser BasedClient ServerNetwork

ProtocolP2P

Smart Filter (available only if Select All is selected)

Enter the partial or full name of the application category to be filtered.

Figure 365: Application Filter Criteria

4. Enter the list of matching applications.

Select All

Click to select all the Applications from the list.

Applications are available based on the Application Filter Criteria.

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 404

Select Individual Application

Click to select the Applications from the list.

Applications are available based on the Application Filter Criteria.

Search

Specify the name of the application in the textbox to be searched.

This option is available, only if option “Select Individual Application” is selected.

Name

Displays name of the Applications under the Category selected. You can also select more than one application using the checkbox.

Description

Displays description of the Application.

Category

Displays category of the Application.

Risk

Displays the risk factor involved with the Application.

Characteristics

Displays the characteristics of the Application.

Technology

Displays the technology utilized for the Application.

Figure 366: List of Matching Applications

5. Enter the action you want to perform.

Action

Select an Action for the Policy from the available options. Allow Deny

Schedule

Select schedule from the list available in the dropdown list.

Figure 367:

6. Click Save.

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 405

Traffic Shaping Default

The Traffic Shaping Default page allows you to view the list of all application categories. This page also provides the option to edit the category or application to apply a traffic shaping policy.

The applications shipped with the device are grouped into categories. These categories can be used in filtering policy and bandwidth restriction can be applied to the category or to the individual application within the category.

The categories list can be filtered based on name of the category. Use the or toggle beside the category name to expand and collapse the list of applications grouped in the respective category.

Configure Traffic Shaping Policy for Category or Application

Use this page to configure traffic shaping policy.

This page allows you to configure traffic shaping policy for category or application.

Go to Protect > Applications > Traffic Shaping Default and click .

2. Enter the details.

Name

Displays the name of the Application Filter Category or Application.

Traffic Shaping Policy

Select a policy or click Create new to create a new traffic shaping policy for the application/ application category.

Traffic Shaping policy allocates and limits the bandwidth usage of the user, web category, application category.

3. Click Save.

Wireless

Wireless Protection allows you to configure the following:

•

Wireless Networks

: Create and manage Wireless Networks.

•

Mesh Networks

: Create and manage Mesh Networks.

•

Access Points

: Provides an overview of the access points known to the device.

•

Access Point Groups

: Allows you to organize access points in groups.

•

Hotspots

: Add/remove Hotspots and apply filtering policies.

•

Hotspot Voucher Definition

: Manage different voucher definitions for Hotspot access vouchers.

•

Rogue AP Scan

: Schedule scanning to discover authorized APs and rogue APs.

Wireless Client List

The Wireless Client List page displays a live snapshot of currently managed APs, broadcasted SSIDs (wireless networks), wireless clients connected through SSID to AP and mesh networks.

Show by SSID/Show by AP

The administrator can filter currently connected clients by Access Point or SSID

The page provides a list of wireless clients along with their name, IP address, MAC address, signal, last data transfer rate, connection time, frequency, vendor.

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 406

Figure 368: Wireless Client List

Wireless Networks

The Wireless Networks menu allows managing the wireless networks connected to the device.

Note: You can also view the wireless network status on the Protect > Wireless > Wireless Client List

The page provides a list of all configured wireless networks along with their name, SSID, status, client traffic mode, encryption mode used and frequency band.

Figure 369: Wireless Networks List

Add a New Wireless Network

This page describes how to add a new wireless network.

Newly created wireless networks can be used in definitions for access points and access point groups.

1. Go to Protect > Wireless > Wireless Networks and click the Add button.

2. Specify the General Settings settings.

Name

Specify a descriptive name for the network.

Description

Enter a description for the wireless network that helps you to identify it.

SSID

Enter the Service Set Identifier (SSID) for the network which will be seen by clients and allow them to identify the wireless network. The SSID may consist of 1-32

ASCII printable characters

Security Mode

Select a security mode from the drop-down list.

Default: WPA 2 Personal.

Note: We recommend to use WPA2. For security reasons, we recommend not to use

WEP unless there are clients using your wireless network that do not support one of the other methods.

When using an enterprise authentication method, you also need to configure a RADIUS server on the Configure > Authentication > Servers page. As NAS ID of the RADIUS server enter the wireless network name.

Note: Sophos XG Firewall supports the IEEE 802.11r standard in WPA2 (PSK/

Enterprise) networks to reduce roaming times. Clients also need to support the IEEE

802.11r standard.

Passphrase/PSK (available only if WPA Personal, WPA2Personal, or WPA2/WPA Personal

security mode is selected)

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 407

Specify the passphrase to protect the wireless network from unauthorized access and repeat it in the

Confirm Passphrase/PSK field. The passphrase may consist of 8-63 ASCII printable characters.

Key (available only if WEP Open security mode is selected)

Specify a WEP key that consists of exactly 26 hexadecimal characters.

Client Traffic

From the dropdown list select how the wireless network is to be integrated into your local network.

Available options:

• Separate Zone

• Bridge to AP LAN

• Bridge to VLAN

Default: Separate Zone.

Separate Zone

The wireless network is handled as a separate network, having an IP address range of its own. Using

this option, after adding the wireless network, proceed as described in the chapter

Next Steps for

Separate Zone Networks

Note: When switching an existing Separate Zone network to Bridge to AP LAN or

Bridge to VLAN, a previously configured WLAN interface will be deleted.

Zone

From the dropdown list select a zone where the wireless network should be broadcast.

Default: WiFi.

IP Address

Assign an IP address to the wireless network.

Netmask

Select a subnet mask for the IP address.

Bridge to AP LAN

You can bridge a wireless network into the network of an access point, which means that wireless clients share the same IP address range. Using this option, after adding the wireless network, proceed as described in the chapter

Next Steps for Bridge to AP LAN Networks

Bridge to VLAN (not available for local WiFi devices)

You can decide to have this wireless network’s traffic bridged to a VLAN of your choice. This is useful when you want access points to be in a common network separate from the wireless clients.

Bridge to VLAN ID

Specify the VLAN ID of the network that the wireless clients should be part of.

Client VLAN ID (only available with an enterprise security mode)

Select how the VLAN ID is defined.

• Static: Uses the VLAN ID defined in the Bridge to VLAN ID field.

• RADIUS & Static: Uses the VLAN ID delivered by your RADIUS server: When a user connects to one of your wireless networks and authenticates at your RADIUS server, the

RADIUS server tells the access point what VLAN ID to use for that user. Thus, when using multiple wireless networks, you can define per user who has access to which internal networks.

If a user does not have a VLAN ID attribute assigned, the VLAN ID defined in the Bridge to

VLAN ID is used.

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 408

Figure 370: Add Wireless Network

3. Specify the Advanced Settings.

Encryption (available only if the WPA, WPA2, or WPA2/WPA encryption mode is selected)

Select an encryption algorithm, which can be AES, TKIP or TKIP&AES.

Note: For security reasons and better performance, we recommend you to use AES.

Frequency Band

Access points assigned to this wireless network will transmit on the selected frequency band(s).

The 5 GHz band generally has a higher performance, lower latency, and is typically less disturbed.

Hence it should be preferred for e.g. VoIP communication.

Time-based Access

Select this checkbox to enable the wireless network access according to a time schedule.

Select Active Time (available only if Time-based Access is selected)

Select a schedule definition which determines when the wireless network is enabled. You can add a new schedule definition by clicking Add New Item .

Client Isolation

Clients within a network usually can communicate with one another. If you want to prevent this, for example in a guest network, select Enabled from the drop-down list.

Hide SSID

If you want to hide the wireless network’s SSID, select the Enable checkbox. Please note that this is not a security feature.

Fast Transition (available only if WPA2 Personal/Enterprise security mode is selected)

Wireless networks with WPA2 security use the IEEE 802.11r standard. If you want to prevent this, select Disabled from the drop-down list.

MAC Filtering

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 409

To restrict the MAC addresses allowed to connect to this wireless network, select Blacklist or

Whitelist. With Blacklist, all MAC addresses are allowed except those listed on the MAC List.

With Whitelist, all MAC addresses are prohibited except those listed on the MAC List.

MAC hosts added under System > Hosts and Services > MAC Host will be displayed in the MAC

List.

Figure 371: Wireless Network Advanced Settings

4. Click Save.

Next Steps for Separate Zone Networks

This page describes how to configure a seperate zone network.

When you add a wireless network with the option Separate Zone, a new corresponding virtual hardware interface will be added automatically, e.g., wlnet1. To be able to use the wireless network, some further manual configuration steps are required.

1. Enable DHCP for the wireless clients.

For your clients to be able to connect to Sophos XG Firewall, they need to be assigned an IP address and a default gateway. Therefore, on the Protect > Network > DHCP page, set up a DHCP server for the interface.

2. Create a network policy on the Policies page to provide Internet access to the wireless clients.

You can now assign the wireless network to the AP at Protect > Wireless > Access Points.

Bridge to AP LAN Networks with Local Devices

For Local Wi-Fi Devices you need to configure some extra settings to enable bridging for the AP LAN.

1. Edit the Local Wi-Fi Device on the Protect > Wireless > Access Points page and select the wireless network.

2. Either create a new bridge interface on the Protect > Network > Interfaces page to use the wireless interface in bridge mode or edit the interface on the Configure > Network > Interfaces page, select a zone and provide an IP address to use the interface in gateway mode.

3. If you want to use the interface in gateway mode, create a DHCP server on the Protect > Network > DHCP page so that the client can receive an IP.

Wireless clients can now connect to the wireless network.

Access Point Overview

This page provides an overview of the access points (AP) known to the system.

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 410

Access Point Types

Sophos XG Firewall currently provides the following types of dedicated access points:

Table 3:

Name

AP 10

AP 15

AP 15c

AP 30

AP 50

AP 55

AP 55C

AP 100

AP 100C

802.11b/g/n

802.11a/b/g/n

Sophos XG Firewall also provides the following dedicated outdoor access points:

Table 4:

Name

AP 100X

Standards

802.11a/b/g/n

802.11a/b/g/n/ac

Standards

802.11a/b/g/n/ac

Band

2.4 GHz

2.4/5 GHz dual-band/ single-radio

2.4 GHz

2.4/5 GHz dual-band/ dual-radio

Channels 1-11

Channels 1-11,

36-48, 149-165

Channels 1-11,

36-48, 149-165

2.4/5 GHz dual-band/ dual-radio

FCC regulatory domain (mainly US)

ETSI regulatory domain (mainly

Europe)

Channels 1-11,

36-48, 149-165

Channels 1-11,

36-48, 149-165

Channels 1-11,

36-48, 149-165

Channels 1-13

Channels 1–13,

36-48

Channels 1-13,

36-64, 100-116,

132-140

Channels 1-13,

36-64, 100-116,

132-140

Channels 1-13,

36-64, 100-116,

132-140

Channels 1-13,

36-64, 100-116,

132-140

Band

2.4/5 GHz dual-band/ dual-radio

FCC regulatory domain (mainly US)

Channels 1-11,

36-64, 100-116,

132-140

ETSI regulatory domain (mainly

Europe)

Channels 1-13,

100-116, 132-140

Sophos XG Firewall also provides the following Wi-Fi Remote Ethernet Devices:

Table 5:

Name

RED 15w

Standards

802.11a/b/g/n

Sophos XG Firewall also provides the following local Wi-Fi devices:

Band

2.4/5 GHz dual-band

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 411

Table 6:

Name

SG 105w/115w

SG 125w/135w

Standards

802.11a/b/g/n

802.11a/b/g/n/ac

Band

2.4/5 GHz dual-band

Note: Because of the bandwith on the APs with ac standard there may be an automatic channel change in some cases. For example, if you select channel 36 the AP could choose channel 40 instead because it provides a better connection. The channel shown on the Access Points page represents the primary channel. This can affect all AP 100 appliances (AP 100, AP 100C and AP 100X) and all SG appliances with integrated access

(SG 105w/115w and SG 125w/135w).

Note: *This article includes information on EOL hardware, which may continue to work but will be unsupported.

Access Points

The Access Points menu allows you to manage the access points (AP) known to the system.

Sophos XG Firewall distinguishes between active, inactive and pending APs. To make sure that only genuine APs connect to your network, APs need to be authorized first.

Access points can be temporarily disabled. When an AP is physically removed from your network, you can delete from the table by clicking the Delete button. As long as the AP remains connected to your network, it will automatically re-appear in the Pending Access Points list after deletion. Sophos XG Firewall appliances with onboard Wi-Fi cannot be deleted from the AP list.

Protect > Wireless > Access Points

This page displays a list of all the active/inactive access points as well as a lists of all the pending access points. It provides options to edit or delete access points and to accept pending access points. You can also view access points on the Protect > Wireless > Wireless Client List page.

Active/Inactive Access Points

For each access point, the list shows you:

Access point ID

Label

Label of the AP, which allows it to be identified easily in the network.

Status

Status of the access point (active/inactive). Active APs are connected, configured, and running.

Inactive APs have been configured in the past but are currently not connected to Sophos XG

Firewall. If an AP remains in this state for more than five minutes, please check the network connectivity of the AP and the configuration of your system.

Channel

Channel the AP transmits on.

Group

Access point group the AP is assigned to.

Country

Country where the AP is located.

MAC

MAC address of the AP.

IP/Last Seen

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 412

Type

IP address of an active AP or the last seen IP address of an inactive AP.

Type of the AP

Figure 372: Active/Inactive Access Points

Pending Access Points

Here, APs are listed that are connected to the system but not yet authorized. After receiving its configuration, the authorized access point will immediately be displayed in the above section. For each access point, the list shows:

ID of the access point.

Label

Label of the AP, which allows it to be identified easily in the network.

Channel

Channel the AP transmits on.

Group

Access point group the AP is assigned to.

MAC

MAC address of the AP.

Figure 373: Pending Access Points

Rules for Assigning Networks to APs

An access point can only be assigned to a wireless network if the client traffic option of the wireless network and the

VLAN tagging option of the access point fit together. The following rules apply:

• Wireless network with client traffic Separate Zone: VLAN tagging of the access point can be enabled or disabled.

• Wireless network with client traffic Bridge to AP LAN: VLAN tagging of the access point has to be disabled.

• Wireless network with client traffic Bridge to VLAN: VLAN tagging of the access point has to be enabled.

The respective wireless clients will use the Bridge to VLAN ID specified for the wireless network, or they will receive their VLAN ID from the RADIUS server, if specified.

Note: An AP 5 can only be assigned to one single wireless network with the Client traffic option Bridge to

AP LAN.

Edit Access Point

This page describes how to edit an access point.

1. Go to Protect > Wireless > Access Points and click Edit icon under the Manage column.

2. Specify the Access Point details.

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 413

Displays the ID for the access point.

Label

Specify a label for easier identification of the AP in your network.

Country

Select the country where the AP is located.

Group

Select to organize APs in groups. If a group has been created before, you can select it from the dropdown list.

Figure 374: Edit Access Point

3. Specify the Wireless Networks details.

Wireless Networks

Select the wireless networks that should be broadcasted by the AP.

Note: You can only add a wireless network if the AP is not a member of any AP

Group.

Figure 375: Edit Access Point

4. Specify the Mesh Network details.

Mesh Networks (only available for AP50)

Select the mesh networks that should be broadcasted by the AP.

You can also add APs that should broadcast mesh networks from this page by clicking Create New.

Note: This option will only be displayed if a mesh network is configured.

5. Specify the Advanced Settings details.

Bridge to Ethernet

Turn it on to bridge the local wireless access point to Ethernet. The existing DHCP server will be used for the bridge port. If a DHCP server does not exist, a new server is automatically created. If you turn it off, the bridge is deleted and all configurations are restored to the physical interface.

Note: This feature is available only for IPv4 configurations and applicable only for the SSIDs that are of type, Bridge To LAN.

Port to Bridge

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 414

Select the port for bridge connection.

Note: The interface must have an IP address and should not belong to the WAN port or any other bridge. Bridging between VLAN interface and local Wi-Fi is not allowed.

Zone

Select the zone for the bridge connection. You cannot select the WAN zone here.

Channel 2.4 GHz

Select a channel for your wireless network.

Default: Auto

Note: Selecting “Auto” will automatically select the least used channel for transmission.

Dyn Chan

Enable to scan for the optimal channel at regular intervals. This may result in re-connection of all connected clients.

Time-based scan (available if Dyn Chan is enabled)

Enable to set a time at which the scan should take place.

Select Scan-Time (available if Time-based scan is enabled)

Click Add New Item and select a scanning time schedule.

TX Power

Select the transmission power for the AP.

Default: 100%

Channel 5 GHz

Select a channel for your wireless network.

Default: Auto

Note: Selecting “Auto” will automatically select the least used channel for transmission.

Dyn Chan

Enable to scan for the optimal channel at regular intervals. This may result in re-connection of all connected clients.

Time-based scan (available if Dyn Chan is enabled)

Enable to set a time at which the scan should take place.

Select Scan-Time (available if Time-based scan is enabled)

Click Add New Item and select a scanning time schedule.

TX Power 5GHz

Select the transmission power for the AP.

Default: 100%

STP

Select Enabled to use Spanning Tree protocol (STP). STP prevents bridge loops.

Default: Disabled

VLAN Tagging

Select to connect the AP with an existing VLAN Ethernet interface.

Default: Disabled

AP VLAN ID (available if VLAN Tagging is enabled)

Specify the VLAN ID that will be used by the AP to connect to the device.

The VLAN ID can be any number between 2 and 4094.

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 415

Figure 376: Edit Access Point

6. Click Save.

Access Point Groups

The Access Point Groups page allows you to organize access points in groups.

Protect > Wireless > Access Point Groups This page provides an overview of all access point groups and Local Wi-

Fi Devices. You can add, edit or delete a group. For each group, the list shows:

Name

Name of the access point group.

Status

Status of the access point group (active/inactive). Use the toggle switch to enable/disable the access point group.

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 416

Wireless Networks

Wireless networks the access point group is assigned to.

Access Points

List of all the access points in this group.

Figure 377: Access Point Groups

Add Access Point Group

This page describes how to add an access point group.

1. Go to Protect > Wireless > Access Point Groups and click Add.

2. Specify the access point group details.

Name

Enter a descriptive name for the new access point group.

Wireless Networks

Search for wireless networks and select the wireless networks that should be broadcasted by the access points of this group.

Note: For an access point to broadcast a wireless network some conditions have to be fulfilled. They are explained in the chapter

Access Points

in the section Rules for

Assigning Networks to APs.

VLAN Tagging

Select Enable if you want to activate VLAN tagging.

Note: Make sure that the VLAN interface is assigned to the zone which is selected in the Allowed Zone list on the Protect > Wireless > Wireless Settings page.

Access Points

Search for access points and select the ones you want to add to this group.

Note: Local Wi-Fi devices cannot be grouped and do not appear in the Access Point list. Local Wi-Fi devices appear in the Access Point Groups list.

Figure 378: Add Access Point Group

3. Click Save.

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 417

Mesh Networks

The Mesh Networks menu allows you to create mesh networks and associate APs.

Protect > Wireless > Mesh Networks

In a mesh network, multiple access points communicate with each other and broadcast a common wireless network.

On the one hand, access points connected via a mesh network can broadcast the same wireless network to clients, thus working as a single access point, while covering a wider area. On the other hand, a mesh network can be used to bridge Ethernet networks without laying cables. Access points associated with a mesh network can play one of two roles: root access point or mesh access point. Both broadcast the mesh network, thus the number of other wireless networks they can broadcast is reduced by one.

Root access point

This has a wired connection to Sophos XG Firewall and provides a mesh network. An access point can be root access point for multiple mesh networks.

Mesh access point

This needs a mesh network to connect to Sophos XG Firewall via a root access point. An access point can be mesh access point for only one mesh network at a time.

A mesh network can be used to implement a wireless bridge or a wireless repeater:

Wireless bridge

Using two access points, you can establish a wireless connection between two Ethernet segments. A wireless bridge is useful when you cannot lay a cable to connect those Ethernet segments. While the first Ethernet segment with your Sophos XG Firewall is connected to the

Ethernet interface of the root access point, the second Ethernet segment has to be connected to the Ethernet interface of the mesh access point.

Using multiple mesh access points, you can connect more Ethernet segments.

Wireless repeater

Your Ethernet with your Sophos XG Firewall is connected to the Ethernet interface of a root access point. The root access point has a wireless connection via the mesh network to a mesh access point, which broadcasts wireless networks to wireless clients.

This page displays a list of all the available mesh networks. You can add, edit or delete a mesh network. For each network the list shows:

Mesh-ID

Identifier of the mesh network.

Status

Indicates the current status of the mesh network

Frequency Band

Frequency band on which the associated access points broadcast the mesh network.

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 418

Related tasks

Add Mesh Network

on page 418

This page describes how to create mesh networks and assign access points to them.

Add Mesh Network

This page describes how to create mesh networks and assign access points to them.

1. Go to Protect > Wireless > Mesh Networks and click Add.

2. Specify the General Settings details.

Mesh ID

Enter a unique ID for the mesh network.

Frequency Band

Select a frequency band from the available options:

• 5 GHz

• 2.4 GHz

Access points assigned to this network will transmit the mesh network on the selected frequency band. Generally, it is a good idea to use a different frequency band for the mesh network than for the broadcasted wireless networks.

Description

Enter a description or other information to identify the mesh network.

Access Point

Select one or more mesh access points.

a) Click the + icon to select access points that broadcast the mesh network.

b) Specify the Mesh Network Role details.

Access Points

Select an access point.

Note: Except for AP5 and AP10, all the APs can be used for broadcasting mesh networks.

Role

Define the access point’s role for the selected mesh network. A root access point is directly connected to Sophos XG Firewall. A mesh access point, after having received its initial configuration, once unplugged from the Sophos XG Firewall will connect to a root access point via the mesh network.

Note: An access point can be mesh access point only for one mesh network.

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 419

Figure 379: Add Mesh Network

c) Click Save.

The dialog window is closed and the access point is added to the Access Points list.

3. Click Save.

Note: It is crucial for the initial configuration to plug the mesh access point, like every other access point, into one of the Ethernet segments selected in the Allowed Zone box on the Protect >

Wireless > Wireless page.

Hotspots

The Hotspots menu allows you to enable the Hotspots feature and define users who are allowed to view and distribute hotspot access information.

Protect > Wireless > Hotspots

By means of hotspots cafés, hotels, companies, etc. can provide time- and traffic-restricted Internet access to guests.

The hotspot feature is available within the Wireless Protection subscription, but also works with wired networks.

Note: You can also view and manage the hotspot status on the Monitor & Analyze > Diagnostics >

Services page.

Hotspot Generation

In the first step, the administrator creates and enables a hotspot with a specific type of access. The following types are available:

• Terms of use acceptance: The guest is presented with terms of use, which you can define, and has to select a checkbox to get access.

• Password of the day: The guest has to enter a password to get access. The password changes on a daily basis.

• Voucher: The guest gets a voucher and has to enter the voucher code to get access. The voucher can be limited in the number of devices, in time, and traffic.

Distribution of Access Information to Guests

With the access types Password of the day and Voucher, the access information has to be handed out to the guests.

Therefore you can define users who are allowed to manage and distribute access information. Those users receive and distribute the access information via the Hotspot tab of the User Portal:

• Password of the day: The current password can be sent via email and the users find the password in the User

Portal. The users forward the password to the guests. They can generate or enter a new password. The former password automatically becomes invalid and active sessions will be terminated. Other potential users will be informed of the new password, either by email or via the User Portal, depending on what is configured for them.

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 420

• Voucher: In the User Portal, users can create vouchers, each with a unique code. Different types of vouchers can be available if specified by the administrator. The vouchers can be printed or exported and given to the guests. A list of created vouchers gives an overview of their usage and helps to manage them.

Legal Information

In many countries, operating a public wireless LAN is subject to specific national laws, restricting access to websites of legally questionable content (e.g., file sharing sites, extremist websites, etc.). To meet this requirement, you can combine the hotspot with the web protection capabilities of Sophos XG Firewall which empowers you to control web access by blocking or allowing a single URL to an entire website category type. Sophos XG Firewall puts you in control of who accesses what and when. That way you can restrict hotspot usage as national or corporate policies require you to. In addition, the current feature of Sophos XG Firewall permits advanced logging and reporting capabilities. Reporting tracks who visited which site, when, and how many times, allowing you to identify inappropriate usage in case you want to operate a hotspot without any access restrictions. Which is even more important if legal regulations require you to register your hotspot at the national’s regulatory body.

For each hotspot, the list shows:

Name

Displays the name of the hotspot.

Hotspot Type

Displays the type of the hotspot.

Note: If you have configured direct proxy settings within your web browser and using Hotspot, you need to add Device’s IP in the proxy exception list.

Related concepts

Hotspot Voucher Definition

on page 428

Hotspot voucher definitions specify network access. You can use voucher definitions to limit the validity period, time quota, and data volume for users who have access to voucher-type hotspots.

Related tasks

Add Hotspot

on page 420

This page describes how to add a hotspot.

Add Hotspot

This page describes how to add a hotspot.

Note: A hotspot has to be assigned to an existing interface, typically a WLAN interface. All hosts using this interface will automatically be restricted by the hotspot. Therefore, before you create a hotspot you would typically create a wireless network with client traffic Separate Zone, then create an interface for the respective WLAN interface hardware.

1. Go to Protect > Wireless > Hotspots and click Add.

2. Specify the followings:

Name

Enter a unique name for the hotspot.

Description

Enter a description or other information to identify the Hotspot.

Interfaces

Select or add the interfaces which are to be restricted by the hotspot. An interface can only be used by one hotspot.

Note: Hotspots will work only on LAN and DMZ member interfaces of the bridge.

You should not select an uplink interface here because traffic to the Internet will be completely blocked afterwards. Additionally, we strongly advise not to use interfaces

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 421 applied by servers which provide essential services like authentication. You may irreversibly lock yourself out of Sophos XG Firewall.

Application Filter Policy

Select or add an application filter policy for the hotspot.

Web Policy

Select or add a web policy for the hotspot.

IPS Policy

Select or add IPS policy for the hotspot.

Traffic Shaping Policy

Select or add a traffic shaping policy for the hotspot.

Redirect to HTTPS

Enable this option to redirect users to HTTPS.

Hostname Type (available only if Redirect to HTTPS is enabled)

Select the hostname type for the hotspot.

Available Options:

• None (IP Address)

• Custom hostname

Hostname (available only if Custom hostname is selected)

Add a hostname for the redirection.

Hotspot Type

Select a hotspot type for the selected interfaces.

• Terms of Use Acceptance - Customers can access the Internet after accepting the terms of use.

Session Expires

Select the time span after which the access will be denied. After that, with the hotspot type Terms of

Use Acceptance, the users have to accept the terms of use again to log in.

Terms of Use

Add the text to be displayed as terms of use. Simple HTML markup and hyperlinks are allowed.

• Password of the Day - A new password will be created automatically once a day. This password will be available in the User Portal on the Hotspots tab which is available to all users specified for this hotspot. Additionally it will be sent to the specified email address(es).

Password Creation Time

Select the time of the day at which the new password will be created. At this time the former password will immediately become invalid and current sessions will be terminated.

Send Password by email to

Add email addresses to which the password will be sent.

Synchronize password with PSK of wireless networks

Select this option to synchronize the new generated/saved password with wireless PSK.

Note: With the new PSK all APs that are configured with a separate zone wireless network that is also used as a hotspot interface will be reconfigured and restarted. This means all connections will be dropped.

Administrative Users

Select or add users for administrative settings. Administrative users are allowed to create vouchers or change the password of the day in the User Portal. By default nobody is allowed to enter administrative settings.

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 422

• Voucher With this hotspot type, tokens with different limitations and properties can be generated in the User Portal, printed and given to customers. After entering the code, the customers can then access the Internet directly.

Voucher Definitions

Add or select the voucher definitions you want to use for the hotspot. How to add a voucher definition is explained on the Add Hotspot Voucher page.

Devices per voucher

Enter the number of devices which are allowed to log in with one voucher during its lifetime. It is not recommended to use the “unlimited” option.

Administrative Users

Users Have to Accept Terms of Use (not available with hotspot type Terms of Use Acceptance)

Enable this option if you want the hotspot users to accept your terms of use before accessing the

Internet.

Terms of Use

Add the text to be displayed as terms of use. Simple HTML markup and hyperlinks are allowed.

Redirect to URL after login

Enable this so that users will be redirected automatically to a particular URL after entering password or voucher data. The URL could, for example, be your hotel’s website or a web page stating your portal system policies.

URL

Enter the URL to which the user will be redirected .

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 423

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 424

3. Specify the Hotspot Customization details.

Enable Customization

Enable to use a customized HTML file with your own images and stylesheets. Additionally, you can customize the voucher layout.

Customization Type

Select the customization type.

• Basic Uses the default login page template. If required, change logo, title, and text.

Logo

Upload a logo for the login page. Supported image file types are jpg, jpeg, png and gif. A maximum image width of 300 px and height of 100 px is recommended (depending on the title length).

Scale logo to recommended size

If selected, a logo exceeding the recommended width or height will be scaled down and displayed in the recommended size. If it is not selected, the logo will be displayed in the original size.

Title

Add a title for the login page. Simple HTML markup and hyperlinks are allowed.

Custom Text

Add additional text for the login page. You can, for example, enter the SSID of the wireless network to be used. Simple HTML markup and hyperlinks are allowed.

• Full Select an individual login HTML page.

Login Page Template

Select the HTML template you want to use for your individual login page. Browse to select and upload the file. In this template, you can use variables that can insert information for each hotspot dynamically. For example, you can add the company name and administrator information, the terms of use and the login form. See detailed information in the chapter Login Page Template.

Images/Stylesheet

Add files that are referenced in your login page template, e.g., images, stylesheets, or JavaScript files. Browse to select and upload the files.

Voucher Template (only available for the hotspot type Voucher)

Browse to select and upload a PDF file with the voucher layout. By default, a default template is used. The voucher PDF file has to be of PDF version PDF 1.5 or lower. It may have any page size and format—both size and format will be adjusted during voucher creation in the User Portal, depending on page size and number of vouchers per page specified there.

The PDF file may contain the following variables that will be replaced with the respective values during voucher generation in the User Portal:

• Wireless network name (SSID): <?ssid0?> (and <?ssid1?>, <?ssid2?> and so on, if the

WLAN has more than one SSIDs)

• Wireless network password: <?psk0?> (and <?psk1?>, <?psk2?> and so on, if the WLAN has more than one SSIDs)

• Voucher code: <?code?>

• Voucher validity time:

<?validity?>

• Voucher data limit: <?datalimit?>

• Voucher time limit: <?timelimit?>

• Comment: <?comment?>

• QR code with the hotspot access data encoded:

<?qrX?>. The upper left corner of the QR code will be placed on the lower left corner of the variable.

Note: When using variables, the PDF file must include the entire character sets of the fonts used. When a variable is replaced by its value, and one of the substitute characters is not available, it

Sophos XG Firewall | Protect | 425 will be displayed incorrectly. We recommend to add the string

abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyzABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ0123456789?

> (for English usage) to your PDF file, which will be removed automatically during voucher generation. If you use another language, you can include any other character set you want. Additionally, we recommend to use a separate line for the variables as the layout could get corrupted if the substituted text is too long.

Figure 380: Hotspot Customization

4. Click Save.

You can see if the hotspot is running on the Configure > System Services > Services page. There you can also stop or start the hotspot.

Related concepts